Equipment Mounting Info - Data Sheets

ATTACHMENT 2
EQUIPMENT DATA SHEETS
DM_VAN/255235-00014/8097629.13
Appendix 2E Equipment and Furniture
ALL OR'S SHOULD BE CONSIDERED AS FULLY INTEGRATED WITH

VIDEO, VOICE ACTIVATION AND DEVICE/INSTRUMENT CONTROL
BERCHTOLD
Contractors Summary
for
CHROMOPHARE
Multiple Surgical Lights
This summary dimensional and loading data must be
used in conjunction with the detailed information in the
WARNING Chromophare Pre-Installation Guide for the specific light
model involved. Failure to include information from the
Pre-Installation Guide could result in a failure of the light to operate or
a failure of the superstructure. Failure of the super structure could
damage the light or the building or cause injury to patients or
personnel.
Project:
No. of Units
(Ref. Chart on Last Page)
Many health care facilities order Chromophare Surgical Lights for

several different rooms or areas. Each of these units may be
equipped differently. They may require different numbers of electric
circuits, different numbers of low voltage cables, and different
numbers and kinds of wall mount plates. Be sure to check the
customer order documents for the specific requirements for your
installation.
Copies of the all BERCHTOLD Pre-Installation Guides and most other
technical literature are available from our Web site
(www.berchtoldusa.com), by calling 800-243-5135, or by Faxing 843569-6133.
BERCHTOLD Recommended Superstructure Construction Detail (Refer to Owners Structural Engineer Drawings)
Chromophare Multiple Surgical Lights
Weights and Moments Design Specifications for Minimum Weights and Moments Design Specifications for Chromophare Multiple
Surgical Light
Standard
Weight
Lb (Kg)
Moment
Ft Lb (NM)
399 (182)
1517 (2056)
Weight - Lb
(Kg)
Moment - Ft Lb
(NM)
Single Light
155 (70)
392 (531)
Double Light
249 (113)
734 (995)
Triple Light
345 (157)
1102 (1494)
Flat Panel, Only
184 (84)
726 (984)
Single Light with Flat

Panel
303 (138)
1149 (1557)
Double Light with Flat
399 (182)
1517 (2056)
Light Mounting Plate Detail
3/4 Co nd uit to AC Ma ins

1 Co nd uit to Lig ht
Wa ll Co ntro l Bo x
1 Co nd uit to
(Op tio na l) Chro mo Visio n
Re mo te Ca me ra Co ntro l Bo x
Lig ht Mo unting
Pla te
(Be rc hto ld Sup p lie d )
Lig ht
Susp e nsio n Fla ng e
Co nd uit
Pla te
AC Po we r
Te rm ina l Blo c k
(Fla t Pa ne l)
Finishe d
Ce iling
Lig ht Arm
BERCHTOLD Corporation 1950 Hanahan Road Charleston, SC 29406

800 243-5135 Fax 843 569-6133 www.berchtoldusa.com
2008 All Rights Reserved. Specifications are subject to change without notice. Customer order documents are definitive.
700000147 Rev. 01
Contractors Summary for CHROMOPHARE Multiple Surgical Light

2"
(51mm)
10"
(254mm)
2"
(51mm)
8"
(203mm)
2"
(51mm)
(6mm)
5" (127mm)
Minimum Ed g e Dista nce
See Deta il Fig ure 1
(6mm)
TYPTop & Bottom
(TYP)
(6mm)
60" (1.5m) Maximum
By
Others
(TYP)
2"
(51mm)
5- (140mm)
Minimum
Structura l Concrete Sla b

Norma l Weig ht:
f' c = 3000 PSI (20684 kPa )
By
BERCHTOLD
LEGEND:
A
L Angle Superstructure
Brackets: 4 x 4 x 12
min. Four Required.
B
Pipe to fit 6-5/8 ID hole
in Mtg. Plate
C
Chromophare Mounting
Plate supplied by
Berchtold, including
threaded rods and nuts;
installed by contractor.
See Detail below
D
L Angle Support
Braces:
3 x 3 x 0.25 min. Four
Required.
E
Bottom of Chromophare
Mounting Plate must be
flush with the finished
ceiling.
F
Superstructure Mounting
Plate: 0.5 x 12 x 15
supplied by contractor.
See detail in the PreInstallation Guide Pg. 5.
G
Expansion Anchors
4 5 Min.
6 0 Ma x.
2"
(50mm)
E
Finished
Ceiling
Fig ure 2
Conduit Plate Installation

1. Select where on the mounting ring you want the conduit to terminate (any two adjacent nuts).
2. Back the nuts (a) down the all-thread rods (B) away from the light mounting plate (C).
3. Insert the conduit plate (D) under the light mounting plate, and tighten the nuts.
Room Layout
Figure 4

Wall Control Box and Electrical Specifications
A BERCHTOLD supplied wall control box is installed by the contractor. A wall control box can control up to three light heads. A contractor
supplied 4 x 4 Junction Box is required for each wall control box. The Junction box must be mounted directly behind the wall control box. See
Illustration on the front page for detail.
Electrical Specifications
Wiring must be complete before installation of the light. Power must be able to be turned on to test the light after installation.
AC Wiring:
Conduit and Boxes
General Notes On Conduit Requirements
One 120VAC, 50/60 Hz power
4 x 4 Junction box required for each
All conduit is to be a minimum of 3/4

supply line for each light
light wall control
(19mm) metallic U.N.O.
mounting
Front of box flush with the wall
Conduits are to be deburred, cleaned,
Minimum 3-wire, 14 AWG, 600V
Top of box 53 above finished floor

capped, and furnished with nylon pull rope.
Each lamp draws 2 Amps
1 conduit (with finish grommets at
Contractor is to provide cable protection
Run through flexible conduit

each end) from junction box and
bushings on all boxes and conduit stub-outs.
Wires exit the ceiling at the

terminate at conduit plate
Conduit stub-outs, junction boxes, and

mounting ring and fall a
2 X 4 Optional box for Camera

outlets must be suitably labeled for
minimum of 18 below the
Control
identification of circuits.
ceiling.
*Wallbox Dimensions are in millimeters

Soffits
The contractor needs to be aware of the CHROMOPHARE soffit requirements while preparing the light superstructure and ceiling supports. The
Chromophare soffit functions as a part of the electrical enclosure system for the lighting system. They also provide an aesthetic finish above the
light arm. Soffits are installed by BERCHTOLD personnel after the contractor has made the electrical connections to the light controls at the top of
the drop tube. (See Chart to determine soffit.)
The contractor should ensure that ceiling opening for the light mounting superstructure does not exceed the diameter of the soffit. Also, no other
systems components (such as air returns, PA speakers, sprinkler heads, room lights, etc) are allowed within the soffit area.
OR. #
Ref. Room
Layout drawing
number
Unit
Flat Panel
Camera
Voice Activation
SK Box
Soffit Size (dia.)

23
18
ALL OR'S SHOULD BE CONSIDERED AS FULLY

INTEGRATED WITH VIDEO, VOICE ACTIVATION AND
DEVICE/INSTRUMENT CONTROL
TELETOM
PREINSTALLATION MANUAL
MANUAL ORGANIZATION
SAFETY
700000007 Rev. 3
ii
TELETOM Pre-Installation Guide
MANUAL ORGANIZATION
SAFETY
MANUAL ORGANIZATION
This pre-installation manual contains five sections following this organizational information.
This manual organization section contains a Table of Contents listing that begins on page iv. This
listing can be used as an index to the manual. This section also contains important safety information
for the owners staff or contractor.
SECTION CONTENTS DESCRIPTION
Section 1Introduction
Section 1 describes the TELETOM Equipment Management System, including its physical and
functional specifications. This section also defines BERCHTOLD's and the owners pre-installation
responsibilities.
Section 2Pre-Installation Structural Requirements
Section 2 describes the specific pre-installation structural requirements for each of the three
TELETOM mounting systems:
General Superstructure design and construction recommendations
Single Mount Equipment Management Systems
Single Mount Equipment Management Systems mounted with surgical lights or monitor
platforms
Tandem Mount Equipment Management Systems
Section 3Pre-Installation Wiring Requirements
Section 3 describes the wiring components and the power supplies the owner must provide before the
equipment is installed.
Section 4Pre-Installation Requirements for Medical Gas Risers
Section 4 describes the installation of the medical gas riser, which includes a provision for an air
supply for the optional pneumatic brake.
Section 5Pre-Installation Requirements for Options and Accessories
Section 5 describes the pre-installation requirements for the optional features and equipment
available for the TELETOM Equipment Management Systems:
TELEVAC Smoke Evacuation System
Video equipment
700000007 Rev. 3
iii
MANUAL ORGANIZATION
SAFETY
CONTENTS
SECTION 1INTRODUCTION.....................................................................................................................................1-1
DESCRIPTION............................................................................................................................................................1-1
PRE-INSTALLATION RESPONSIBILITIES ............................................................................................................1-2
BERCHTOLD RESPONSIBILITIES...................................................................................................................1-2
OWNER RESPONSIBILITIES............................................................................................................................1-3
STIFFNESS ..................................................................................................................................................1-3
SUPERSTRUCTURE DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION RECOMMENDATIONS .................................1-4
WIRING........................................................................................................................................................1-4
MEDICAL (AND OTHER) GASES.............................................................................................................1-4
OPTIONAL TELEVAC SMOKE EVACUATION SYSTEM ...................................................................1-5
TESTING ......................................................................................................................................................1-5
STORAGE AND HANDLING....................................................................................................................................1-5
PRE-INSTALLATION COMPONENTS.............................................................................................................1-5
TELETOM EQUIPMENT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM COMPONENTS........................................................1-6
SECTION 2PRE-INSTALLATION STRUCTURAL REQUIREMENTS ...............................................................2-1
INTRODUCTION........................................................................................................................................................2-1
GENERAL SUPERSTRUCTURE DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION RECOMMENDATIONS .............................2-1
GENERAL NOTES ON SUPERSTRUCTURE DESIGN ...................................................................................2-2
SINGLE MOUNT EQUIPMENT MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS................................................................................2-3
IDENTIFICATION ..............................................................................................................................................2-3
SUPERSTRUCTURE DESIGN LOADS .............................................................................................................2-3
TYPICAL DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION FOR TELETOM
SINGLE MOUNT SUPERSTRUCTURE ............................................................................................................2-4
MOUNTING MATERIALS AND DETAILS......................................................................................................2-6
CEILING OPENING AND SOFFIT ENVELOPE...............................................................................................2-8
TANDEM MOUNT EQUIPMENT MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS ...........................................................................2-11
IDENTIFICATION ............................................................................................................................................2-11
SUPERSTRUCTURE DESIGN LOADS ...........................................................................................................2-11
TYPICAL TANDEM MOUNT SUPERSTRUCTURE DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION .............................2-11
MOUNTING MATERIALS AND DETAILS....................................................................................................2-12
CEILING OPENING AND SOFFIT ENVELOPE.............................................................................................2-15
SECTION 3PRE-INSTALLATION WIRING REQUIREMENTS.........................................................................3-18
BERCHTOLD SUPPLIED ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS (STANDARD) ............................................................3-1
ELECTRICAL JUNCTION BOX ........................................................................................................................3-1
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS ....................................................................................................................3-2
ADDITIONAL ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLIES...........................................................................................3-3
OWNER PRE-INSTALLATION WIRING REQUIREMENTS (STANDARD) ........................................................3-3
WIRING RUNS....................................................................................................................................................3-3
ELECTRICAL JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION ..........................................................................................3-3
WIRING CONNECTIONS ..................................................................................................................................3-5
HIGH VOLTAGE CONDUIT..............................................................................................................................3-5
LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................3-5
COMBINATION BOOM & LIGHT / FLAT PANEL
700000007 Rev. 3
iv
3-6
MANUAL ORGANIZATION
SAFETY
SECTION 4PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR MEDICAL GASES ................................................4-1
BERCHTOLD SUPPLIED MEDICAL GAS RISER ..................................................................................................4-1
PNEUMATIC BRAKE GAS SPECIFICATIONS.......................................................................................................4-1
OWNER PRE-INSTALLATION MEDICAL GAS RISER REQUIREMENTS .........................................................4-1
MEDICAL GAS PIPING .....................................................................................................................................4-2
MEDICAL GAS RISER INSTALLATION .........................................................................................................4-2
SECTION 5PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES .........................5-2
TELEVAC SMOKE EVACUATION SYSTEM .......................................................................................................5-2
BERCHTOLD SUPPLIED TELEVAC MOTOR...............................................................................................5-2
OWNER PRE-INSTALLATION TELEVAC PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ..............................5-2
TELEVAC VACUUM MOTOR INSTALLATION ...................................................................................5-3
VIDEO EQUIPMENT .................................................................................................................................................5-4
OWNER PRE-INSTALLATION VIDEO REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................5-4
700000007 Rev. 3
v
MANUAL ORGANIZATION
SAFETY
SAFETY
General
This manual uses special symbols to help alert you to important information:
This symbol identifies a WARNING. A warning indicates that the procedure in the following
text involves actions that could cause harm or death to an individual if certain precautions are
not taken. The warning text always provides specific information on what you must do to
avoid the risk.
CAUTION
This symbol identifies a CAUTION. A caution indicates that the procedure in the following
text involves actions that could cause damage to the equipment, including the failure to
operate. The caution text always provides specific information on what you must do to avoid
the risk.
This symbol identifies a NOTE. A note contains information that can help you perform the
procedure in the following text more effectively.
Warnings Used in this Manual
The following warnings are used in this manual. Since the procedures described in this manual will
be performed by the owners staff or a contractor hired by the owner, the owner has the
responsibility to ensure that these and other appropriate safety precautions are followed.
Loaded shipping pallets are heavy. They can cause injury to people or damage to the
equipment if not handled properly. Use proper lifting equipment and procedures.
Do not attach supplemental supports to the pipe. The supports will not constrain the rotational
forces when attached to the pipe. This could lead to a failure of the Equipment Management
System to operate as intended. Drifting of the Equipment Management System could result in
injury to personnel.
Live electrical circuits can cause injury or death. Lock out and tag out power supplies to
prevent work on live electrical circuits.
700000007 Rev. 3
vi
MANUAL ORGANIZATION
SAFETY
Cautions Used in this Manual

The following cautions are used in this manual. Since the procedures described in this manual will
be performed by the owners staff or a contractor hired by the owner, the owner has the
responsibility to ensure that these and other appropriate safety precautions are followed.
CAUTION
The owner or the owners contractor has the final responsibility for the strength and rigidity of
the superstructure. BERCHTOLD Corporation does not warrant or certify superstructure
designs. An inadequate superstructure will affect the ability of the TELETOM unit to
perform in the manner intended. An inadequate superstructure design can also result in
damage to the equipment. Equipment warranty service charges related to an inadequate
superstructure design or installation are at the customers expense.
CAUTION
Store the TELETOM Equipment Management System components out of the elements and
away from dust, debris, and moisture. Protect them from damage. Failure to protect the
components could lead to damage that will prevent proper installation and performance in
service.
CAUTION
Do not open the packages either before or after they are at the installation site (room). Special
lifts, clamps, and other tools are needed to unpack the TELETOM Equipment Management
System and install it without damage. BERCHTOLD is not responsible for damage to the
equipment caused by improper handling by the owner or the owners contractor.
CAUTION
Orientation of the TELETOM Tandem Mounting Plate is critical for installation and
operation. Refer to your layout drawings for the proper orientation.
700000007 Rev. 3
vii
MANUAL ORGANIZATION
SAFETY
400/600 Series Anesthesia Boom
700000007 Rev. 3
viii
SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
SECTION 1INTRODUCTION
This manual provides information that a new TELETOM Equipment Management System owner
needs in order to prepare the site for installation of the equipment. The manual defines
BERCHTOLDs and the owners pre-installation responsibilities. It describes the pre-installation
requirements of both the basic equipment and the optional features and equipment that are available
for the TELETOM Equipment Management System.
DESCRIPTION
FIGURE 1-1 shows a typical TELETOM Equipment Management System application.
FIGURE 1-1 TELETOM Equipment Management System Featuring Dual Arms with Articulation
The TELETOM Equipment Management System eliminates clutter and improves efficiency in
medical service environments by replacing multiple carts, cords, and cables with a convenient ceiling
mounted system. It is the primary platform for OR integration. Depending on the model selected,
TELETOM Equipment Management Systems can provide multiple platforms to support and
position equipment and to provide delivery systems for electrical power and medical gases.
700000007 Rev. 3
1-1
SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
All TELETOM Equipment Management Systems are ETL certified to UL 60601.

TELETOM Equipment Management Systems will use one of the three ceiling mounting systems
described in this manual depending on the configuration. Installation of each of the following
models is described in this manual:
Single mount TELETOM (see page 2-4)
Single mount TELETOM models with integral CHROMOPHARE Surgical Light or

CHROMOVISION Monitor Arm Mount (see page 2-5)
Tandem mount TELETOM (see page 2-12)
PRE-INSTALLATION RESPONSIBILITIES
BERCHTOLD personnel install each TELETOM Equipment Management System on ceiling
support superstructures designed and constructed by the owner.
Generally, the owner must design, supply, and install all components above the finished ceiling.
These components include the supporting superstructure as well as the electrical and medical gas
supply lines.
BERCHTOLD supplies the drawings, parts, and instructions that the new TELETOM Equipment
Management System owner needs to complete their pre-installation responsibilities. We also
schedule our technicians to arrive to complete our installation activities based on the owners
commitment to have the area ready for these activities. If a return visit is required due to owners
failure to have the area adequately prepared, we reserve the right to bill the customer for the
additional travel costs and installation time at our normal service rates.
BERCHTOLD Responsibilities
BERCHTOLD Supplies the following components for pre-installation by the owner or the owners
contractor:
Owners configuration drawings
TELETOM mounting plate (see pages 2-7, 2-9, 2-14, and 2-16)
Electrical junction box (to be installed on the mounting platesee page 3-4)
Medical gas valve bridges (optionalsee page 4-3)
TELEVAC motor (optionalsee page 5-3)
The superstructure described in this manual is based on a proven design and the materials specified
in this manual. Any deviations from this design or material selection should be considered only after
consultation with a structural engineer. BERCHTOLD cannot be responsible for the superstructure
design or the materials used.
If you have any questions regarding the information in this guide, call BERCHTOLD Technical
Services at 1-800-243-5135.
700000007 Rev. 3
1-2
SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
Owner Responsibilities
If the TELETOM Equipment Management System will be installed in an existing structure, any old
equipment or interfering structural elements must be removed to prevent interference with
installation activities.
CAUTION
To function safely and effectively, the TELETOM Equipment Management System must be
installed on a strong and rigid ceiling support. Thus, the TELETOM Equipment Management
System requires a significant superstructure above the ceiling. An installed unit must support large
weights, moments, and meet stringent deflection criteria. We strongly recommend that the owner
consult a structural engineer prior to designing and installing the superstructure.
The owner or the owners consulting structural engineer must verify the following to assure a safe
and satisfactory installation:
The building structure is capable of supporting the loads involved. (See Table 2-1: Single
Mount Weights and Moments on page 2-3, or Table 2-2: Tandem Mount TELETOM
Weights and Moments on page 2-11).
The building structure is capable of supporting any additional loading required by local
building codes.
All electrical and medical gas designs and installations meet all appropriate code
requirements.
Stiffness
In service, even a very small movement of the TELETOM mounting plate out of the horizontal
plane may result in drift of the equipment. To prevent this, the BERCHTOLD supplied mounting
plate must be installed in a perfectly horizontal plane ( 0.1) with the threaded rods pointing down.
The superstructure also must be rigid enough to prevent the mounting plate from rotating more than
0.1 when the specified design load is applied.
Superstructure Design and Construction Recommendations
Because the superstructure is the owners responsibility, the design and construction
recommendations describe only one of the many possible alternatives that can be used. Many
factors, such as building structure type (e.g., concrete, steel, brick), space available above the
finished ceiling, obstructions within the ceiling cavity, owner restrictions (e.g., welding within the
ceiling cavity), economics, and contractor preferences may require different approaches to the actual
design and installation of the TELETOM Equipment Management System superstructure.
700000007 Rev. 3
1-3
SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
A visual structural review should be requested and completed before the finished ceiling is installed.
Once the superstructure construction is completed, the owner or the owners contractor should
contact BERCHTOLD for a visual structural review. When the visual structural review is complete,
the BERCHTOLD representative will provide the results to the customer. One of these results may
be a recommendation that a load simulation be conducted.
A load simulation is not a certification of the structure. Its purpose is to help the owner or the
owners contractor determine where the superstructure can be improved prior to installation of the
TELETOM Equipment Management System.
If a load simulation is recommended, there will be an extra charge for each superstructure mounting
tested.
Wiring
The owner or the owners contractor must install the power lines between a mains supply and the
TELETOM Equipment Management System. Refer to the owners configuration drawings
(provided by BERCHTOLD) for the type and number of circuits required.
Wiring must be installed and power must be able to be turned on prior to installation of the
TELETOM Equipment Management System.
After installation of the TELETOM Equipment Management System is complete, the owner or the
owners contractor must make the final electrical connections to the equipment.
See Section 3 Pre-Installation Wiring Requirements for wiring and circuit information.
Medical (and other) Gases
The owner or the owners contractor must install the BERCHTOLD supplied valve bridges on the
BERCHTOLD supplied mounting plate.
The owner or the owners contractor also must complete the connections to the TELETOM
Equipment Management System for the medical gas and/or the pneumatic brake options.
Gas piping must be installed and piping must be pressurized, properly tested, and capped prior to
installation of the TELETOM Equipment Management System.
See Pre-Installation Requirements for Medical Gases Riser in Section 4 for plumbing and
connection information.
Optional TELEVAC Smoke Evacuation System
The owner or the owners contractor must install the wiring between the TELETOM Equipment
Management System and the TELEVAC motor. The owner or owners contractor also must install
the motor and any flexible tubing connected to the motor.
See TELEVAC Smoke Evacuation System in Section 5 for specific mounting, wiring, and other
connection information.
700000007 Rev. 3
1-4
SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
Testing
The owner or the owners contractor must test and certify system components before installation of
the TELETOM Equipment Management System will be scheduled. This testing and certification
must include the following items:
Superstructure
Electrical wiring
Medical and pneumatic gas supply
STORAGE AND HANDLING
Pre-Installation Components
BERCHTOLD ships the mounting plate and the associated electrical junction box with field wirable
terminal blocks in advance of the other TELETOM Equipment Management System components.
We also ship the valve bridges in advance of the other TELETOM Equipment Management System
components if the medical gas option was ordered. These items may be in separate packages or
shipments; the valve bridge, especially, must be constructed with fittings for the gases specified prior
to shipment. Deliver these pre-installation components to the superstructure construction crew as
soon as they are received.
TELETOM Equipment Management System Components
Loaded shipping pallets are heavy. They can cause injury to people or damage to the
equipment if not handled properly. Use proper lifting equipment and procedures.
CAUTION
Store the TELETOM Equipment Management System components out of the elements and
away from dust, debris, and excess moisture. Protect them from damage. Failure to protect
the components could lead to damage that will prevent proper installation and performance in
service.
BERCHTOLD ships TELETOM Equipment Management System components via LTL truck or
moving van on a pallet with a plastic covering. The equipment and its packaging weigh more than
500 pounds. Handle and store the equipment properly to avoid injury to personnel or damage to the
components.
CAUTION
Do not open the packages either before or after they are at the installation site (room). Special
lifts, clamps, and other tools are needed to unpack the TELETOM Equipment Management
System and install it without damage. BERCHTOLD is not responsible for damage to the
equipment caused by improper handling by the owner or the owners contractor.
The owner is responsible for unloading the equipment from the delivery truck and moving the
equipment, in its shipping packages, to a secure on-site storage area. The shipping containers should
not be opened or emptied by the owners personnel or by the contractors personnel. The Berchtold
700000007 Rev. 3
1-5
SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
installer will bring special lifts, clamps, and other tools needed to handle and install the equipment
without damage.
If it is necessary to store the equipment between the time it is received and the time it is installed, the
customer is responsible for moving it to and from storage and for protecting it from damage while in
storage.
700000007 Rev. 3
1-6
SECTION 2
PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
SECTION 2PRE-INSTALLATION STRUCTURAL REQUIREMENTS

INTRODUCTION
This section describes the superstructure recommended for TELETOM Equipment Management
Systems. Typical TELETOM Equipment Management System configurations are described: Single
Mount, Light and Monitor Arm Mount, and Tandem Mount. A discussion of the pre-installation
requirements (i.e., wiring) common to all mounting systems follows in sections 3, 4, and 5.
The superstructures described are based on proven designs and the materials specified. Any
deviations from these designs or material selections should be considered only after consultation with
a structural engineer. BERCHTOLD cannot be responsible for the superstructure designs or the
materials used.
If you have any questions regarding the pre-installation requirements for any TELETOM
Equipment Management System, call BERCHTOLD Technical Services at 1-800-243-5135.
In addition to the following superstructure design and construction recommendations, Unistrut
Construction (800-468-9510).offers a structure they have specifically designed and tested to meet the
moment loading, deflection & rotation requirements of our exclusive design criteria:
The "UBS-2" design incorporates a number of very specific structural attributes & is only
available from Unistrut Construction's corporate office in Chicago, IL. (800-468-9510).
When considering this type of structure, contact Berchtold Corporation technical services at
800-243-5135 x2 to obtain information on this exclusive design, when calling reference the
"UBS-2.
GENERAL SUPERSTRUCTURE DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION RECOMMENDATIONS
These design and construction recommendations describe only one of the many possible alternatives
that can be used. Many factors, such as building structure type (e.g., concrete, steel, brick), space
available above the finished ceiling, obstructions within the ceiling cavity, owner restrictions (e.g.,
welding within the ceiling cavity), economics, and contractor preferences may require different
approaches to the actual design and installation of the TELETOM Equipment Management System
superstructure.
The following points describe items that successful superstructures tend to have in common.
1. The superstructure connects directly to the building structure with supplemental beam
members.
Any supplemental beams (sometimes called spreader beams or kickers) must be very rigid to
restrain rotation of the mounting plate.
2. A single stiff element, such as a 6-inch pipe, connects the superstructure to the mounting
plate.
a. Bending of the mounting plate and deformations of small members and connectors will
contribute to mounting plate rotation.
b. Use stiffening elements on the mounting plate if a large central pipe is not used.
c.
Do not connect supplemental beams to the structural pipe; connect supplemental beams
only to the mounting plate.
3. Rigid component connections.
700000007 Rev. 3
2-1
SECTION 2
a. When loaded, clip angles and plates deform, and bolts elongate. These movements
produce deflection within the system that must be accounted for.
b. The use of rigid clip angles and plates, and the loading of bolts in shear (rather than
tension) can minimize deformations.
4. Welded component connections.

a. Welding eliminates clip angle deformation, bolt elongation, bolt slip within the bolt
holes, and the potential for improper bolt tightening.
b. Properly tightened bolts and rigid connections minimize deformations.
General Notes on Superstructure Design
The following information was extracted from the General Notes included with the Professional
Engineers Certification of the TELETOM superstructure design described in this manual. The
owners structural engineering consultant should provide similar site-specific information for the
construction crew or contractor.
1. The engineer of record is to design and verify the structure and/or existing support tracks to
support the indicated loads.
2. Horizontal forces and moments may occur in any direction, acting at the top of the mounting
plate.
3. Materials:
a. Plates and shapes: ASTM A36
b. Aluminum plates: 6061-T6
c. Pipe: ASTM A53, Type E or S, Grade B
d. Tube: ASTM 500, Grade B
e. Bolts: ASTM A307, Grade C
f. Welding: E70XX electrodes
4. Expansion Anchors: HILTI KB-II (ICBO 4627), carbon steel
a. Test 50% of the anchors at 2000 pounds (907 kg) tension, or 50 ft lb (68 Nm) torque per
CBC 1925A.3.5.
b. Installed anchors must meet the following criteria:
i.
Hydraulic Ram Method:

The anchor should have no observable movement at the applicable test load. For
wedge and sleeve type anchors, a practical way to determine observable movement is
that the washer under the nut becomes loose.
ii. Torque Wrench Method (Wedge or Sleeve Type):
The applicable test torque must be reached within one-half (1/2) turn of the nut.
c. Testing should occur no sooner than 24 hours after installation of the anchors.
d. If any anchor fails testing, test all anchors until 20 consecutive anchors pass, then resume
the initial testing frequency.
700000007 Rev. 3
2-2
SECTION 2
e. Test equipment is to be calibrated by an approved testing laboratory in accordance with

standard recognized procedures.
SINGLE MOUNT EQUIPMENT MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS (TS)
CAUTION
Refer to Owner Responsibilities on page 1-3 for a description of the owners design and
construction responsibilities.
Identification
TELETOM single mount units are identified by a 500-series or 700-series model number and a TS
prefix. TELETOM units with integrated light(s) or monitor arms have a TC prefix.
The 500 Series units have zero, one, or two fixed arms. The 700 Series models have either one
articulating arm or one fixed arm above one articulating arm
Superstructure Design Loads
Table 2-1 shows the weight and moment for TELETOM single mount Equipment Management
Systems. The data shown are for the heaviest unit and the highest rotational moment. Designing for
the heaviest model with the highest torque will provide adequate support for the heaviest unit, but
will not significantly add to the cost of the installation of the lightest unit. This design margin also
increases flexibility for future product upgrades.
The installed weights and moments shown in Table 2-1 include both the weight of the TELETOM
components and the maximum equipment load.
Table 2-1. Single Mount TELETOM Weights and Moments
Static Standard
Weight
Moment
Lb (Kg)
Ft Lb (NM)
801 (363)
4071 (5520)
The superstructure must be strong enough to support the weight and rigid enough to constrain
rotation to less than 0.1 at the mounting plate.
700000007 Rev. 3
2-3
SECTION 2
Typical Design and Construction for TELETOM Single Mount Superstructure

FIGURE 2-1 shows the design and the construction materials recommended for a successful
TELETOM Equipment Management System single mount Installation. Other constructions are
possible. However, the use of other designs and construction materials should be considered only
after consultation with a structural engineer.
c = 3000PSI (20684 kPa)
TYP
See Figure 2-3
Structural Concrete Slab

Normal Weight
TELEVAC
Smoke
Evacuation
System
(See Section 5)
12-3/16
(310mm)
6mm
TYP
2
(51mm)
See Figure 2-4
TELEVAC
Hose to
TELETOM
Max. Length
10 (3m)
6mm
5
(127mm)
(8mm)
(8mm)
16
(406mm)
2
(51mm)
C
A
(8mm)
8
(203mm)
2
(51mm)
5 (127mm)
Minimum Edge Distance
Finished
Ceiling
(TYP Top & Bottom)

See Figure 2-3
See Figure 2-5 for Ceiling

Opening Clearance for Electrical
and Medical Gas Options
2
(51mm)
45 Min.
60 Max.
Soffit Envelope (Figure 2-6)

~23.25 Square X ~6Deep
(590mm Square X 150mm Deep)
60 (1.5mm) Maximum
5- (140mm)
Minimum
FIGURE 2-1 Recommended TELETOM Single Mount Superstructure

Design and Construction Materials
700000007 Rev. 3
2-4
SECTION 2

~23 Square X ~6Deep
(584mm Square X 150mm Deep)
60 Max.
45 Min.
(8mm)
(8mm)
5
(127mm)
12-3/16
(310mm)
See Figure 2-3
TYP
(See Section 5)
TELEVAC
Smoke
Evacuation
System
c = 3000PSI (20684 kPa)
Structural Concrete Slab

Normal Weight
6mm
TYP
6mm
Max. Length 10
(3m)
Hose to
TELETOM
TELEVAC
See Figure 2-4
2
(51mm)
16
(406mm)
(8mm)
See Figure 2-5 for Ceiling Opening

Clearance for Electrical and
Medical Gas Options
(TYP Top & Bottom)

See Figure 2-3
5 (127mm)
Minimum Edge Distance
2
(51mm)
8
(203mm)
2
(51mm)
Finished
Ceiling
60 (1.5mm) Maximum
5- (140mm)
Minimum
2
(51mm)
2
(64mm)
installation of a TELETOM Equipment Management System with lights and monitor arms installed.
Other constructions are possible. However, the use of other designs and construction materials
should be considered only after consultation with a structural engineer.
FIGURE 2-2 Recommended Super Structure Design and Construction Materials for
TELETOM Units with Light(s) or Monitor Arm(s)
700000007 Rev. 3
2-5
SECTION 2
Mounting Materials and Details

The following information describes the materials used and provides important details on installation
techniques and processes.
See General Notes on Superstructure Design on page 2-2 for materials specifications and testing
recommendations.
A. L-angle Superstructure Brackets (4 required)
4 x 4 x 3/8 X 12 (102mm x 102mm x 10mm x 305mm) long with two 1/2 x 4

(13mm x 102mm) embedded expansion anchors
Leave 5 (127mm) from the center of each mounting bolt clear for wrenching.
B. Standard pipe 6 (152mm)
1.
The pipe must be welded to the BERCHTOLD supplied TELETOM mounting plate (C)
and to the owner supplied superstructure mounting plate (F).
2.
Do not attach any supplemental supports to the pipe. The supports will not constrain the
rotational force when attached to the pipe.
Refer to FIGURE 2-3 for important details on the support of the TELETOM mounting plate.
C. TELETOM Mounting Plate (Supplied by BERCHTOLD, and installed by the owner or the
owners contractor)
1 x 15 x 15 (25mm x 381mm x 381mm) with six 7/8 (22mm) threaded rods spaced in
a 10 (252mm) bolt circle
D. L-angle Support Braces (4 required)
3 x 3 x 1/4 (76mm x 76mm x 6mm)

1.
BERCHTOLD recommends that the L-angle support braces be welded to both the
superstructure brackets (A-FIGURE 2-1 or FIGURE 2-2) and to the TELETOM
mounting plate (C).
2.
Support braces (D) must be welded to the TELETOM mounting plate (C).
3.
Support braces or kickers must be attached only at the corners, and they must be at 90
angles to one another (see FIGURE 2-3).
700000007 Rev. 3
2-6
SECTION 2
Legend:
A= 15 (381mm)
B= 12.2 (310mm)
C= 8.27 (210mm)
D= 1.37 (35mm)
E= 3.37 (85.7mm)
F= 3.48 (88.5mm)
G= 0.75 (19mm)
H= 8.58 (218mm)
J= 8 (204mm)
K= 6.77 (172mm )
L= 60
M= 6.5 (165mm)
N= 0.5 (12.7mm)
P= 10 (252mm ) B.C.
R= .906 (23mm )
S= .875 (22.2mm )
Threaded Rod
90
1/4
(6mm)
90
12-3/16
(310mm)
No
No
FIGURE 2-3 TELETOM Mounting Plate and Support Attachments

4.
The installed TELETOM mounting plate must be level to within 0.1.
E. The bottom of the TELETOM mounting plate (C) must be installed as shown in FIGURE 2-
1 or FIGURE 2-2
For typical single mount installations as shown in FIGURE 2-1, the bottom of the
TELETOM mounting plate must be flush with the bottom of the finished ceiling
For single mount installations with light(s) or monitor arms shown in FIGURE 2-2, the
bottom of the TELETOM mounting plate must be 2-1/2 (64mm) above the underside
of the finished ceiling.
700000007 Rev. 3
2-7
SECTION 2
F. Base plate (see FIGURE 2-4)
1/2 x 20 x 20 (13mm x 406mm x 406mm) with four 1/2 x 4 (13mm x 102mm)

embedded expansion anchors
16
(406mm)
2
(51mm)
2
(51mm)
2
(51mm)
16
(406mm)
Note:
Thickess = 1/2 (13mm)
2
(51mm)
1/2
(13mm)
7000000005_012a
FIGURE 2-4 Typical Superstructure Base Plate

Ceiling Opening and Soffit Envelope
The TELETOM Equipment Management System owner or the owners contractor must ensure that
the ceiling opening will accommodate the mounting plate and any and all accessories installed on it.
FIGURE 2-5 shows the dimensions of various combinations of optional components that might be
involved. Consult the customer drawings to determine which accessories will be included with your
unit.
Customers typically order multiple TELETOM Equipment Management Systems to be installed in

different rooms/areas for different purposes. Each of these booms may be equipped differently and,
thus, require different numbers and types of optional components. It is important that the mounting
requirements for each different installation be evaluated individually.
700000007 Rev. 3
2-8
NOTE:
Screws, bolts,
washers, nuts,
etc. required to
mount
BERCHTOLD
supplied Jboxes and gas
valves are
included in preinstallation
deliveries
16
(406mm)
1/4
(8mm)
1
(25mm)
9.1
(232mm)
1
(25mm)
5
(127mm)
2.5
(64mm)
3
5
(76mm)
127mm)
8
(203mm)
14
(356mm)
1.4
(40mm)
Finished Ceiling
Single Mounts
Threaded
Rod
Finished Ceiling Single

Mounts with Lights or
Monitor Arms
FIGURE 2-5
4.75
(121mm)
8
(203mm)
Alternative (or
Additional)
Mounting
Location for
Electrical
Junction Box
18.7
(475mm)
17
(432mm)
SECTION 2
020904-02_1
TELETOM Equipment Management System Mounting Plate and

Accessory Dimensional Information
BERCHTOLD provides a soffit cover to provide a finished look at the ceiling above the
TELETOM Equipment Management System. The soffit is 23.25 square and, thus, will cover an
envelope approximately 6 (160mm) outside of each edge of the mounting plate (FIGURE 2-6).
700000007 Rev. 3
2-9
SECTION 2
18
(457mm)
Soffit Envelope
23.25 (590mm) Square
~6
(~150mm)
020904-01_1
2.5
(64mm)
~6
(~150mm)
5
(128mm)
Finished Ceiling and

Soffit Envelope for
Single Mounts
(Solid Lines)
2.5
(64mm)
Additional or
Alternative
Mounting
Location for
Electrical
Junction Box
17
(432mm)
16
(406mm)
1/4
(8mm)
Finished Ceiling and

Soffit Envelope for
Single Mounts with
Lights or Monitor Arm
(Dotted Lines)
FIGURE 2-6 TELETOM Equipment Management System Soffit Envelope

The owner or the owners contractor should take care not to include any non-Equipment
Management System equipment or systems within the soffit envelope.
700000007 Rev. 3
2-10
SECTION 2
A pre-installation inspection (before the finished ceiling is installed) may help detect interference
potentials while they can be most easily resolved.
TANDEM MOUNT EQUIPMENT MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS (TT OR TB)
CAUTION
Refer to Owner Responsibilities on page 1-3 for a description of the owners design and
construction responsibilities.
Identification
TELETOM tandem mount units are identified by a 500 or 700 series model number with at TT or
TB prefix.
Superstructure Design Loads
Table 2-2 shows the weight and moment for TELETOM tandem mount Equipment Management
Systems. The data shown are for the heaviest unit and the highest rotational moment. Designing for
the heaviest model with the highest torque will provide adequate support for the heaviest unit, but
will not significantly add to the cost of the installation of the lightest unit. This design margin also
increases flexibility for future product upgrades.
The installed weights and moments shown in Table 2-2 include the weight of the TELETOM, any
CHROMOPHARE or monitor arm components, and the maximum equipment load.
Table 2-2. Tandem Mount TELETOM Weights and Moments

Standard
Weight
Moment
Lb (Kg)
Ft Lb (NM)
1108 (503)
6240 (8460)
The superstructure must be strong enough to support the weight and rigid enough to constrain
rotation to less than 0.1 at the mounting plate.
Typical Tandem Mount Superstructure Design and Construction
TELETOM Equipment Management System tandem mount Installation. Other constructions are
700000007 Rev. 3
2-11
SECTION 2
possible. However, the use of other designs and construction materials should be considered only
after consultation with a structural engineer.
TELEVAC
Smoke
Evacuation
System
(See Section 5)
See Figure 2-9
Check Customer Drawing

for Critical Orientation
Information
See Figure 2-8

F
See Figure 2-9
TELEVAC
Hose to
TELETOM
Max. Length
10 (3m).
Finished
Ceiling
See Figure 2-10 for Ceiling

Opening Clearance for
Electrical and Medical Gas
Options
45 Min.
60 Max.

~25.5 Square X ~6 Deep
(~650mm Square X ~150mm Deep)
FIGURE 2-7 Recommended TELETOM Tandem Mount Superstructure

Design and Construction Materials
Mounting Materials and Details
The following information describes the materials used and provides important details on installation
techniques and processes.
700000007 Rev. 3
2-12
SECTION 2
See General Notes on Superstructure Design on page 2-2 for materials specifications and
testing recommendations.
A. L-angle Superstructure Brackets (4 required)
4 x 4 x 3/8 X 12 (102mm x 102mm x 10mm x 305mm) long with two 5/8 x 4

(16mm x 102mm) embedded expansion anchors
Leave 5 (127mm) from the center of each mounting bolt clear for wrenching.
B. Standard pipe 6 (152mm)
1.
The pipe must be welded to the BERCHTOLD supplied TELETOM mounting plate (C)
and to the owner supplier superstructure top plate (F).
2.
Do not attach any supplemental supports to the pipe. The supports will not constrain the
rotational force when attached to the pipe.
Refer to FIGURE 2-8 for important details on the support of the TELETOM mounting plate.
CAUTION
Orientation of the TELETOM Tandem Mounting Plate is critical for installation and
operation. Refer to your layout drawings for the proper orientation.
C. TELETOM Tandem Mounting Plate (Supplied by BERCHTOLD, and installed by the
owner or the owners contractor).

1 x approximately 22-7/8 (25mm x approximately 580mm) with twelve 7/8 (22mm)
threaded rods in two 10 ( 252mm) bolt circles (6 rods per circlesee FIGURE 2-8).
D. L-angle Support Braces (4 required)
4 x 4 x 3/8 (102mm x 102mm x 10mm)

1.
BERCHTOLD recommends that the L-angle support braces be welded to both the
superstructure brackets (A-FIGURE 2-8) and to the mounting plate (C).
2.
Support braces (D) must be welded to the mounting plate (C).
3.
Support braces must be attached near the support pipes, and they must be at 30 angles to
a centerline drawn through both pipe mount locations on the plate (see FIGURE 2-8).
700000007 Rev. 3
2-13
SECTION 2
Legend:
B C
M
L
D
E
F
H
J
K
A = 5.6 (142mm)
B= 7.67 (195mm)
C = 8.58 (218mm)
D = 10 ( 252mm) B.C
E = 6.69 (170mm)
F = .75 ( 19.4mm) with all thread
rods and bolts installed.
G = .25 ( 6.35mm)
H = 3.15 (80.5mm)
J = 6.5 (165mm)
K = .91 ( 23mm)
L = 6.77 ( 172mm)
M = 22.83 ( 580mm)
Mounting Plate Envelope
N = 18.50 ( 470mm) B.C.
No
(6mm)
30 (Typical)
Yes
No
FIGURE 2-8 TELETOM Tandem Mounting Plate and Support Attachments

4.
The installed TELETOM mounting plate must be level to within 0.1.
E. The bottom of the TELETOM mounting plate (C-FIGURE 2-7) must be flush with finished
ceiling.
F. Superstructure base plate furnished by the owner (see FIGURE 2-9)
1/2 x 20 x 30 (13mm x 508mm x 762mm) with six 1/2 x 6 (13mm x 152mm)

embedded expansion anchors.
700000007 Rev. 3
2-14
SECTION 2
8
(203mm)
5.59
5.59
(142mm) (142mm)
0.625
(16mm)
8
(203mm)
8
204mm
20
(508MM)
8
204mm
11.18
(284mm)
30
(762mm)
7000000005_007b
FIGURE 2-9 Typical Tandem Superstructure Base Plate

Ceiling Opening and Soffit Envelope
The TELETOM Equipment Management System owner or the owners contractor must ensure that
the ceiling opening will accommodate the tandem mounting plate and any and all accessories
installed on it. FIGURE 2-10 shows the dimensions of various combinations of optional components
that might be involved. Consult the customer drawings to determine which accessories will be
included with your unit.
Customers typically order multiple TELETOM Equipment Management Systems to be installed in

different rooms/areas for different purposes. Each of these booms may be equipped differently and,
thus, require different numbers and types of optional components. It is important that the mounting
requirements for each different installation be evaluated individually.
700000007 Rev. 3
2-15
SECTION 2
FIGURE 2-10 TELETOM Tandem Mount Equipment Management System Mounting Plate
and Accessory Dimensional Information
BERCHTOLD provides a soffit cover to provide a finished look at the ceiling above the
TELETOM Equipment Management System. The soffit is 23.5 (600mm) square and, thus, will
cover an envelope approximately 2.75 (70mm) outside the perimeter of the mounting plate
(FIGURE 2-11).
700000007 Rev. 3
2-16
SECTION 2
0.7
(18mm)
25.5
(650mm)
22.8
(580mm)
Soffit
Envelope
3
5
(76mm) (127mm)
8
(203mm)
Finished
Ceiling
Soffit
Envelope
021604-01_1
FIGURE 2-11 TELETOM Tandem Mount Equipment Management

System Soffit Envelope
The owner or the owners contractor should take care not to include any non-Equipment
Management System equipment or systems within the soffit envelope. This includes:
Lighting fixtures
HVAC delivery weirs
Air return grills
Sprinkler system heads
Speakers
Fire/smoke detector sensors
A pre-installation inspection (before the finished ceiling is installed) may help detect potential
interference while it can be most easily resolved.
700000007 Rev. 3
2-17
SECTION 2
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
700000007 Rev. 3
2-18
SECTION 3
SECTION 3PRE-INSTALLATION WIRING REQUIREMENTS

This section describes the wiring and electrical components used in a standard TELETOM
Equipment Management System installation. Optional equipment and accessories have additional
electrical capacity and pre-installation requirements. These additional requirements are described
under the individual options and accessories in Section 5 of this manual.
Refer to the order specifications to determine the TELETOM electrical components and options
supplied for your unit(s).
BERCHTOLD SUPPLIED ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS (STANDARD)
BERCHTOLD supplies an electrical junction box for installation on the TELETOM mounting plate.
Each TELETOM Equipment Management System may also include one or more power outlets.
Refer to the owners configuration drawings (provided by BERCHTOLD) for the type and quantity
of circuits required.
Electrical Junction Box
BERCHTOLD supplies the electrical junction box that must be used for the TELETOM installation.
The junction box includes field wirable terminal blocks for up to six circuits. It also has a built in
grounding stud (FIGURE 3-1).
The mounting plate has through holes to accept the junction box mounting screws at the correct
position. The junction box will be sent prior to the shipment of the TELETOM unit. The box may
arrive with the TELETOM mounting plate or as a separate delivery.
700000007 Rev. 3
3-1
SECTION 3
1 2 A 1 2 B 1 2 C 1 2 D 1 2 E 1 2 F
8
(203 mm)
8
(203 mm)
4
(102 mm)
0.75
(19 mm)
Installation
Bracket
Knock Outs
Included on
All Four Sides
3
(76mm)
0.25
(6mm)
1.25
(32 mm)
Terminal Blocks
Ground Stud
3.75
(95mm)
1/4-20 x 1-1/2
Socket Head
Mounting Screw
6.5
(165 mm)
2
(51 mm)
020204-02_1
FIGURE 3-1 TELETOM Junction Box

Electrical Power Outlets
The TELETOM Equipment Management System service column may carry multiple hospital grade
receptacles. Standard receptacles are rated at 20 Amps, but other ratings can be supplied if specified.
Receptacles are wired together in groups. There are a maximum of 3 receptacles per circuit and a
maximum of 6 circuits per Equipment Management System.
When the maximum number of circuits is ordered, two junction boxes are required to handle the
house-to-boom wiring connections. When a more standard three or four circuits (for up to 12
outlets), only one junction box is required.
Power for the receptacles is provided by UL approved 12 AWG, type XHHW, 3-wire cables inside
the boom. Each group of three receptacles requires a separate 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz power supply
line.
700000007 Rev. 3
3-2
SECTION 3
Additional Electrical Power Supplies

TELETOM Equipment Management System shelves can include two simplex receptacles per shelf.
Up to three shelves on a single boom can include outlets (for a total of 6 shelving outlets). All of the
shelf outlets are powered from a single 20 Amp, 120VAC, 50/60Hz supply on a single, dedicated
circuit.
TELETOM model 520 and all 700 series models include an electronic brake and/or an integral
motor, which requires a single separate 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz power supply line capable of supplying
8.3 Amps.
The TELEVAC Smoke Evacuation System, if ordered, requires a separate 12 Amp, 120 VAC,
50/60Hz power supply. However, this power supply is routed directly to the TELEVAC motor; it
does not go through the junction box installed on the TELETOM Equipment Management System
mounting plate.
Each option or accessory may require a separate power supply line. Refer to the owners
configuration drawings (provided by BERCHTOLD) for the type and quantity of circuits required.
OWNER PRE-INSTALLATION WIRING REQUIREMENTS (STANDARD)
The owner must supply power to the TELETOM:
1. Power must be 120 VAC 56/60 Hz from a dedicated source.

2. The owner or the owners contractor must complete all wiring and conduit runs before the
TELETOM Equipment Management System can be installed.
3. Power must be able to be turned on at the time the equipment is installed so that electrical
systems can be tested.
The owner must make the electrical connections from the hospital power supply to the TELETOM
Equipment Management System and any optional and accessory equipment.
Wiring Runs
The owner must run the wiring from the mains supply to the junction box on the TELETOM
mounting plate. Wiring runs must comply with local electrical codes.
Live electrical circuits can cause injury or death. Lock out and tag out power supplies to
prevent work on live electrical circuits.
Electrical Junction Box Installation
The owner must install the BERCHTOLD supplied junction box on the TELETOM mounting plate.
The junction box includes internal terminal blocks for wiring connections and exterior conduit guides
on all four sides (FIGURE 3-2).
700000007 Rev. 3
3-3
SECTION 3
15
(381mm)
8.58
(218mm)
8
(204mm)
6.5
(165mm)
8.27
(21 0mm)
15
(381mm)
C
D
E
F
E
C
F
E
FIGURE 3-2 Electrical Junction Box Installation on Single Mounting Plate
The single mounting plate is shown, but the principle for installing the junction box on the tandem
mounting plate is identical. As with the single mounting plate, the tandem mounting plate provides
spaces for the installation of two junction boxes. See FIGURE 2-10 for the junction box mounting
locations on the tandem mounting plate.
Do this to attach the junction box to the mounting plate:
1. Align the junction box (A) with the opening on the mounting plate (B).
Note that the mounting plate indents and mounting holes are sized differently for the
electrical junction box and the gas valve bridge.
The electrical junction box must be mounted in the area intended in order to insure a
secure attachment.
2. Slide the mounting brackets (C) under the mounting plate until the holes in the brackets (D)
align with the holes in the plate (E).
3. Insert -20 x 1 socket head screws (F) into the mounting plate, and tighten securely.
4. If necessary, repeat steps 1 through 3 and install the second electrical junction box on the
opposite side of the mounting plate.
700000007 Rev. 3
3-4
SECTION 3
Wiring Connections
Terminal block illustrated below is provided by BERCHTOLD Corporation. Any code compliant
connector can be substituted by customer.
Grounding Stud
FIGURE 3-3 Terminal Block Connectors in Electrical Junction Box

High Voltage Conduit
The contractor is responsible for running code compliant conduit between the mains supply and the
TELETOM Equipment Management System junction box. The sizing and number of conduits is
dependant on the number of cables involved. Cable information is included in the customer order
file. Refer to local codes for conduit sizing and installation specifications.
LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
TELETOM Equipment Management Systems can provide connectivity for low voltage applications
such as telephone, data cables, video signals, and other applications. The cabling for the low voltage
devices and connections is routed through an electrically isolated compartment in the electrical pod.
Depending on the order configuration, some of the low voltage cables may be in place and only need
termination at the site. For applications where low voltage cables will be installed in the field,
BERCHTOLD will include flexible chase within the TELETOM Equipment Management System if
the owner stipulates a requirement in the order documentation.
The owner or the owners contractor or a low voltage component supplier is responsible for
terminating all low voltage applications. In addition, the owner or the owners contractor is
responsible for running code compliant conduit between the TELETOM Equipment Management
System and the low voltage cable destination.
COMBINATION BOOM & LIGHT/FLAT PANEL
Please see the Chromophare Pre-Installation Guide. If a light is purchased, and an SK Box is
provided. The contractor should route conduit from the mounting plate to the SK Box, to the wall
control unit as described in the Chromophare Pre-Installation Guide.
700000007 Rev. 3
3-5
SECTION 3
For a Flat Panel installation, a fused terminal block is provided on the boom mounting plate. Mains
power should be routed to the top of the boom using conduit per local code. LV Video cables may
have to be routed in conduit, depending on local code application and point of termination.
700000007 Rev. 3
3-6
SECTION 5
SECTION 4PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR MEDICAL GASES

Both single mount and tandem mount TELETOM Equipment Management Systems can supply
medical gases through the service column(s).
BERCHTOLD SUPPLIED MEDICAL GAS RISER
BERCHTOLD supplies a medical gas riser for installation on the TELETOM mounting plate. Each
riser is specially fabricated to the owners medical gas specifications. The riser includes a valve
bridge, DISS gas risers with single check valves, and testing caps.
A compressed gas riser with an NTP fitting is available for installation on the valve bridge.
However, because compressed air is not a medical gas, check local codes and regulation to
determine if a compressed air riser can be mounted adjacent to medical gas risers.
Medical gas is delivered through the service column via medical grade hoses. These hoses support
working pressures of 200 PSI (1379 kPa). Hoses are rated for a maximum continuous operating
temperature of 165 F (74 C), and they have a low temperature brittle point of -40 F (-40 C).
Medical gas risers comply with NFPA 5.1.10.1.1 (2002). They are shipped in advance of the
TELETOM equipment, and they must be attached to the mounting plate before installation of the
equipment can begin.
Oxygen outlets are cleaned for oxygen service per G-41 CGA pamphlet. This cleanliness should be
maintained through installation.
PNEUMATIC BRAKE GAS SPECIFICATIONS
The customer must identify the gas to be used to operate the pneumatic braking system if one is
included in the TELETOM Equipment Management System specifications. The gas can be N2 or
compressed air. The pneumatic brake system consumes 0.45 ft3 (0.013 m3) per cycle.
When the Equipment Management System includes a pneumatic brake, it is delivered with a
regulator installed and factory set for 100 psi (690 kPa) air. Air supplied to the regulator must be
between 100 and 300 psi (690 and 2070 kPa).
If compressed air is used, the owner or the owners contractor is responsible for supplying the tubing
and fittings to deliver the air from the gas riser to the regulator.
N2 operated pneumatic brakes must be piped to high side line pressure. Pneumatic brakes cannot be
operated by air supplies routed through a wall regulator.
OWNER PRE-INSTALLATION MEDICAL GAS RISER REQUIREMENTS
The owner must plumb the medical gases to the TELETOM Equipment Management System
location, install the medical gas riser on the TELETOM mounting plate, and make the connections
between the medical gas riser and the service column supply lines.
Medical Gas Piping
The owner must pipe the medical gases from the building supply to the TELETOM Equipment
Management System prior to installation of the equipment.
700000007 Rev. 3
5-1
SECTION 5
1. Piping must be completed according to local and national code requirements.

2. An NFPA compliant blow down test must be performed.
3. Piping must be pressurized and leak tested per NFPA 99C (CSA Z305.1) Medical Gas Piping
Systems.
4. Test results must be made available to BERCHTOLD installers for comparison testing.
Medical Gas Riser Installation
The owner must install the medical gas riser on the bottom of the TELETOM mounting plate.
FIGURE 4-1 shows the medical gas mounting positions for single mount and tandem mount
installations. Where only one valve bridge is needed, it can be mounted in either position. Where
two valve bridges are needed, they must be mounted as shown. The gas valve bridge cannot be
mounted in the positions reserved for the electrical junction box, even if no junction box is included.
BERCHTOLD ships the installation screws, washers, and nuts along with the valve bridge(s).
Medical gas risers are 8 high. The risers for vacuum lines are OD. All pressure risers are
OD.
8
(21 .58
8m
(20 8 m)
4m
m)
15
(381mm)
8.58
(218mm)
8
(204mm)
15
(381mm)
8.27
(210mm)
6.5
(165mm)
22.8
(580mm)
23.5
(600mm)
6.5
(165mm)
021704-03_1
FIGURE 4-1.
700000007 Rev. 3
5-2
Medical Gas Valve Bridge Mounting Positions
SECTION 5
Do this to attach the medical gas riser to the mounting plate:
The following description uses the single mounting plate for illustration. The parts and procedures
are identical for the tandem mounting plate.
1. Place the bridge (A) under the mounting plate (B), and align the holes (FIGURE 4-2).
021704-01_1
B
A
C
B
D
E
FIGURE 4-2.
Installing the Gas Riser on the Mounting Plate
Note that the mounting plate indents and mounting holes are sized differently for the
electrical junction box and the gas valve bridge.
The medical gas valve bridge must be mounted in the area intended in order to insure an
accurate fit and secure attachment.
2. Insert a bolt (C) through each mounting hole, and secure it with a washer (D) and nut (E).
3. Connect the appropriate house gas supply to the top of each riser.
4. Purge the gas lines and perform the leak test at least 24 hours prior to the scheduled
beginning of the BERCHTOLD installation activities.
BERCHTOLD installation personnel will connect the flexible tubing from the TELETOM
Equipment Management System to the bottom of each riser.
700000007 Rev. 3
5-3
SECTION 5
SECTION 5PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR OPTIONS AND

ACCESSORIES
The information below describes the pre-installation requirements for additional accessories and
optional equipment available from BERCHTOLD for TELETOM Equipment Management Systems
The TELETOM Equipment Management System is an exceptionally versatile device, and it can
include a wide range of systems and components specified by the owner and supplied by other
vendors. Some of these may be installed on the delivered boom. Others must be field installed.
Since it is not possible to anticipate the pre-installation design requirements for all possible thirdparty components, the owner or the owners contractor must review the BERCHTOLD customer
drawings and determine any additional pre-installation preparations that might be required.
Some TELETOM Equipment Management Systems include BERCHTOLD CHROMOPHARE
Surgical Lights or CHROMOVISION Video Systems. Each of these BERCHTOLD systems has its
own pre-installation requirements, which are detailed in product specific Pre-Installation Guides.
For additional information or details on any BERCHTOLD supplied accessory contact
BERCHTOLD Technical Services at 1-800-243-5135.
TELEVAC SMOKE EVACUATION SYSTEM
The TELEVAC Smoke Evacuation System option includes a vacuum motor that must be mounted
in the ceiling cavity within 120 (3m) of the TELETOM mounting plate.
The TELEVAC motor and its associated flexible tubing are shipped in advance of the TELETOM
equipment, and they must be mounted before installation of the equipment can begin.
BERCHTOLD Supplied TELEVAC Motor
When the TELEVAC Smoke Evacuation System option is ordered, the TELETOM units will
come equipped with a control panel, filter, and port. BERCHTOLD also supplies a separate motor
and the flexible tubing required to connect the motor to the TELETOM system.
The TELEVAC motor draws 12 Amps at start up and requires a separate 120 VAC, 50/60Hz power
supply. Power connections are to an ON/OFF Dual pull switch provided for service disconnect.
Each TELEVAC system (in multiple installations) should have its own power supply.
Owner Pre-Installation TELEVAC Pre-Installation Requirements
The owner or the owners contractor must mount the motor in the ceiling cavity, provide and connect
a power supply, and connect the flexible tubing between the TELETOM unit and the motor.
1. The TELEVAC motor housing must be mounted above the finished ceiling and within 120
(3m) of the TELETOM mounting plate.
a. The unit weighs approximately 12 lb (5.5 kg).
b. The unit is a 10(254mm) X 10(254mm) X 8.5(216mm).
c. Four mounting holes are provided on 9 (229mm) centers top-to-bottom and side-toside.
2. The unit should be mounted in an accessible location.
700000007 Rev. 3
5-2
SECTION 5
3. A connection to the buildings air exchange system is at the owners option:

a. If allowed by local code, exhaust is filtered (20m HEPA Filter) and venting to
plenum may be permissible is effective enough to allow venting to the plenum.
b. Exhaust output is 90 ft3min (2.6 m3min) with the filter in place, as required by local
codes, venting to the outside of the building may be required.
TELEVAC Vacuum Motor Installation
The owner or the owners contractor must mount the TELEVAC vacuum motor in the ceiling
cavity. BERCHTOLD does not provide the installation fasteners for the TELEVAC motor.
Figure 5-1 shows the components of the unit that must be accessible during and after installation.
C 1 Inlet on back
D
A
Maximum of 120 (3m)

from TELETOM
Mounting Plate
10
(22
( 2 9m m )
54
mm
)
2 54 m
10 (
m)
FIGURE 5-1. TELEVAC Smoke Evacuation System

1. Select an accessible location for the TELEVAC vacuum motor housing (A).
a. The motor must be located within 120 (3m) of the TELETOM mounting plate.
2. Use the provided mounting holes and pads to secure the TELEVAC vacuum motor housing
to a structural element.
3. Run a power supply line from the mains supply to the junction box on the TELEVAC
vacuum motor housing.
a. The power supply for the TELEVAC motor should not be routed through the junction
box on the TELETOM mounting plate.
b. Figure 5-2 shows the power requirements and wiring schematic for the TELEVAC
System.
4. Connect the power supply to the appropriate terminals on the ON/OFF double pole switch
(B).
700000007 Rev. 3
5-3
SECTION 5
5. Connect the TELEVAC control cable wires to the appropriate motor and power supply
wires.
6. Connect the flexible tubing to the vacuum intake (C) (Figure 5-1), and route the tubing to the
TELETOM mounting plate location (for later connection to the TELETOM unit).
7. If desired, connect a 3 (76mm) flexible hose to the exhaust port (D), and to the air
exchange system plenum, or to the exterior of the building depending on local building code
requirements.
TELEVAC
MOTOR
HOUSING
POWER
REQUIREMENTS
Input Power
120 VAC, 15 AMPS, 60 Hz
Power Consumption
12 AMP @ Start up
15A CIRCUIT BREAKER

MOTOR 1
P4
P3
GROUND
SUPPLIED BY
CONTRACTER
DPDT SWITCH
LINE
P1
NEUTRAL
BLUE
P2
GROUND
GREEN
MOTOR 1
120
VOLT
60 HZ
INPUT
POWER
PCB HIGH
POWER
FLOW
Maximum Flow Setting
>70 CFM w/1 hose
Exhaust Flow - 3 Outlet Rate:
90 CFM w/filter
120 CFM w/o filter
VAC HOSE
To
Televac
(Control
Unit)
MOTOR
CONTROL CABLE
Motor - Motor size 1 h.p.
RJ -45 PIN
LOCATION
RJ-45 JACK
SUPPLIED BY
BERCHTOLD
Noise Level - Less than 40dBa

8
PIN #
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
COLOR
BROWN
BLUE
YELLOW
GREEN
RED
BLACK
ORANGE
GREY
FIGURE 5-2. Televac Wiring Requirements

VIDEO EQUIPMENT
If video equipment will be used, the TELETOM unit will be equipped with the appropriate power
outlets and data ports as specified by the owner.
Owner Pre-Installation Video Requirements
The owner must run conduit for the video lines prior to the installation of the equipment.
The owner must consult with the video vendor for information about conduit runs between mounting
plates and between the mounting plates and the documentation station. If the video vendor does not
supply specific information for their system or equipment, the following guidelines will provide
maximum flexibility for cable runs:
1. Run 2 (51mm) conduit between mounting plates (for multiple unit installations).
2. Run 2 (51mm) conduit from each mounting plate to the documentation station, if present.
700000007 Rev. 3
5-4
PRE-INSTALLATION GUIDE PUBLICATION HISTORY

This publication describes the equipment as of the date of issue listed below. BERCHTOLD
Corporation reserves the right to make changes in design or specifications at any time without notice.
If you find any difference between the equipment you received and the components or assemblies
described in this publication, contact BERCHTOLD Customer Service at 800-243-5135 for
information.
PUBLICATION HISTORY
Revision
Issue Date
Revision 1
Original Issue: January 2002 (ECO 20182)
Revision 2
April 2004 (ECO 20649)
Revision 3
June 2006 (ECO 21037)
TELETOM is a Registered Trademark of BERCHTOLD Corporation.

2004 BERCHTOLD Corporation. All Rights Reserved
SAFE INNOVATIVE BERCHTOLD
BERCHTOLD Corporation
1950 Hanahan Road

Charleston, SC 29406
Phone: 843-569-6100
Phone: 800-243-5135
Fax: 843-569-6133
Manual No. 70-000-0007

INTEGRATED WITH VIDEO, VOICE ACTIVATION AND
DEVICE/INSTRUMENT CONTROL
TRUMPF MEDICAL SYSTEMS Inc.

Charleston, SC
PRE-INSTALLATION GUIDE
FOR CEILING MOUNTED
EQUIPMENT MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS,
SURGICAL / EXAM LIGHTS, AND FLAT PANELS
EMS and Light Pre-installation Guide

File: 110720
Revision: B
September, 2008
TRUMPF Medical Systems, Inc.
Charleston, South Carolina
Table of Contents
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
2.0
INTRODUCTION..........................................................................................................................3
PREINSTALLATION RESPONSIBILITIES ....................................................................................................... 3
PROJECT COMPONENTS AND PREINSTALLATION PROCESS ........................................................................... 3
SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS ....................................................................................... 4
EQUIPMENT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (EMS) MOUNTING SYSTEMS..............................................4
2.1
TRUMPF PREENGINEERED EMS MOUNTING SYSTEMS............................................................................. 4
2.2
DESIGN LOADS FOR EQUIPMENT MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS (EMS) ................................................................ 5
2.3
ATTACHMENT METHODS FOR TRUMPF EMS MOUNTING SYSTEMS ............................................................ 5
2.4
STRUCTURAL DEFLECTION CRITERIA (EMS) .............................................................................................. 6
2.5
EMS MOUNTING SYSTEM COMPONENTS ................................................................................................. 6
2.6
SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS AND INTERSTITIAL SPAN .................................................................................... 8
2.6.1
EMS Mounting System for 8 Interstitial (Catalog #: 110106)................................................ 8
2.6.2
EMS Mounting System for 14 47 Interstitial (Catalog #: 110107) .................................... 9
2.6.3
EMS Mounting System for 47 59 Interstitial (Catalog #: 110108) .................................. 10
2.7
INSTALLATION OF TRUMPF EMS MOUNTING SYSTEM ............................................................................ 11
2.7.1
Installation of the EMS Mounting Plate................................................................................ 11
2.7.2
Installation of Threaded Rods or Adjustable Spacers ........................................................... 11
2.7.3
Installation of Interface Plate for Med. Gas and Electrical Connections............................... 13
2.8
EMS PNEUMATIC BRAKING SYSTEM ..................................................................................................... 14
3.0
SURGICAL LIGHT AND FLAT PANEL SYSTEMS ............................................................................. 15
3.1
DESIGN LOADS FOR SURGICAL LIGHT AND FLAT PANEL SYSTEMS ................................................................. 15
3.2
STRUCTURAL DEFLECTION CRITERIA (LIGHTS AND FLAT PANELS) ................................................................. 15
3.3
DESIGN ELEVATIONS FOR SUBSTRUCTURE ............................................................................................... 16
3.4
TRUMPF SURGICAL LIGHT / FLAT PANEL MOUNTING PLATES ................................................................... 18
3.5
TRUMPF SURGICAL LIGHT ELECTRICAL AND CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS ....................................................... 19
3.5.1
Installation of Surgical Light Transformer Enclosures........................................................... 19
3.5.2
Transformer Location for Replacement (Renovation) Lights ................................................ 20
3.5.3
Required Conduits for Transformers in Enclosures (New Construction) ............................... 21
3.5.4
Required Conduits for Transformers Underneath Cover (Renovation) ................................. 22
3.5.5
Site Preparation for Surgical Light Wall Controls ................................................................. 23
4.0
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
A.0
A.1
A.2
CEILING MOUNTED EXAM (HELIONS) LIGHTS ........................................................................... 24

DESIGN LOADS FOR CEILING MOUNTED EXAM (HELIONS) LIGHTS .............................................................. 24
STRUCTURAL DEFLECTION CRITERIA (HELIONS) ...................................................................................... 24
DESIGN ELEVATIONS FOR SUBSTRUCTURE (HELIONS) .............................................................................. 24
ELECTRICAL AND CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS (HELIONS) ............................................................................ 25
APPENDIX ................................................................................................................................ 26
ROUGHIN DRAWINGS AVAILABLE UPON REQUEST .................................................................................. 26
CONTACT INFORMATION ..................................................................................................................... 26
File: 110720B, September, 2008
Page 2 of 26
1.0
Introduction
This document is a guide to the steps that must be performed in order to properly prepare a
project site for installation of a TRUMPF ceiling suspended system. Covered within this guide are
pre-installation requirements for Equipment Management Systems (EMS), surgical light /
examination light, and flat panel systems.
1.1
Pre-installation Responsibilities
Generally, work required above the finished ceiling must be performed by the owner or owner
designated contractor. All fixed attachments between TRUMPF mounting systems and building
super-structures must be approved by the project engineer of record. TRUMPF Technical
Service will complete the installation following the conclusion of all required pre-installation
activities as detailed within this guide.
1.2
Project Components and Pre-installation Process

Component
Specification
Provided By
Materials
Provided By
Installation
Performed By
Timeline / Project
Phase
Mechanical
Contractor
While ceilings are

open
TRUMPF
Structural Mounting
Plates and
TRUMPF EMS
Mounting Systems
Light Power Supply
Transformer
Enclosures
Mains Power, Video,
Data, and
Communication Cables
w/ Required J-boxes &
Conduits
TRUMPF
Attachment,
Substructure, and
lateral bracing by
Structural Engineer of
Record
Lateral Bracing &

Substructure (if
Reqd.) by Others
TRUMPF
TRUMPF
Electrical
Contractor
While ceilings are

open during electrical
installation
Owner or Electrical
Contractor in
accordance to
TRUMPF rough-in
material
Owner or Contractor
Electrical
Contractor
While ceilings are

open during electrical
install
Integration Cabling for

Video and Endoscopy
Integration
Company
Integration
Company
TRUMPF or
TRUMPF assist
per contract
Terms and
Conditions
Medical Gas Inlet

Tubes
TRUMPF
TRUMPF
Medical Gas
Contractor
EMS, Light, or Flat

Panel Suspension
TRUMPF
TRUMPF
TRUMPF
Final Equipment
Certifications Med.
Gas and Electrical
Local Codes, NEC,

and NFPA
Site Inspection
Electrical / Med.
Gas Contractor
and / or local
code inspector
Cables required at
TRUMPF 4-weeks
prior to shipment or to
field during install per
contract Terms and
Conditions
While ceilings are
open during plumbing
install
Based on overall
construction schedule
Following equipment
installation
Figure #1) Project Responsibility Matrix
Page 3 of 26
1.3
Safety and Environmental Considerations
Many components are heavy. Use extreme caution while unpacking shipping
containers and installing equipment.
All personnel working around energized circuits should be qualified and following
proper safety procedures.
All TRUMPF supplied equipment must be stored in clean, dry environments prior to
installation.
Empty packaging material and refuse must be disposed of by the owner in
accordance with the governing regulations of local municipalities.
2.0
Equipment Management System (EMS) Mounting Systems
2.1
TRUMPF Pre-engineered EMS Mounting Systems
Picture #1) TRUMPF EMS Mounting Systems
TRUMPF offers pre-engineered mounting solutions for Equipment Management Systems (EMS).
TRUMPF boom mounting systems are designed to a 4X factory of safety under the design loads
as specified in Section 2.2.
Page 4 of 26
2.2
Design Loads for Equipment Management Systems (EMS)

Fmax.
Mbmax.
9,200 N (2067 lbf)

12,500 Nm ( 9,220 ft-lbs)
Figure #2) Design Loads (EMS)
The design loads shown above represent the maximum loading scenario for any TRUMPF ceiling
mounted Equipment Management System (EMS). TRUMPF recommends designing all mounts
involving booms to this maximum condition in order to maintain flexibility for future product
upgrades. Model specific design loads are also available from TRUMPF Project Engineering
upon request.
2.3
Attachment Methods for TRUMPF EMS Mounting Systems
SYSTEM WELDED TO STRUCTURE
SYSTEM ANCHORED TO COMPOSITE DECK
SYSTEM BOLTED TO STRUCTURE
SYSTEM ANCHORED TO STRUCTURAL SLAB
Picture #2) TRUMPF EMS Mounting System Attachment Methods
Page 5 of 26
The TRUMPF EMS mounting system may be attached to the building superstructure in the
following manners:
Welded to superstructure or fabricated substructure.

Bolted to superstructure or fabricated substructure.
Anchored to structural concrete slab or structural composite deck.
Notes:
1) A custom mounting plate may be required for direct anchorage into composite
decks.
2) (4) 1 x 4 ASTM-A307 bolts with nuts, flat washers, and lock washers are
recommended for bolted attachment methods. Attachment hardware is provided
by others.
3) The Structural Engineer of Record for the project is ultimately responsible for
specifying and approving all attachment methods. This includes the specification
of weldments, attachment hardware, concrete anchors, and any required lateral
bracing.
2.4
Structural Deflection Criteria (EMS)
2.5
Maximum horizontal deflection of substructure at the attachment point of the TRUMPF

mounting plate must not exceed 0.1 when subject to horizontal load of 100lbs.
Maximum angular deflection of substructure at the attachment point of the TRUMPF
mounting plate must not exceed 1/3 from level when subject to the design loads as
specified by TRUMPF.
EMS Mounting System Components
The following components are used to create TRUMPF EMS mounting systems. Not all of the
components listed will be required for every type of mounting system. TRUMPF Project
Engineering will provide the contractor with a project specific bill of materials drawing prior to any
mounting system installation.
EMS Mounting Plate (110037) Used for attachment of the mounting system to the
buildings structural deck or owner furnished sub-structure.
Threaded Rod Assembly (110684) Used to span interstitial for 11 systems.
Adjustable Spacer (337111) Hexagonal extrusion and threaded rod assembly used to
span interstitial for 14 47 systems.
Adjustable Spacer Set (337147) - Two piece hexagonal extrusions and threaded rod
assemblies used to span interstitial for 47 59 and custom systems.
Intermediate Stiffener Plate (110444) Used only with 47 59, and custom systems.
Splice Plate (110213) Used as attachment point for lateral bracing if required.
Medical Gas Inlet Tube (TBD) Used for connection between main supply line and
TRUMPF EMS hose.
Junction Box (TBD) Provided by electrical contractor for termination of circuits.
Universal Interface Plate (110344) Used to house medical gas inlet tubes and
electrical junction boxes.
Page 6 of 26
Figure #3) EMS Mounting Plate (110037)
Threaded Rod Assy. and Adj. Spacers

J-boxes, Inlet Tubes, Interface Plate
Picture #3) EMS Mounting System Components
Page 7 of 26

2.6
System Configurations and Interstitial Span
The configuration of the TRUMPF EMS mounting system will depend on the length of the
interstitial span. Interstitial span is defined by TRUMPF as the distance between the room side of
the finished ceiling and the top attachment point of the boom mounting system as shown in
Figure #3.
Figure #4: Determining the Interstitial Span for the TRUMPF Mounting System
2.6.1 EMS Mounting System for 8 Interstitial (Catalog #: 110106)
Figure #5) 110106 Mounting System Components (see drawing 110106 for complete rough-in)
Page 8 of 26
The 110106 Mounting System is designed specifically for an 8 interstitial span. The components
which make up this system are shown below. Please see drawing 110106 for complete rough-in
information.
Components in 110106 Mounting System:
1)
2, 3, 6)
4)
5)
7)
8)
Boom Mounting Plate (110037)

Threaded Rod Assembly (110684)
Inlet Tube for Pneumatic Brakes (TBD)
Medical Gas Inlet Tube (TBD)
Junction Box (By Others)
Universal Interface Plate (110344)
2.6.2 EMS Mounting System for 14 47 Interstitial (Catalog #: 110107)
Figure #6) 110107 Mounting System Components (see drawing 110107 for complete rough-in)
The 110107 Mounting System is designed for interstitial span ranges from 14 47 (please refer
to Figure #4 for calculation of interstitial span). The components which make up this system are
shown below. Please see the appendix for complete rough-in information.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)

Adjustable Spacer (337111)
Splice Plate (110213) {if required for lateral bracing}
Page 9 of 26
2.6.3 EMS Mounting System for 47 59 Interstitial (Catalog #: 110108)
Figure #7) 110108 Mounting System Components (see Drawing 110108 for complete rough-in)
The 110108 Mounting System is designed for interstitial span ranges from 47 59 (please refer
to Figure #4 for calculation of interstitial span). The components which make up this system are
shown below. Please see the appendix for complete rough-in information.

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)

Adjustable Spacer Set (337147)
Intermediate Stiffener Plate (110444)
Splice Plate (110213) {if required for lateral bracing}
Page 10 of 26
2.7
Installation of TRUMPF EMS Mounting System
The TRUMPF EMS mounting system is supplied by TRUMPF but installed by others. Installation
of the EMS mounting plate at the top of the system should be performed while the ceilings are
open to ease installation. The complete mounting system will need to be installed prior to the
completion of the medical gas and electrical supply lines.
2.7.1 Installation of the EMS Mounting Plate
The standard EMS mounting plate (110037) weighs approximately 100lbs.

Therefore, two installers and a manual lift are required for a safe and proper
installation.
The mounting location of the EMS mounting plate should be provided by the project architect, and
the attachment method given by the structural engineer of record.
Picture #4) Alignment of EMS Mounting Plate

The alignment of the EMS mounting plate should be parallel to the nearest wall or square to the
floor plan of the room. If there is a ceiling grid present, the EMS mounting plate should be
installed parallel to the grid.
2.7.2 Installation of Threaded Rods or Adjustable Spacers

The standard EMS mounting plate (110037) has (8) M22 tapped holes for attachment of the
adjustable spacers or threaded rod assemblies. The M22 mounting studs at the top of these
assemblies are designed to stop just short of protruding through the top side of the plate. Eight
threaded rod or adjustable spacers are required for every installation, and these must be installed
with a target torque of 89 ft-lbs.
Page 11 of 26
TRUMPF adjustable spacers or

threaded rod assemblies can be
inserted into the EMS mounting
plate by hand, but they must be
set to a toque of 89 ft-lbs using a
large torque wrench.
Adjustable spacers assemblies
are 55mm across flats, and the
M22 bolts at the top of the
threaded rod assemblies are
30mm across flats.
A total of 8 adjustable spacers or
threaded rod assemblies are
required for every EMS
installation.
Threaded Rod Assemblies (110106

S
)
Spacers (110107 and 110108 Systems)
Picture #5) Installing Threaded Rod Assemblies and Adjustable Spacers

Notes:
1)
M16 threaded rods at the lower end of the adjustable spacers should be set to come to
rest at 3 below the room side of the finished ceiling for EMS installations with standard 4
deep ceiling covers.
2)
EMS installations with flat ceiling covers will require the M16 threaded rods to be set at 1
above the room side of the finished ceiling.
3)
Do not use any thread locking agent on TRUMPF mounting systems.
4)
Please contact TRUMPF Project Engineering for additional clarification.
Page 12 of 26
2.7.3 Installation of Interface Plate for Med. Gas and Electrical Connections
The Universal Interface Plate (110344) is designed to house the medical gas inlet tubes for
connection between the main gas supply lines and the flexible hoses from the TRUMPF
equipment management system. The Universal Interface Plate and medical gas inlet tubes are
provided by TRUMPF but installed by others. The Universal Interface Plate also provides a
mounting provision for electrical junction boxes that are provided by others for termination of
circuit wiring. The Universal Interface Plates are shipped in a flat state, and the tabs that house
the medical gas inlet tubes can be bent either upwards or downwards to a 90 position.
The Universal Interface Plate is

designed to mount Raco 265 (411/16 x 4-11/16 x 2-1/8)
junction boxes or similar.
Junction boxes are provided by
others.
Medical gas inlet tubes are
provided by TRUMPF. A
separate inlet tube is provided
for each gas outlet on the EMS.
Medical gas inlet tubes are
installed by others, and the
arrangement of the tubes can be
field specified, but DISS
connections must face the
interior of the mount.
Picture #6) Installing the Universal Interface Plate and Med. Gas Inlet Tubes
Gas inlet tubes are brazed into supply lines via a 1/2 OD copper connection, 1/2 copper tubing
is approximately 7 long. Inlet tubes have male DISS connections with internal check valves for
connection to flexible hosing from the equipment management system.
Page 13 of 26

2.8
EMS Pneumatic Braking System
TRUMPF Equipment Management Systems utilize pneumatic braking systems to control arm
positioning. A separate supply line must be added to each mount for the pneumatic braking
system. TRUMPF will supply a gas inlet tube for each mount according to the type of gas that is
selected for the pneumatic braking system. The pneumatic brake inlet tubes will be installed by
others.
Notes:
1)
Pneumatic braking systems can run on either Nitrogen or compressed air.
2)
Line pressure must be regulated by others to be 55 70 psig.
3)
TRUMPF pneumatic braking systems use 0.004 ft^3 of gas per actuation.
4)
The braking system is actuated 3-4 times each time that an EMS is repositioned.
5)
A friction brake prevents arm drift while the EMS is stationary. When repositioning, the
brake bladder is filled and the friction brake is lifted from the bearing surface
EMS arm is stationary and

pneumatic brake bladder
remains deflated.
EMS arm is mobile and

pneumatic brake bladder is
inflated.
Picture #7) EMS Pneumatic Brakes
Page 14 of 26
3.0
Surgical Light and Flat Panel Systems
Picture #8) Surgical Light and Flat Panel Suspension
For TRUMPF surgical light and flat panel suspensions a substructure must be fabricated on-site
by others to support the light and flat panel suspension system. TRUMPF will supply a system
mounting plate for attachment to the substructure. The attachment method at this location must
be approved by the structural engineer of record.
3.1
Design Loads for Surgical Light and Flat Panel Systems

Fmax.
Mbmax.
1,780 N (400 lbf)

2,033 Nm ( 1,500 ft-lbs)
Figure #8) Design Loads (Surgical Light and Flat Panel Systems)
The design loads as stated are representative of a maximum load configuration. TRUMPF
recommends that all surgical light and flat panel structures are designed to this maximum
condition in order to maintain flexibility for future project upgrades.
3.2
Structural Deflection Criteria (Lights and Flat Panels)

Page 15 of 26

3.3
Design Elevations for Substructure
The TRUMPF surgical light and flat panel suspension system can be configured to have either a
flat cover to conceal the ceiling cutout or it can be configured with a 150mm (6) deep ceiling
cover to conceal the ceiling cutout. Typically a flat ceiling cover is specified for all new
construction projects. The following two figures show the target elevations for both types of
systems.
Figure #9) Structural Elevations for Light / Flat Panel with Flat Ceiling Cover
When using the flat ceiling cover, the structure must be designed such that the underside of the
TRUMPF light mounting plate will be 5 above the finished ceiling. The support substructure by
others should be planned to end at 10 above the finished ceiling.
Page 16 of 26
Figure #10) Structural Elevations for Light / Flat Panel with 6 Deep Ceiling Cover
When using the 6 deep ceiling cover, the structure should be designed such that the underside
of the TRUMPF light mounting plate will be flush with the room side of the finished ceiling. If
possible, the support substructure by others should be planned to end at 5 above the finished
ceiling. However, the 6 deep ceiling cover is primarily utilized for renovation scenarios when
existing structures are to be reused. When utilizing an existing structure for a replacement light
the bolt pattern, and existing structure elevation must be recorded and given to TRUMPF. An
adapter mounting plate is available from TRUMPF which allows the TRUMPF suspension tube to
adapt to common industry bolt patterns (P/N: 110002).
Note: The structural engineer of record will need to verify that the existing structure is adequate
for the TRUMPF design loads and deflection criteria as specified is Sections 3.1 and 3.2.
Page 17 of 26

3.4
TRUMPF Surgical Light / Flat Panel Mounting Plates
TRUMPF will supply a light mounting plate to be installed by the contractor during the preinstallation phase of a project. There are two different versions of the light mounting plate. The
standard light mounting plate (P/N: 110036) is used for all new construction projects, and an
adapter plate (P/N: 110002) is available for renovations to existing structures. Figure #6 shows a
depiction of both plates, and detailed drawings are available upon request.
Figure #11) Light Mounting Plates
TRUMPF recommends 3/4 ASTM-A307 hardware for attachment of the TRUMPF light mounting
plate to the sub-structure. This hardware specification needs to be approved by the structural
engineer of record for the project. Mounting holes for the standard light mounting plate
attachment to the sub-structure are on a 10.25 square pattern. The required cutout in the
finished ceiling is 14.5 x 14.5 square +/- 1/2.
The Adapter light mounting plate is used to adapt TRUMPF systems to existing installation for
renovation projects. Please reference drawing #110002 in the appendix for details regarding the
available hole patterns.
Page 18 of 26

3.5
TRUMPF Surgical Light Electrical and Conduit Requirements
3.5.1 Installation of Surgical Light Transformer Enclosures

For new construction projects, the surgical light power transformers will be located in above
ceiling enclosure boxes. A separate transformer enclosure is required for each lamp head.
Transformer enclosures will be provided by TRUMPF in advance of the final installation.
Transformer enclosures must be located in an accessible location. If necessary, an access panel
may be required in the finished ceiling for the transformer enclosure(s). Figure #11 shows the
overall dimensions of the transformer enclosure; please refer to TRUMPF drawing # 110699 for
additional information.
Figure #12) Surgical Light Transformer Enclosure
Page 19 of 26
Notes:
1)
Hardware for enclosure mounting is provided by others.
2)
Transformer enclosure(s) must be mounted within 30 of the light mount.
3)
If possible multiple transformer enclosures should be located adjacent to one another.
4)
Refer to Section 3.5.3 for required conduit runs.
3.5.2 Transformer Location for Replacement (Renovation) Lights

In the case of renovation projects it may be difficult to find a suitable location for transformer
enclosures. In this situation, it is possible to mount the transformers underneath the ceiling cover
on the light suspension tube. The 6 deep round ceiling cover must be used when mounting
transformers underneath the ceiling cover, and design elevations must be consistent with Figure
#9 in Section 3.3.
Transformer installed
under ceiling cover by
TRUMPF technician
during final installation
Figure #13) Transformer Installed Underneath Light Ceiling Cover
Note:
1)
Refer to Section 3.5.4 for required conduit runs
Page 20 of 26
3.5.3 Required Conduits for Transformers in Enclosures (New Construction)
Figure #14) Required Conduit Runs for Transformers in Enclosures

Notes:
1)
2)
3)
Total conduit runs from transformer enclosures to light mounts or wall controls must not
exceed 30.
All fabricated structures, 120 VAC circuits, conduits, junction boxes, and whips are
provided and installed by others.
Low voltage cables for wall controls, synchronization, and DC power are provided and
installed by TRUMPF.
Page 21 of 26
3.5.4 Required Conduits for Transformers Underneath Cover (Renovation)
Figure #15) Required Conduit Runs for Transformers Underneath Ceiling Covers
Notes:
1)
2)
3)
Total conduit runs from light mounts to wall controls or camera boxes must not exceed
30.
All fabricated structures, 120 VAC circuits, conduits, junction boxes, and whips are
provided and installed by others.
Low voltage cables for wall controls, synchronization, and DC power are provided and
installed by TRUMPF.
Page 22 of 26
3.5.5 Site Preparation for Surgical Light Wall Controls

Wall control boxes for the surgical lights will be installed during the final installation. TRUMPF will
supply and pull the low voltage transmission cables. The appropriate on-site contractor will be
responsible preparation of the site for the wall control boxes. This includes the rough-in of single
gang junction boxes and rigid conduit per figure #16 as shown below. Wall control boxes will be
surface mounted using anchors.
Figure #16) Surgical Light Wall Control Rough-in and Dimensions

Notes:
1)
2)
3)
4)
Contractor is to provide (1) 1 conduit terminating to a single gang junction box for each
wall control. Multiple wall controls can be ganged together as shown above.
Single gang junction boxes should be mounted horizontally.
Wall control boxes and low voltage signal cables will be provided and installed by
TRUMPF during final installation.
Project architect should determine wall control placement.
Page 23 of 26
4.0
Ceiling Mounted Exam (Helion-S) Lights
4.1
Design Loads for Ceiling Mounted Exam (Helion-S) Lights

Fmax.
Mbmax.
445 N (100 lbf)

339 Nm (250 ft-lbs)
Figure #17) Design Loads for Exam (Helion-S) Lights
4.2
Structural Deflection Criteria (Helion-S)
4.3

Design Elevations for Substructure (Helion-S)
Figure #18) Design Elevations for Helion-S
Page 24 of 26
Notes:
1)
Required opening in finished ceiling is 8 x 8 +/- centered.
2)
Four each, 3/8 diameter x 1.5 long hex bolts, hex nuts, flat washers, and split lock
washers are required for final installation. Hardware is to be provided by others.
3)
Upper flange of suspension tube is 6 square by thick. Mounting holes are located on
a 4-3/16 square hole pattern.
4)
The sub structure should be designed to come to rest flush with the finished
ceiling for all installations with finished ceiling heights in excess of 9 AFF. For
finished ceiling heights less than 9 AFF, please contact TRUMPF Project
Engineering for recommendations on sub-structure elevations.
4.4
Electrical and Conduit Requirements (Helion-S)
Figure #19) Electrical and Conduit Requirements for Helion-S

Notes:
1)
Light transformer is mounted on the suspension flange and is covered by a 12 diameter

x 4 deep soffit. Transformer is installed by TRUMPF during final installation.
2)
One 120 VAC branch circuit, junction box, and whip are to be supplied by others.
Junction box should be located within 1 of light mount, and whip must reach a minimum
of 2 below the finished ceiling.
3)
Power control switch is located on lamp head.
Page 25 of 26
A.0
Appendix
A.1
Rough-in Drawings Available Upon Request
The following matrix lists the applicable product and rough-in drawings for each phase of a preinstallation project. Please call out the drawing number and revision level when referencing these
files in top level plans or process discussions.
Pre-installation
Process
Equipment
Management Systems
(EMS)
iLED Surgical Light

and Flat Panel
Suspensions
Helion-S
Ceiling Mounted
Examination Light
Mounting System
Elevations and Bill of
Materials
110106 8 Span
110107 14 47 Span
110108 47 59 Span
110433
110687
Mounting Plates
110037 Mounting
110213 Lateral Bracing
110036 Standard
110002 Adapter
N/A
Transformer
Enclosures
N/A
110699
110687
Required Conduit
Pathways
By Integration Provider
110694
110695
110696
110697
110698
110687
Wall Controls
N/A
110701
N/A
Figure #20) Rough-in Drawings from TRUMPF
A.2
Contact Information
TRUMPF Project Engineering can be reached for further clarification at (888) 474-9460
Page 26 of 26
ALL OR'S SHOULD BE CONSIDERED AS FULLY INTEGRATED WITH VIDEO, VOICE

ACTIVATION AND DEVICE/INSTRUMENT CONTROL
ALL OR'S SHOULD BE CONSIDERED AS FULLY INTEGRATED WITH VIDEO, VOICE

ACTIVATION AND DEVICE/INSTRUMENT CONTROL
Harmony CS DF
Dual Arm Fixed Medium
Effective Arm
Length ( A )
Arm Description
inches
(mm)
49.2
1250
49.2
1250
49.2
1250
49.2
1250
49.2
1250
59.1
1500
59.1
1500
59.1
1500
59.1
1500
59.1
1500
68.9
1750
68.9
1750
68.9
1750
68.9
1750
68.9
1750
78.7
2000
78.7
2000
78.7
2000
78.7
2000
78.7
2000
Harmony DF50
Harmony DF60
Harmony DF70
Harmony DF80
SC 20, 40, 50
SC 40W, 50W
Technical
Arm Length
(B)/(C)
inches
Pendant
Ht or Lgth.(D)
D Radius
inches (mm)
29.5 /
29.5 /
29.5 /
29.5 /
29.5 /
19.7
19.7
19.7
19.7
19.7
SC20
(500mm)
74.4
1890
SC40
(1000mm)
74.4
1890
SC50
(1250mm)
74.4
1890
SC40 W
(1000mm)
74.4
1890
SC50 W
(1250mm)
74.4
1890
29.5 /
29.5 /
29.5 /
29.5 /
29.5 /
29.5
29.5
29.5
29.5
29.5
SC20
(500mm)
84.3
2140
SC40
(1000mm)
84.3
2140
SC50
(1250mm)
84.3
2140
SC40 W
(1000mm)
84.3
2140
SC50 W
(1250mm)
84.3
2140
SC20
(500mm)
94.1
2390
SC40
(1000mm)
94.1
2390
SC50
(1250mm)
94.1
2390
SC40 W
(1000mm)
94.1
2390
SC50 W
(1250mm)
94.1
2390
SC20
(500mm)
103.9
2640
SC40
(1000mm)
103.9
2640
SC50
(1250mm)
103.9
2640
SC40 W
SC50 W
(1000mm)
(1250mm)
103.9
2640
103.9
2640
39.3/29.5
39.3/29.5
39.3/29.5
39.3/29.5
39.3/29.5
39.3 /
39.3 /
39.3 /
39.3 /
39.3 /
39.3
39.3
39.3
39.3
39.3
Arm Abrevations
Pendant Abrevations
SF = Single arm Fixed
SH = Supply Head
DF = Double arm Fixed
SC = Supply Column
SA = Single arm Adjustable
T = Triangular
DA = Double arm Adjustable

L = lite
V = Vertical Forta Column (1250mm)

K = Cart
Number = Nominal Length in Inches
W = Special ICU Column w / Wide Panel

L = lite
Harmony CS DF
Effective Arm
Length ( A )
Arm Description
Technical
Arm Length
(B)/(C)
SC 20L, 40L, 50L
Pendant
Radius
inches
(mm)
inches
(mm)
inches
78.7
2000
SC20L
(500mm)
104.4
2653
78.7
2000
SC40L
(1000mm)
104.4
2653
78.7
2000
39.3 /39.3
39.3 / 39.3
39.3 / 39.3
SC50L
(1250mm)
104.4
2653
88.6
2250
SC20L
(500mm)
114.3
2903
88.6
2250
SC40L
(1000mm)
114.3
2903
88.6
2250
49.2 / 39.3
49.2 / 39.3
49.2 / 39.3
SC50L
(1250mm)
114.3
2903
98.4
2500
SC20L
(500mm)
124.1
3153
98.4
2500
SC40L
(1000mm)
124.1
3153
98.4
2500
49.2 / 49.2
49.2 / 49.2
49.2 / 49.2
SC50L
(1250mm)
124.1
3153
78.7
2000
SC20L
(500mm)
104.4
2653
78.7
2000
SC40L
(1000mm)
104.4
2653
78.7
2000
39.3 / 39.3
39.3 / 39.3
39.3 / 39.3
SC50L
(1250mm)
104.4
2653
88.6
2250
SC20L
(500mm)
114.3
2903
88.6
2250
SC40L
(1000mm)
114.3
2903
88.6
2250
49.2 / 39.3
49.2 / 39.3
49.2 / 39.3
SC50L
(1250mm)
114.3
2903
Harmony DF80
Harmony DF90
Harmony DF100
Harmony DF80L
Harmony DF90L
Ht or Lgth.(D)
Arm Abrevations
Pendant Abrevations
SH = Supply Head
SC = Supply Column
T = Triangular

L = lite

K = Cart

L = lite
Harmony CS DF
SH 20
Harmony DF70
68.9
Technical Arm
Length
Pendant
(B)/(C)
Ht or Lgth.(D)
(mm)
inches
39.3 / 29.5 SH20
1750
(500mm)
Harmony DF80
78.7
2000
39.3 / 39.3
SH20
(500mm)
94.6
Harmony DF90
88.6
2250
49.2 / 39.3
SH20
(500mm)
104.5
Harmony DF100
98.4
2500
49.2 / 49.2
SH20
(500mm)
114.3
Effective Arm
Length ( A )
Arm Description
inches
Arm Abrevations
Pendant Abrevations
SH = Supply Head
SC = Supply Column
T = Triangular
L = lite
K = Cart

L = lite
D Radius
inches
(mm)
84.8
2154
2404
2654
2654
2654
2904
Harmony CS DF
SH 20L
Harmony DF80
78.7
Technical Arm
D Radius
Length
Pendant
(B)/(C)
Ht or Lgth.(D)
inches (mm)
(mm)
inches
39.3 / 39.3 SH20L
2000
(500mm)
91.4
2323
Harmony DF90
88.6
2250
49.2 / 39.3
SH20L
(500mm)
101.3
Harmony DF100
98.4
2500
49.2 / 49.2
SH20L
(500mm)
111.1
Harmony DF80L
78.7
2000
39.3 / 39.3
SH20L
(500mm)
91.4
Harmony DF90L
88.6
2250
49.2 / 39.3
SH20L
(500mm)
101.3
Effective Arm
Length ( A )
Arm Description
inches
Arm Abrevations
Pendant Abrevations
SH = Supply Head
SC = Supply Column
T = Triangular
L = lite
K = Cart

L = lite
2573
2654
2823
2654
2323
2654
2573
Harmony CS DF
Dual Arm Fixed Light
SC 60T
Harmony DF80
78.7
Harmony DF90
88.6
Technical Arm
Length
Pendant
(B)/(C)
Ht or Lgth.(D)
(mm)
inches
39.3 / 39.3 SC60 T (1500mm)
2000
49.2 / 39.3 SC60 T (1500mm)
2250
Harmony DF100
98.4
2500
49.2 / 49.2
Harmony DF80 L
78.7
2000
Harmony DF90 L
88.6
2250
Effective Arm
Length ( A )
Arm Description
inches
D Radius
inches
(mm)
87.8
2231
97.7
2481
SC60 T (1500mm)
107.5
2731
39.3 / 39.3
SC60 T (1500mm)
87.8
2231
49.2 / 39.3
SC60 T (1500mm)
97.7
2481
Arm Abrevations
Pendant Abrevations
SH = Supply Head
SC = Supply Column
T = Triangular
L = lite
K = Cart

L = lite
ITEM #
ADDITIONAL LOADING INFORMATION
Arm Description
Overall
Arm
Length
(mm)
Technical
Arm Length
(mm)
Technical
Arm
Tota l W e ight Ma x imum Mome nt
Length
at Structural at Structural Mounting
(inch)
Mounting Plate
Plate
lbs
1
2
Harmony CS SF20
Harmony CS SF40
500mm
1000mm
500mm
1000mm
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Harmony
Harmony
Harmony
Harmony
Harmony
Harmony
Harmony
Harmony
Harmony
1000mm
1250mm
1500mm
1750mm
2000mm
2250mm
2500mm
2000mm
2250mm
500 / 500
750 / 500
750 / 750
1000 / 750
1000 / 1000
1250 / 1000
1250 / 1250
1000 / 1000
1250 / 1000
12 Harmony CS SA40
1000mm
1000mm
14
15
16
17
18
19
1500mm 500 / 1000

1750mm 750 / 1000
2000mm 1000 / 1000
2250mm 1250 / 1000
2000mm 750 / 1000
0 mm
0 mm
Harmony
Harmony
Harmony
Harmony
Harmony
Harmony
CS
CS
CS
CS
CS
CS
CS
CS
CS
CS
CS
CS
CS
CS
CS
DF40
DF50
DF60
DF70
DF80
DF90
DF100
DF80 L
DF90 L
DA60
DA70
DA80
DA90
DA80 L
F
Ft-Lbs
(Nm )
857 lb 3810 N
1807 Lb-Ft
2450 Nm
875 lb 3890 N
3024 Lb-Ft
4100 Nm
717 lb 3190 N
2338 Lb-Ft
3170 Nm
989 lb 4400 N
3644 Lb-Ft
4940 Nm
998 lb 4440 N
4263 Lb-Ft
5780 Nm
1012 lb 4500 N
4875 Lb-Ft
6610 Nm
1021 lb 4540 N
5495 Lb-Ft
7450 Nm
1032 lb 4590 N
6107 Lb-Ft
8280 Nm
1003 lb 4460 N
6417 Lb-Ft
8700 Nm
488 lb 2170 N
2294 Lb-Ft
3110 Nm
418 lb 1860 N
1918 Lb-Ft
2600 Nm
39.3
625 lb 2780 N
2050 Lb-Ft
2780 Nm
19.7 / 39.3
29.5 / 39.4
39.3 / 39.5
49.2 / 39.6
39.3 /39.5
0 mm
728 lb 3240 N
2899 Lb-Ft
3930 Nm
737 lb 3280 N
3319 Lb-Ft
4500 Nm
746 lb 3320 N
4204 Lb-Ft
5700 Nm
782 lb 3480 N
4175 Lb-Ft
5660 Nm
746 lb 3320 N
3739 Lb-Ft
5070 Nm
414 lb 1840 N
819 Lb-Ft
1110 Nm
19.7
39.3
19.7
29.5
29.5
39.3
39.3
49.2
49.2
39.3
49.2
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
19.7
19.7
29.5
29.5
39.3
39.3
49.2
39.3
39.3
(k g)

L = lite
FOR MORE SPECIFIC LOADING INFORMATION, REFERENCE SEISMIC REPORTS
ALL OR'S SHOULD BE CONSIDERED

AS FULLY INTEGRATED WITH VIDEO,
VOICE ACTIVATION AND DEVICE/
INSTRUMENT CONTROL
Visum 300
Ceiling-Mounted Exam Light
Pre-Installation Manual
April 2010
1004-400-192 REV B
www.stryker.com
Visum 300
Ceiling-Mounted Exam Light
Pre-Installation Manual
This manual contains confidential information that shall not be disclosed or duplicated for any reason
other than to use and maintain a STRYKER Visum 300 Ceiling-Mounted. This restriction does not
limit the right to use information contained in this manual if it is obtained from another source without restriction. The information subject to this restriction is contained in all pages of this manual.
April 2010 Stryker Communications. All Rights Reserved. Information in this document is subject
to change without notice. Stryker and Stryker logo are registered trademarks of Stryker.
Visum is a registered trademark of Stryker.
All Rights Reserved
Visum 300 Ceiling-Mounted Exam Light Pre-Installation Manual
1004-400-192 REV B

Contents
1. Warnings and Cautions............................................................................................................. 6
1.1
Warnings ..............................................................................................................................6
2. Product Symbol Definition ........................................................................................................ 7

3. Definitions ................................................................................................................................. 8
4. Party Responsibilities ............................................................................................................... 9
4.1 Responsibilities of the Hospital and/or Designee (e.g. Contractor,
Engineer, or Architect) ............................................................................................................................9
4.2
Strykers Responsibilities ......................................................................................................9
5. Site Preparation ...................................................................................................................... 10

5.1
Visum 300 CM Light System Support Structure ...............................................................11
5.2
Ceiling Access ....................................................................................................................13
5.3
Access Panel ......................................................................................................................13
5.4
Electrical .............................................................................................................................13
Appendix A: Superstructure Load Calculations ........................................................................... 14

1. Warnings and Cautions
Please read this manual and follow its instructions carefully. The words WARNING, CAUTION, and
Note carry special meanings and should be carefully reviewed:
WARNING
The personal safety of the patient or user may be involved. Disregarding

this information could result in injury to the patient.
Caution
Special service procedures or precautions must be followed to avoid damaging the instrument.
Warning
A lightening bolt within a triangle is intended to warn of the presence of

hazardous voltages. Refer all service to authorized personnel.
Note
Special information to make maintenance easier or important information more

clear.
To avoid potential serious injury to the user and the patient and/or damage to this device, the user
must adhere to the following warnings and cautions.
1.1
Warnings
1. Read this manual thoroughly, and be familiar with its contents prior to using this equipment.
2. Avoid removing covers on the product to avoid electric shock, unless specifically instructed to
do so.
3. Attempt no internal repairs or adjustments unless specifically instructed to do so in this manual.

2. Product Symbol Definition
The following symbols may be found on the Stryker Visum 300 Ceiling-Mounted Exam Light:
An exclamation mark within a triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence
of important operating and maintenance (service) instructions in the literature accompanying the product.
A lightning bolt within a triangle indicates the presence of hazardous voltage. Refer
all service to authorized personnel.
Denotes usage tips and useful information.
EDS
(29AZ)
Indicates the product is compliant Medical Electrical Equipment with Respect to

Electrical Shock, Fire, and Mechanical Hazard only in accordance with CAN/CSA
C22.2 No601.1.
Denotes compliance to CSA Standard C22.2, 60601.1 - M90, AS 3200, IEC 60601,
IEC 60601-2-41, UL 60601, EN 60601
Denotes the date the equipment was manufactured.
Denotes the manufacturer of the device.
Denotes product/part number.
Denotes product/serial number.
Denotes lot or batch number.

3. Definitions
HTM2007
Design considerations and Validation of Electrical Services
HBN 26
Guidelines for the design of Facilities for Surgical Procedures
HTM2022
Sign, installation, validation, and verification of Medical Gas Pipeline Systems
IEC60601
Medical Electrical Equipment general requirements for safety
IEC364
Electrical Installations of Buildings: section 710 Medical Locations
Interstitial Space
The area between the solid ceiling and finished ceiling
NEC
National Electrical Code
NFPA
National Fire Protection Agency (see http://www.nfpa.org)
NFPA 99
Section of NFPA relating to Health Care Facilities
NIST
Non Interchangeable Screw Thread
OSHPD
Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development (California) (see http://

www.oshpd.cahwnet.gov)
WARNING
Energized electrical circuits can cause severe injury or death. Ensure that all
personnel working around energized circuits have been trained in and are
following proper lockout/tag-out and other applicable safety procedures.
WARNING
All Stryker-supplied equipment is to be stored in a clean, dry environment

prior to installation. Failing to comply with this requirement may lead to
damage of equipment and possible failure of components.

4. Party Responsibilities
The responsibilities associated with planning and preparation for installation of the Visum 300 CM
Light System will be shared between the hospital and Stryker. These responsibilities are outlined below.
4.1
Responsibilities of the Hospital and/or Designee (e.g. Contractor,

Engineer, or Architect)
1. Preparing the light installation site. Ceiling must have an access panel.
2. All preinstallation tasks must be completed prior to the installation of ceiling-mounted equipment.
Note
All preinstallation procedures described in this manual must be completed by the

proposed installation date.
3. Providing all relevant drawings to Stryker, in .dwg (CAD) format. Relevant drawings include,
but are not limited to, drawings of room layout (current and/or proposed), electrical services,
mechanical services, room elevation, support structure, and reflected ceilings.
4. Accepting delivery of Stryker equipment.
5. Delivering Stryker packages to the appropriate rooms, prior to the installation date.
6. Storing all Stryker equipment in a clean, dry environment prior to installation.
7. Providing Stryker personnel with access to locations where pre-assembly planning could be
done.
8. Removing and disposing of all packaging material after installation is complete.
9. Supply and install conduit and fitting to sheet metal guard.
10. Connecting all high-voltage electrical connections.
11. Installing equipment per installation and operations manual.
12. Performing final inspection of Final Installed Product.
13. Design and install the support structure to be sufficient to support the (Stryker-supplied)
weight and moment loads of each piece of equipment and to satisfy all applicable regulations
including but not limited to building and electrical codes.
4.2
Strykers Responsibilities
1. Providing the hospital and/or its designee with elevation and plan view drawings of room configurations that include Stryker equipment.
2. Advising the hospital of the proposed installation date.
3. Announcing the arrival of Stryker installation personnel to the hospital and/or designee.
4. Installing and inspecting Visum 300 CM Light System, if installation services have been purchased.

5. Site Preparation
Prior to the installation of the Visum 300 CM Light System, the interstitial space must be prepared
for final installation. Preparation includes installation of Visum 300 CM Light System support
structure as well as electrical services. The contractor must check all parts against the customer order
and supply all components that are not supplied by Stryker (e.g. electrical Junction Boxes, flexible
conduit, etc.). Stryker will assume that all work has been performed in accordance with all applicable
regulations including, but not limited to, local electrical and building codes, as well as NEC and NFPA.
2
Interstitial
Space
1. Super Structure*
2. Conduit and Wiring from
Breaker Panel*
3. Junction Box*
4. Flex Conduit with
Fitting*
5. Mounting Plate with
Stryker Bolt Pattern*
6. Access Panel (Required)
* = Customer Supplied
Figure 1: Side view of the Visum 300 CM Light System Site Preparation
Junction Box should be within 3 of the bottom of the customer-supplied mounting plate.
Note
The Support Structure and Electrical Services shown in Figure 1 are the Hospitals responsibility and are not covered by Stryker Warranty.
Customer-supplied flex conduit must be brought to the top of the sheet metal guard and connected.
Visum 300 CM Configuration
Mounting Plate to
Finished Ceiling Distance
Visum 300 CM Assembly
38
Table 1: Plate to Ceiling Distance (Note Tolerances)
Ceiling Cutout
Mounting Plate
Single
Ceiling Cover
10 (Round)
Table 2: Ceiling Cutout Sizes (Note Tolerances)
10
14

5.1
Visum 300 CM Light System Support Structure
Clear Zone
(15.0)
Access Panel CutOut (Required)
Ceiling Panel
Cut-Out
Figure 2: Isometric Bottom View of Ceiling Structure / False Ceiling (Hospital Responsibility)
Four Clear Zones

(3.0 each)
Attached to ceiling
Superstructure
Clear Zone
(15.0)
False
ceiling
Figure 3: Isometric Top View of Ceiling Structure / False Ceiling (Hospital Responsibility)
The support structure must be designed and fabricated to adequately support the loads for each
11
application and to conform to all applicable regulations (see Appendix A for additional information).
The Hospital is responsible to design the mount to accept the Visum 300 CM Light System
mounting flange bolt pattern. The flange bolt pattern is shown in Figure 4 on the following
page.
The required distance between the bottom of the mounting plate and the bottom of the finished
ceiling varies, depending on Visum 300 CM Light System configuration. Use Table 1 to determine the location of the mounting plate, relative to the ceiling.
The mounting (interface) plate must be welded to the structure, and must be able to support
the loads in Appendix A.
Figure 4: Structural Flange Bolt Pattern
Weight (Light Assembly)

Bending Moment
30 lbs (13.6 kg)

2,799 in-lbs
Table 3: Weights and Moments
12
Caution
The ceiling cover holes and flange mounting holes, located in the plates
Clear Zone, must not be impeded by the support structure or welding slug
(see Figures 2 and 3).
WARNING
The load data of the ceiling models is in Appendix A. Make sure to take into
account the specified regional safety factors.

WARNING
Responsibility for proper design and manufacture of the support structure

lies entirely with the hospital/contractor and is not covered through warranty by Stryker. Improperly designed support structures may result in
poor performance and/or damage to equipment, as well as possible injury
to the user. Service charges related to inadequate support structure design
shall be at the customers expense. Stryker will not inspect or approve the
support structure.
WARNING
Correct distance between the bottom of the mounting plate and the bottom
of the finished ceiling is critical (see Table 1).
Note
5.2
Bottom surface of mounting (interface) plate must be level to within 0.125

(6.4mm).
Ceiling Access
As shown in Figure 2, a 10 diameter hole aligned with the center of the mounting plate is required to
provide easy access to electrical conduits for installation of Visum 300 CM Light System. This hole
will be concealed with a 14 (360mm) round cover (Stryker-supplied) at the time of final installation.
Make sure that no objects may interfere with this space.
5.3
Access Panel
As shown in Figure 2, the ceiling must have space to make electrical connections within the ceiling and
to place terminated cables inside the Junction Box.
5.4
Electrical
WARNING
Energized electrical circuits can cause severe injury or death. Ensure

that all personnel working around energized circuits have been trained
in and are following proper lockout/tag-out and other applicable safety
procedures.
All electrical services must be routed in accordance with all applicable regulations (including but not
limited to local building and electrical codes) using conduit and fitting, and should be routed in
such a way that the wires can be terminated at the mounting flange.
Note
All wiring must be #12 AWG minimum to supply required electricity.
A minimum of one 10 amp circuit is recommended for the Visum 300 CM light System. The conduit
length (Item 4 on Figure 1) between the sheet metal guard and the Junction Box cannot exceed 5.
Connect the Visum 300 CM Light System electrical power to hospital-supplied wires.
13

Appendix A: Superstructure Load Calculations
on
Monday, March 12, 2007
Anthony R. Pike
14
(916) 654-3362
on
Anthony R. Pike
(916) 654-3362
15
on
Anthony R. Pike
16
(916) 654-3362
17
18
19
20
Stryker Communications
1410 Lakeside Pkwy.,
Flower Mound, TX 75028
t: 972.410.7100
www.stryker.com

INTEGRATED WITH VIDEO, VOICE ACTIVATION
AND DEVICE/INSTRUMENT CONTROL
FLEX S
Operations Manual
May 2011 P13742 REV D www.stryker.com
FLEX S
Operations Manual
This manual contains confidential information that shall not be disclosed or duplicated for any reason
other than to use and maintain a STRYKER FLEXiS. This restriction does not limit the right to use
information contained in this manual if it is obtained from another source without restriction. The
information subject to this restriction is contained in all pages of this manual.
May 2011 Stryker Communications. All Rights Reserved. Information in this document is subject to
change without notice. Stryker and Stryker logo are registered trademarks of Stryker.
FLEXiS is a registered trademark of Stryker.
All Rights Reserved
Stryker FLEXiS Operations Manual
P13742 REV D
S
Contents
1. Indications for Use.................................................................................................................................................. 4
1.1 Indications.......................................................................................................................... 4
1.2 Contraindications................................................................................................................. 4
2. General Warnings and Cautions.............................................................................................................................. 5

2.1
Warnings............................................................................................................................. 5
2.2 Cautions.............................................................................................................................. 6
2.3 Notes.................................................................................................................................. 6
3. Product Symbol Definition..................................................................................................................................... 7

3.1
EMC Precautions................................................................................................................... 9
3.1.1
Required Equipment................................................................................................... 9
4. Understanding Load Capacities............................................................................................................................ 10

4.1
FLEXiS System.................................................................................................................... 10
4.2 Shelves.............................................................................................................................. 11
4.3
Accessory Rails................................................................................................................... 11
4.4 Accessories........................................................................................................................ 11
4.5
Electric Current.................................................................................................................. 12
5. FLEXiS Components.............................................................................................................................................. 13
5.1
Cable Kits.......................................................................................................................... 14
5.2
Ceiling Cover...................................................................................................................... 14
5.3
Extension Arm.................................................................................................................... 14
5.4
Motor Arm (Articulating Boom Only).................................................................................... 14
5.5
Drop tube.......................................................................................................................... 14
5.6
FLEXiS System.................................................................................................................... 14
6. Boom Configuration - Modules............................................................................................................................ 15

6.1
Electrical Outlets................................................................................................................ 15
6.2
Gas Outlets........................................................................................................................ 17
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.3
Airflow Meters...........................................................................................................18
Data Connections.......................................................................................................18
Customer Component Installation....................................................................................... 20
6.3.1
Nurse Call, Code Blue, and Data ..................................................................................20
S
7. FLEXiS Accessories ............................................................................................................................................... 22
7.1
Multi-Function Rack (MFR).................................................................................................. 22
7.2
Accessory Rails................................................................................................................... 22
7.2.1
7.2.2
Installing an Accessory Rail to FLEXiS...........................................................................22

Installing an Accessory Rail to an MFR.........................................................................22
7.3
Cable Management System................................................................................................. 23
7.4
Shelf with Keyboard Tray.................................................................................................... 25
7.5
Shelf with Drawer.............................................................................................................. 25
7.6
Night Light........................................................................................................................ 26
7.7
Emergency Stop................................................................................................................. 26
7.8
GCX and IV Pole Accessories................................................................................................. 26
7.9
Non-Stryker Accessories...................................................................................................... 26
8. Shelf and Handle Installation............................................................................................................................... 28

8.1
Adjusting a Shelf................................................................................................................ 28
8.2
Installing a Shelf................................................................................................................ 29
8.3
Handle-to-MFR Bracket Installation.................................................................................... 32
8.4
Handle to FLEXiS Bracket Installation.................................................................................. 34
8.5
Re-sizing an Adjustable Shelf.............................................................................................. 36
8.6 Controls............................................................................................................................. 37
9. Operating the Boom System................................................................................................................................. 38

9.1
Positioning the Boom System............................................................................................. 38
9.1.1
9.1.2
Adjusting Horizontal Position.....................................................................................38

Adjusting Vertical Position (Articulating Boom Only)....................................................38
10. Adjusting the Boom System............................................................................................................................... 40

10.1 Adjusting the Mechanical Limits.......................................................................................... 40
10.2 Adjusting the FLEXiS System Brake (OSC400 Only)................................................................. 40
11. Cleaning and Disinfecting.................................................................................................................................. 41

12. Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................................. 42
13. Technical Specifications...................................................................................................................................... 45
13.1 Environmental Specifications.............................................................................................. 45
13.1.1
Operating/Storage Conditions....................................................................................45
S
13.1.2
Shipping Conditions...................................................................................................45
13.2 Electrical Specifications...................................................................................................... 45

13.3 Mechanical Specifications................................................................................................... 46
13.3.1
13.3.2
Boom Arm Carrying Capacities....................................................................................47

Gas Hose Pressure Specifications.................................................................................48
13.4 Materials Policy.................................................................................................................. 49

13.5 Smoke Rating.................................................................................................................... 49
14. Maintenance...................................................................................................................................................... 50
14.1 Replacing a Fuse................................................................................................................ 50
15. Disposal of the Product...................................................................................................................................... 51

15.1 Metals and Plastics............................................................................................................. 51
16. Stryker Limited Warranty................................................................................................................................... 52

17. Damage Claims.................................................................................................................................................. 53
18. Contact Information........................................................................................................................................... 54
S
1. Indications for Use
1.1 Indications
The Stryker FLEXiS is a configurable, ceiling-mounted device used for supporting and positioning
equipment and accessories in the operating room and patient care areas where it is necessary to deliver
gases, electricity, and data. It is intended to be used for the general patient population, and does not
directly involve body parts.
The primary users of FLEXiS are hospital staff including doctors and nurses.
Caution
The boom system can be equipped with devices from other manufacturers.
However, the use of non-medical grade devices may invalidate UL listing.
For operation, please refer to the operating instructions of the manufacturer.
1.2 Contraindications
There are no contraindications.
S
2. General Warnings and Cautions
Please read this manual and follow its instructions carefully. The words WARNING, CAUTION, and
Note carry special meanings and should be carefully reviewed:
WARNING The personal safety of the patient or user may be involved. Disregarding
this information could result in injury to the patient.
Caution
Special service procedures or precautions must be followed to avoid damaging the instrument.
WARNING A lightening bolt is intended to warn of the presence of hazardous voltages. Refer all service to authorized personnel.
Note
Special information to make maintenance easier or important information more

clear.
To avoid potential serious injury to the user and the patient and/or damage to this device, the user
must adhere to the following warnings and cautions.
Note
2.1
Specific use warnings, cautions, and notes can be found in their applicable sections throughout this manual.
Warnings
1.
2.
3.
4.
Read this manual thoroughly, and be familiar with its contents prior to using this equipment.
Be qualified medical personnel, having complete knowledge of the use of this equipment.
Test this equipment prior to any procedures.
Attempt no repairs or adjustments, unless specifically instructed to do so in this operating
manual.
5. Shut off power to the unit before inspecting system components.
6. Use the boom system only as instructed.
7. Do not allow the boom to collide with walls or other equipment.
8. Readjustments, modifications, and/or repairs must be carried out by persons authorized by
Stryker, unless otherwise noted in this manual.
9. To avoid the risk of electric shock, this equipment must only be connected to a supply mains
with protective earth.
10. To avoid risk of electric shock, do not remove or disable components or remove covers from the
product.
11. To avoid risk of electric shock, only connect equipment to the appropriate electrical outlet.
12. This equipment is not sterile or sterilizable, and therefore caution should be taken around the
sterile field during procedures.
13. Oxygen gas is a strong oxidizer. Do not use oxygen near ignition sources, as it will allow combustion to proceed rapidly and energetically.
14. DO NOT perform internal repairs or adjustments unless specifically instructed to do so in this
manual.

S
2.2 Cautions
1. Follow the care and cleaning instructions in this manual.
2. For U.S. audience only - Caution: Federal Law (USA) restricts this device to sale by or on the
order of a physician.
2.3 Notes
1. Instructions regarding the service and installation of this product may be found in the Service
and Installation Manual (1004400061), which is available only to Stryker-trained employees. For
service on this product, please contact your Stryker representative.
2. All electrical services must be routed in accordance with all applicable regulations including but
not limited to local building and electrical codes. Circuit breakers are not provided in this unit.
FLEXiS System circuits must be connected to correctly rated and protected branch circuits that
are protected by double-pole breakers.
3. In the event that it becomes necessary to terminate power to the FLEXiS System, refer to hospitals electrical diagrams to interrupt power at the mains breaker.
S
3. Product Symbol Definition
The following symbols may be found on the FLEXiS System:
The book symbol is intended to refer the user to important operating and maintenance (service) instructions in the literature accompanying the product.
The book symbol is intended to refer the user to important safety operating and
maintenance (service) instructions in the literature accompanying the product.
An exclamation mark within a triangle is intended to alert the user of warnings and
cautions.
A lightning bolt indicates the presence of hazardous voltage. Refer all service to
authorized personnel.
Denotes temperature limits.
Denotes alternating current.
Denotes protective earth ground
Denotes humidity limits.
Denotes equipotentiality.
Denotes usage tips and useful information.
Denotes a load limitation.
Denotes compliance to European Community Directive 93-42-EEC.
EDS
(29AZ)
Indicates the product is compliant Medical Electrical Equipment with Respect to

Electrical Shock, Fire, and Mechanical Hazard only in accordance with CAN/CSA
C22.2 No601.1.
Denotes the date the equipment was manufactured.
Denotes the manufacturer of the device.
Denotes product/part number.
Denotes product/serial number.
Denotes lot or batch number.
S
Denotes European Representative.
For U.S. audience only - Caution: Federal Law (USA) restricts this device to sale by
or on the order of a physician.
Denotes quantity.
US
Item available in the US only.

Denotes Class 1 and Type B Equipment.
Class 1 Equipment: equipment in which the protection against electric shock does
not rely on Basic Insulation only, but includes an additional safety precaution in
such a way that means are provided for the connection of Accessible Conductive
Parts to Protective (ground) Conductor in the fixed wiring of the installation in such
a way that Accessible Conductive Parts cannot become Live in the event of a failure
of the Basic Insulation. According to EN ISO 11197 and EN60601-1, 1990 including
amendments 1 and 2.
Type B Equipment: equipment providing a particular degree of protection against
electric shock, particularly regarding allowable leakage current, and reliability of the
protective earth connection (if present).
In accordance with European Community Directive 2002/96/EC on Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment, this symbol indicates that the product must not be
disposed of as unsorted municipal waste but should be collected separately.
Note: The device does not contain any hazardous materials.
3 min ; 30 min
Legal regulations may include specifications regarding the disposal of this product. We request that you contact Stryker when you plan to withdraw this device
from service for discard.
This symbol represents the motor duty cycle, or the amount of time an articulating
service head can be operated (3 minutes) and then must rest (30 minutes) before
being operated again.
Denotes tipping hazard.
Indicates double-stacking is prohibited.
Indicates a forklift should not be used with packaging or equipment.
Indicates contents are fragile.
INPUT
Device input.
IP2X
Rating for Protection against harmful ingress of water or particulate matter.
S
MAX LOAD
SHELF
Indicates there is a maximum allowable load capacity for labeled equipment.

Indicates a shelf.
The Star symbol is the unique identifier for the FLEXiS Boom System that is generated on the PO for each order. This number will allow Stryker to determine the
configuration of the FLEXiS Boom System.
Designates emergency stop.
3.1
EMC Precautions
This device is considered medical electrical equipment and requires special precautions regarding
EMC.
Portable and mobile RF communications equipment can affect this devices performance and must be
used in accordance with the following information.
3.1.1
Required Equipment
This device must be used with the provided cable kits.

Using accessories or cables other than those specified may result in increased emissions or decreased
immunity of the equipment or system. The Stryker supplied equipment conforms to IEC 60601-1-2
requirements.
S
4. Understanding Load Capacities
Each piece of equipment on the FLEXiS System is rated with a maximum load capacity that should
never be exceeded to prevent damaging the equipment. The following sections explain the load limits for each item available through Stryker. For non-Stryker items, please refer to the manufacturers
instructions.
4.1
FLEXiS System
Each set of boom arms is rated to carry a maximum allowable weight, exceeding this weight could
cause damage to the boom and/or equipment. Depending on the type of boom arm, the maximum
load capacity will vary. A load limit label is located on two opposite sides of the drop tube, directly
above the FLEXiS, and is boom-specific. The maximum allowable weight claimed on the load label
takes into account any shelves and accessories that were shipped with the boom initially; therefore,
the number that appears on the label is the remaining allowable load limit for the specific boom and
should not be exceeded when adding further shelves, accessories, or equipment.
WARNING It is imperative to take into account the weight of shelves and accessories
when calculating the total load on the boom. Do not exceed the total maximum load capacity for the FLEXiS System.
Figure 4.1 - Label Locations

1
2
3
Max Load Label

Product Label
Electrical Circuit Rating Label
10
S
Other important labels on FLEXiS System include the product label, which can be found near the front
panel, and the electrical circuit ratings, which can be found on the outlets themselves.
4.2 Shelves
Shelves are rated to carry a maximum load capacity of 75 lbs. The load on each shelf is the combination of the load on the accessory rails and the
equipment on the shelf. For example if you hang
20 lbs of accessories on the rails you may only put
55 lbs of equipment on the shelf.
1
Figure 4.2 - Shelf with Accessory Rails
1
2
Accessory Rail
Shelf
WARNING Do not exceed the load capacity for the shelf when adding equipment and
accessories.
WARNING Do not exceed the total boom load capacity when adding shelves and/or
accessories. While a shelf may hold up to 75 lbs, the additional weight may
exceed the total boom capacity.
4.3
Accessory Rails
Each accessory rail attached to the shelves has a maximum load capacity of 37 lbs.
WARNING Do not exceed the load capacity for the accessory rails when adding equipment and accessories.
WARNING Do not exceed the total boom load capacity when adding accessory rails
and/or accessories.
4.4 Accessories
Below are approximate weights for accessories manufactured for and by Stryker for FLEXiS. Use these
calculations when determining the additional weight these accessories add toward the maximum allowable load limit for the boom arm.
Accessory
Small Shelf
Large Shelf
Adjustable Shelf
GCX Arm Mount

Approximate Weight
15 lbs (6.8 kg)
20 lbs (9 kg)
20 lbs (9 kg)
5 lbs (2.3 kg)
Max Load Capacity

75 lbs (35 kg)
75 lbs (35 kgs)
75 lbs (35 kgs)
60 lbs (27.2 kg)
11
S
Accessory
SHAPE Arm Mount
IV Pole Single Arm*
IV Pole Double Arm*
IV Pole Quad Arm*
Drawer
Dual Drawer
Keyboard Tray

Note
4.5
Approximate Weight
15 lbs (6.8 kg)
5 lbs (2.3 lg)
10 lbs (4.5 kg)
20 lbs (9 kg)
5 lbs (2.3 kg)
10 lbs (4.5 kg)
3 lbs (1.4 kg)
Max Load Capacity

25 lbs (11.4 kg)
67 lbs (30 kg)**
88 lbs (40 kg)**
176 lbs (80 kg)**
22 lbs (10 kg)
22 lbs (10 kg)
2.5 lbs (1.1 kg)
* This accessory not evaluated by UL.

** Please refer to the FLEXiS IV Pole Operations and Maintenance manual (P16303)
for important information regarding weight distribution for these accessories.
For weights of accessories not listed in the chart above, contact the original
manufacturer.
Electric Current
Each electrical circuit is labeled with a maximum current rating.

WARNING To prevent electric shock and damage to the outlet and boom, do not exceed the electrical circuit rating.
12
S
5. FLEXiS Components
The FLEXiS System is available in articulating and non-articulating configurations, and with various
load capacities. The booms can be configured in pairs (a tandem configuration) or with other equipment, such as flat panel monitor suspensions and surgical lights.
1
2
3
4
6
5
Figure 5.1 - FLEXiS System

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Extension Arm
Motor Arm (Articulating Boom only)
Drop Tube
FLEXiS Service Head
Navigation Handles
Equipment Shelves
Multi-Function Rack
The FLEXiS System may include some or all of the components listed in the following sections.
13
S
5.1
Cable Kits
Booms are equipped with various cables connected to the FLEXiS System. Extra cables may be present
inside the boom. Contact your Stryker representative if additional cables are required.
Note
5.2
If included, USB cables are only 15 (4.572m) in length. If the USB cable must
span a distance greater than 15 (4.572m), a USB repeater/extender must be used.
Ceiling Cover
The ceiling cover conceals the support structure, as well as the gas and electrical connections to the
boom system. The ceiling cover should only be removed by trained service personnel.
5.3
Extension Arm
The extension arm can be rotated up to 330. To avoid interference with the ceiling, walls, or other
equipment, the rotating range of the extension arm can be limited with mechanical stops during installation.
5.4
Motor Arm (Articulating Boom Only)
The motor arm can be rotated up to 330, but may be limited to prevent interference with ceiling,
walls, or other equipment. The motor arm can be moved vertically (up or down) up to 23.
5.5
Drop tube
The length of the drop tube compensates for different room heights to ensure that the FLEXiS System
is at a suitable working height.
5.6
FLEXiS System
The FLEXiS System contains shelves, equipment supports, power outlets, gas outlets, and data connections and is highly customizable. It can be rotated separately from the arms up to 340. Medical devices
can be placed onto the shelves (optional).
WARNING Oxygen gas is an oxidant. Fire and explosion hazards exist when concentrated sources of oxygen are brought into close proximity of open sparks,
flames, or heat. Do not use oxygen near these sources of ignition as it may
result in rapid combustion.
Warning
Improperly grounded devices connected to the boom electrical outlets may

cause electric shock to the user or patient.
14
S
6. Boom Configuration - Modules
4
3
Figure 6.1 - FLEXiS System with Shelf
1
2
3
4
6.1
Front Plate
Side Modules (Configurable)
Brake and Articulation Controls
Handle
Electrical Outlets
Electrical outlet types will vary depending upon region standards. When using an electrical outlet,
ensure that there is a firm connection between the plug and the outlet. Some outlets may require that
a power switch be turned on before use. If necessary, push in a plug and turn it clockwise to lock the
connection into place.
WARNING Use care when cleaning around electrical outlets and ensure that no fluid
enters the socket to prevent electric shock.
WARNING Check outlet for damage before use.
Caution
Always ensure that plugs are firmly connected to the socket during use to
prevent damage to the equipment.
Caution
Always grasp the plug, as opposed to the cord, when unplugging equipment to prevent damage to the wires within the cord.
15
S
Caution
Note
When connecting or disconnecting equipment to or from the outlets on

the FLEXiS System, use one hand to stabilize the boom, and the other to
connect or disconnect the components.
In the event that it becomes necessary to terminate power to the FLEXiS System,
refer to hospitals electrical diagrams to discontinue power at the mains breaker.
The following electrical outlet types may be configured on the system:

Domestic

US
NEMA 5-15R
NEMA 6-15R
NEMA 5-20R
NEMA 6-20R
NEMA 5-30R
NEMA 6-30R
NEMA L5-15R
NEMA L6-15R
NEMA L5-20R
NEMA L6-20R
NEMA L5-30R
NEMA L6-30R
International (Outside the U.S.)

AS/NZS 3122
BS 1363
BS 546
Note
CEE 7 SHUKO
CEE 7
AFSNIT 107-2-D1
CEI 23-16/VII
GB2099-1 & GB1002-1
NBR 14136
For more detailed instructions on use and information on maintenance schedules, contact the outlet Manufacturer.
Any of the outlets listed above may be provided by the following manufacturers and are suitable for a
10A branch circuit:
Manufacturer
Manufacturer Part
Country/Type
Rating
Type
Number
Clipsal
ML2025V-RD (red)
Australia/New
250VAC / 10A Dual outlet with
ML2025V-BL (blue)
Zealand Socket
switch and light
Outlet
Clipsal
ML2025VD-RD (red) Australia/New
250VAC / 10A Duplex with switch
ML2025VD-BL (blue) Zealand Socket
Outlet
Legrand
074167 (white)
Australia/New
250VAC / 10A Single socket outlet
Zealand Socket
Outlet
16
S
6.2
Gas Outlets
WARNING Always ensure hoses are tightly connected to the outlet before use to prevent leakage.
The FLEXiS System can be configured with any of the following types of gases:

Oxygen
Nitrogen
Nitrous Oxide
Medical Air/MA4
Note
CO2
Vacuum
WAGD/AGSS
He/O2
O2/He
Instrument Air/SA7/Surgical Tool Air/Air 800/
Air Motor
Not all gas types listed above are available in all regions.
Depending on the FLEXiS configuration and region standards, the gas types listed above may be supplied through any of the following outlet types:

DISS
ENV 737-6:2003
CHEMTRON
PURITAN-BENNETT
OXEQUIP
OHMEDA (MADAES)
SIS (AS2896)
JIS T 7101
BS 5682:1998
BSI 6834:1987
DIN 13260-2
SS 875 24 30 (AGA)
ISO 9170-1
ISO 9170-2
UNI 9507
NF S 90-116
Instructions on using the outlet types follow.
Puritan-Bennett
Insertion:
US
To insert a gas hose into the

Puritan-Bennett outlet, press it
firmly into the connection.
Removal:
Oxequip
Insertion:
US

Oxequip outlet, press it firmly
into the connection and turn to
the right.
To release the connection, press Removal:

the hose and connection plate in To release the connection, turn
and then pull out.
the connector to the left and
pull out.
Ohmeda-Medaes
Insertion:
US
To insert a gas hose into an

Ohmeda-Medaes outlet, press it
in firmly.
Removal:
To remove the connection, turn
the outer ring on the connector
and pull back.
17
DISS
Insertion:
Chemtron
Insertion:
To install a gas hose onto the

DISS outlet, screw the hose on
tightly, turning to the right.

Chemtron outlet, press it firmly
into the connection.
Removal:
Removal:
US
US
Regulator
Insertion and Use:
US
To install a gas hose onto the

regulator, screw the hose on
tightly, turning to the right. Adjust the pressure appropriately
for the equipment being used.
To remove the hose, unscrew

To release the connection, press
the hose to the left until it comes down on the white keys to either Removal:
Reduce the outlet pressure to
free from the connection.
side of the hose while pulling
the hose free from the connec- zero, and then remove the hose.
tion.
Note
Please contact your Stryker representative for repair or replacement of gas hoses.
Note
For more detailed instructions on use and information on maintenance schedules

for outlets, contact the outlet Manufacturer.
6.2.1
Airflow Meters
The FLEXiS System can be configured with airflow meters. Please refer to the manufacturers instructions for connection and use.
Integrated Oxygen/Medical Airflow Meters
6.2.2
US
Data Connections
Caution
When disconnecting data connections, be sure to grasp the connector

itself, rather than the cable, to prevent damage to the cables.
18
S
Caution
Use care when making data connections to ensure that the correct connections are being made. Plugging in a connection incorrectly could damage
data pins.
The FLEXiS System can be configured with any of the following types of data connections:
DB9
BNC
RJ45
Insertion:
Insertion:
Insertion:
To insert a DB9 connector, press

it firmly into the DB9 connection. Tighten both screws on
the connector to ensure a tight
connection.
To insert a BNC connector,

press it firmly into the BNC
connection and then twist to
lock it into place.
To insert an RJ45 connector,

press it firmly into the RJ45
connection until you hear an
audible click.
Removal:
Removal:
Removal:
To remove the DB9, unscrew
both screws, grasp the connector firmly, and pull.
To remove the BNC connector, To remove the RJ45 connector,

twist to unlock it, and then pull. press the tab at the top of the
connector to unlock it, and pull
while keeping the tab depressed.
19
HD15
4 PIN DIN
DVI-I
Insertion:
Insertion:
To insert an HD15 connector,

press it firmly into the HD15
connection. Tighten both
screws on the connector to ensure a tight connection.
To insert a 4 PIN DIN connec- To insert a DVI-I connector,

tor, press it firmly into the 4 PIN press it firmly into the DVIDIN connection.
I connection. Tighten both
screws on the connector to
Removal:
ensure a tight connection.
To remove the 4 PIN DIN, grasp
Removal:
the connector firmly and pull.
To remove the DVI-I, unscrew
Removal:
To remove the HD15, unscrew
USB (A or B)
Insertion:
Insertion:
RJ11
Insertion:
LC Fiber
Insertion:
To insert a USB connector, press To insert an RJ11 connector,

it firmly into the USB connecpress it firmly into the RJ11
tion.
connection until you hear an
audible click.
Removal:
To insert an LC fiber connector, press it firmly into the fiber

connection.
To remove the USB, grasp the

connector firmly and pull.
To remove the fiber connector,

grasp the connector, depress the
tab, and pull.
Note
6.3
Removal:
To remove the RJ11 connector,

press the tab at the top of the
connector to unlock it, and pull
while keeping the tab depressed.
Removal:
For more detailed instructions and information on maintenance schedules, contact the cable Manufacturer.
Customer Component Installation

6.3.1
Nurse Call, Code Blue, and Data
The FLEXiS System can be configured with junction boxes that accommodate user-installed equipment, such as Nurse Call and Code Blue buttons, as well as data outlets.
20
S
To install these components:
1. Remove the designated cover plate from the FLEXiS System to expose the metal back-box and
conduit with pull-string.
Figure 6.2 - Back Box with Conduit

2. Use the pull-string to pull the cables down from the ceiling to the outlet and attach to the appropriate conduit.
3. Connect the Nurse Call/Code Blue/Data cable to the FLEXiS System cable.
4. Press equipment securely into the back-box.
5. Secure fasteners as necessary.
6. Install all covers.
Caution
Note
Use only designated outlets to mount equipment and designated conduits

for cables. Never open the boom system to uninstall equipment.
User is responsible for safe installation of equipment.
21
S
7. FLEXiS Accessories
Note
7.1
For information on GCX accessories and IF/Infusion poles, please refer to their
product specific operations manuals.
Multi-Function Rack (MFR)

The Multi-Function Rack (MFR) is used to
mount shelves and other large accessories. For
installation and removal of accessories from the
MFR, refer to the individual accessory sections.
Figure 7.1 - MFRs
7.2
Accessory Rails
Accessory rails are used to attach equipment such
as suction canisters and storage baskets. Accessory rails are provided on equipment shelves. If
there are no shelves, the rails may be attached to
the MFR.
Figure 7.2 - Shelf Accessory Rails
7.2.1
Installing an Accessory Rail to FLEXiS
1. Remove the accessory rail bracket assembly from the packaging.

2. If the bracket comes with the accessory rail attached skip to step 3, otherwise assemble the
bracket to the rail.
3. Position the accessory rail and bracket under the FLEXiS system chassis in the desired location.
4. Install the M3 mounting screws.
7.2.2
Installing an Accessory Rail to an MFR
1. Remove the accessory rail MFR clamp assembly from the packaging.
2. If the accessory rail comes with the MFR clamps attached, skip to Step 3, otherwise assemble the
clamps to the rail.
22
S
a. Combine the clamp pieces. Use the M8 clamp screws and clamp nut to loosely combine the
clamps
b. Assemble the M10 mounting screws through the clamp into the accessory rails. Do not
tighten completely
3. Loosen the mounting screws
4. Loosen the clamp screws as much as possible without disassembly.
5. Slide each clamp assembly apart and position the bracket on the MFRs of the FLEXiS system.
The clamps should be able to open enough to directly install the bracket to the desired location.
6. Use a level to ensure the accessory rail is level.
7. Fully tighten the clamp screws.
8. Fully tighten the mounting screws.
7.3
Cable Management System
The Cable Management System is an optional feature that mounts to the front plate of the FLEXiS System to neatly protect and hide away cables.
To install a Cable Management System:
Note
The Cable Management System can be installed before or after shelves.
1. Remove the cable management system components from the packaging. The package should
include the parts seen in Figure 7.3.
Figure 7.3 - Cable Manager Assembly

1
2
3
4
5
Left Side Panel

Top and Bottom Plates
Right Side Panel
Clips
Screws
23
S
2. Assemble the top plate (Item 2, Figure 7.3) to the right side panel (Item 3) of the cable manager
with two screws as shown in Figure 7.3. The top plate is designated by the cutout facing the
FLEXiS to allow cables to pass through.
Note
It is important to ensure the orientation of the parts matches what is shown in

Figure 7.3.
3. Assemble the bottom plate of the cable manager to left side panel of the cable manager.
4. Slide the right assembly down between the
right MFR and all cables (Figure 7.4).
Figure 7.4 - Right Assembly Installation

5. Slide the left assembly up between the left
MFR and cables (Figure 7.5).
6. Secure the left side panel to the top plate
using two screws.
7. Secure the right side panel to the bottom
plate using the two remaining screws.
Figure 7.5 - Left Assembly Installation
24
S
8. Secure the Cable Manager to the MFR using the clips.
a. Slide the notch of the clip into the
groove of the respective side plate (Figure 7.6).
b. Rotate the clip forward, toward the
MFR.
c. Install clips on both sides of the Cable
Manager.
Figure 7.6 - Clip Installation

Note
7.4
The number of clips required depends on the size of the FLEXiS. A smaller
FLEXiS system requires as few as two clips per side.
Shelf with Keyboard Tray
To install a keyboard tray to a shelf:

1. Align the screw holes on top of the keyboard tray housing with the holes on the bottom of the
respective shelf.
2. Secure the tray using the four screws included with the keyboard tray.
Figure 7.7 - Keyboard Tray Installation

3. Hand tighten all screws fully.
WARNING Be sure to fully hand tighten all screws to prevent the keyboard tray from
falling off.
7.5
Shelf with Drawer
To install a drawer to a shelf:

1. Slide the drawer out in order to gain access to the installation screw holes.
2. Align the screw holes on top of the drawer housing with the holes on the bottom of the respective shelf.
3. Push the screws through the top of the drawer housing.

25
S
4. Place spacers over the screws to separate the drawer housing and shelf.
5. Secure the drawer using the four screws included with the keyboard tray.
6. Hand tighten all screws fully.
Figure 7.8 - Drawer Installation
WARNING Be sure to fully hand tighten all screws to prevent the drawer from falling
off.
7.6
Night Light
The night light is located on the bottom of the FLEXiS System and provides low level lighting. The
night light contains a light sensor so that it turns on automatically when the light level in the room
drops. A sensitivity switch is installed to allow the user to adjust the conditions for when the night
light turns on.
7.7
Emergency Stop
The emergency, or E-Stop feature is only available on certain models of FLEXiS. It is a large red button
that cuts power to an articulating booms motor.
To initiate the E-Stop, press the button.
Note
7.8
Pressing the E-Stop button does not cut power to electrical outlets on the FLEXiS
system, but only to the boom motor.
GCX and IV Pole Accessories
For information on GCX and IV poles, please refer to their respective manuals.
7.9
Non-Stryker Accessories
There are a multitude of non-Stryker accessories available for attachment to the accessory rails and
MFR. Please refer to the manufacturers instructions for correct installation, removal, and use instructions.
WARNING Be sure to securely attach accessories to prevent them from falling off.
26
S
WARNING Never exceed the maximum load capacity for the boom. It is imperative to
take into account the weight that is added with each accessory.
WARNING Never exceed the maximum load capacity for any of the individual accessories.
WARNING Keep accessories that hold fluids away from electric equipment and outlets.
Note
Stryker is not responsible for accessories that are not Stryker brand.
27
S
8. Shelf and Handle Installation
A FLEXiS System may be equipped with up to as many as four shelves. One shelf on the boom may
have a handle attached that houses the controls for brakes and operating an articulating boom.
Shelves may be added, moved, or removed. They may also be width-adjustable. A single drawer or dual
drawer, or a keyboard tray may be attached to a shelf.
WARNING Remove all equipment from shelves before adjusting.
Caution
The 750mm shelf has a maximum carrying capacity of 75 lbs. (35 kg), and
the 515mm shelf has a maximum carrying capacity of 75 lbs. (35 kg).
Caution
Do not exceed the maximum allowable weight capacity for the boom with
shelves or accessories. See Section 4 for details.
Caution
Use caution when loosening shelf clamps to prevent the shelf from falling.
Note
8.1
Two people may be required when installing and adjusting shelves.
Adjusting a Shelf
To adjust the position of an installed shelf, perform the following steps:

1
2
4
Figure 8.1 - Shelf Assembly
1
2
3
4
Shelf Clamps
M6 Clamp Screws
Clamp Nuts
M10 Mounting Screws
28
S
1. Remove all equipment from the shelf.
2. Loosen the M6 screws (Figure 8.1, Item 2) holding the shelf clamps together (Item 1). Do not
remove the screws completely. Be sure to keep track of the nuts (Item 3) on the inside of the
clamps.
Caution
Do not remove screws completely to prevent the shelf from falling off. Be
sure to properly support the shelf when clamps are loose.
3. If shelf does not move easily, slightly loosen the M10 screws (Item 4) until movement is easy.
Assistance may be necessary to hold the shelf to prevent it from falling.
4. Move shelf to the new desired location on the MFR.
5. Loosely retighten the M6 screws.
6. Use a level to ensure the shelf is level.
7. Tighten the M6 screws completely. There should not be a gap between the clamp pieces.
8. If the M10 screws were loosened, retighten completely.
8.2
Installing a Shelf
Figure 8.2 - Shelf with handle attached

To install a shelf:
1. Remove the shelf from the packaging. The shelf should include all the parts shown in Figure 8.2
unless it comes without a handle.
2. Assemble the shelf clamps by combining the clamp pieces as shown in Figure 8.1 (Item 1). Use
the M8 clamp screw (Item 2) and clamp nut (Item 3) to loosely assemble the clamps.
3. Loosely assemble the M10 mounting screws (Item 2) through the clamps into the shelf.
4. Loosen the clamp screws (Item 1) as much as possible without disassembly.
5. Slide each clamp assembly apart and position the shelf on the MFRs of the FLEXiS System. The
clamps should be able to open enough to directly install the shelf to the desired location.
6. Use a level to ensure the clamps can close properly and the shelf is level.
7. Fully tighten the clamp screws (Figure 8.3, Item 1).
29
S
2
1
Figure 8.3 - Screw and Nut Locations
8. Fully tighten the mounting screws (Item 2).
9. If the shelf has a handle, connect the control cable from the FLEXiS System to the connector on
the back of the shelf.
1
Figure 8.4 - Location of Screws on Access Panel
30
a. Using a Phillips screw driver, open the

access panel (Figure 8.4, Item 1) on
the front or back of the FLEXiS System
by removing the eight Phillips screws
(Item2).
b. The access panel is attached to the

FLEXiS System via a tether wire (Figure
8.5, Item 1) inside the system to prevent
it from falling when removed. Ensure
the panel rests on the tether when it is
removed and not on the medical gas
hoses.
Figure 8.5 - Tether Wire Location

c. Locate the control cable connector (Figure 8.6) inside the FLEXiS System.
Figure 8.6 - Control Cable for a Shelf with Handle

d. Pass the control cable through the data
pass-through (Figure 8.7) on the same
side as the shelf with handle.
e. Connect the control cable to the shelf
and store cable slack inside the FLEXiS
System.
Figure 8.7 - Data Pass-Through Location
31
S
8.3
Handle-to-MFR Bracket Installation

1
4
Figure 8.8 - Handle Assembly
1
2
3
4
Shelf Clamps
M6 Clamp Screws
Clamp Nuts
M10 Mounting Screws
1. Remove the handle to MFR bracket and handle from the packaging. The handle with bracket
should include all the parts seen in Figure 8.8. The clamps may be disassembled.
2. If the bracket comes with clamps attached skip to Step 5, otherwise assemble the clamps.
a. Combine the clamp pieces as shown in Figure 8.8 (Item 1). Use the M8 clamp screws (Item 2)
and clamp nut (Item 3) to loosely combine the clamps.
b. Assemble the M10 mounting screws (Item 4) through the clamps into the handle. Do not
tighten completely
3. Loosen the mounting screws (Item 4).
4. Loosen the clamp screws (Item 2) as much as possible without disassembly.
5. Slide each clamp assembly apart and position the bracket on the MFRs of the FLEXiS System.
The clamps should be able to open enough to directly install the bracket to the desired location.
6. Use a level to ensure the shelf is level.
7. Fully tighten the clamp screws (Item 2).
8. Fully tighten the mounting screws (Item 4).
9. Connect the control cable from the FLEXiS System to the connector on the bracket.
32
S
1

access panel (Figure 8.9, Item 1) on the
front or back of the FLEXiS System by
removing the eight Phillips screws (Item
2).
Figure 8.10 - Primary Control Cable
b. Locate the control cable connector inside the FLEXiS System. If this handle is
the main control interface of the boom
use the primary (larger [Figure 8.10])
connector. If this handle is an addition
to a shelf control use the extra cord
provided with the handle and connect
to the secondary (smaller [Figure 8.11])
control cable inside the FLEXiS System.
Figure 8.11 - Secondary Control Cable
33
S
c. Pass the control cable through the data
pass-through (Figure 8.12) on the same
side as the handle.
d. Connect the control cable to the bracket
and store cable slack inside the FLEXiS
System.
Figure 8.12 - Data Pass-Through Location
8.4
Handle to FLEXiS Bracket Installation

2
1
Figure 8.13 - Handle to FLEXiS Bracket

1
2
Handle and Bracket

M3 Mounting Screws
34
1. Remove the handle to chassis bracket

from the packaging. The handle with
bracket should include the parts seen in
Figure 8.13.
2. Position the handle and bracket under the
FLEXiS System (Figure 8.13, Item 1) chassis in the desired location.
3. Install the M3 mounting screws (Item 2)
into the bottom plate of the FLEXiS System.
4. Connect the control cable from inside
FLEXiS System to the additional cable
included with the bracket.
S
1

access panel (Figure 8.14, Item 1) on the
front or back of the FLEXiS System by
removing the eight Phillips screws (Item
2).

b. Locate the control cable (Figure 8.15)
connector inside the FLEXiS System.
Figure 8.15 - Secondary Control Cable

c. Remove the strain relief plug from the
bottom of the FLEXiS System (Figure
8.16).
Figure 8.16 - Strain Relief Plug Location

d. Pass the small end of the cable provided
with the handle through the strain relief
and into the FLEXiS System.
e. Connect the cable to the secondary control cable inside the FLEXiS System.
f. Connect the cable to the D-sub connector on the bracket.
Figure 8.17 - Strain Relief Plug

35
S
Caution
It is imperative to ensure there is an appropriate amount of cable prior

to installation of strain relief plug, as attempting to remove the strain
relief plug could cause damage to the plug and/or cables.
g. Ensure there is enough slack to reach the desired location of the installed handle or shelf with
handle. Install the strain relief plug around the cable and into the bottom of the FLEXiS System.
8.5
Re-sizing an Adjustable Shelf
The Adjustable Shelf can be adjusted from 15 to 26 (380mm to 660mm), and has a carrying capacity
of 75 lbs (35 kg).
Caution
Do not exceed the maximum carrying capacity for the adjustable shelf of
75 lbs. (35 kg).
1. Loosen the four M3 screws on the bottom of the adjustable shelf.
Figure 8.18 - M3 Screw Locations

2. Slide both sides of the adjustable shelf out to the desired width.
Figure 8.19 - Expanded Shelf Width

3. Fully retighten the four M3 screws on the bottom of the shelf.
36
S
Caution
Ensure the equipment placed on adjustable shelves is installed in such a

way all four corners of the equipment are supported by shelf material (i.e.
do not leave any edge of the equipment unsupported).
8.6 Controls
The controls for the up and down movement (articulating booms only) and boom brakes are located
on the front of the handle.
Brake Button
Up Button
Brake Button
Down Button
Figure 8.20 - Control Panel

Note
The figure above is representative of a FLEXiS control panel containing all available options. Actual buttons and graphics are dependent upon boom type and
configuration, and may not be available on all systems.
37
S
9. Operating the Boom System
9.1
Positioning the Boom System

Caution
9.1.1
Adjust the boom position cautiously, ensuring the stops and obstacles are
approached slowly to avoid damage to the boom.
Adjusting Horizontal Position
Perform the following steps to adjust the horizontal boom position:

1. Press and hold the brake release button(s), to allow the boom to move freely. A hissing sound
can be heard as the brakes are released.
Caution
Failure to release the brakes before moving the boom may result in damage
to the pneumatic brake system.
Brake Button
Brake Button
Figure 9.1 - Brake Buttons

Note
The number of brake buttons available will be dependent upon boom type. Some
booms may only need one brake button. The button on the left rotates the upper
arm, while the one on the right rotates the lower arm, as depicted in the diagram.
2. While holding the brake release button(s), move the boom with both hands.
3. When the boom is in position, release the button(s) to hold it into position.
Note
9.1.2
Brakes can be released individually by pressing a single button or by simultaneously pressing both buttons to help achieve the desired motion (see Figure 9.1).
Adjusting Vertical Position (Articulating Boom Only)
WARNING Never position the boom above a patient.
Caution
Before adjusting the booms vertical position, ensure that there are no objects in the booms path.
To adjust the height of an articulating boom, press and hold the UP button to raise the FLEXiS System,
press the DOWN button to lower it, and release the button to stop movement.
38
S
Up Button
Down Button
Figure 9.2 - Up and Down Buttons
39
S
10. Adjusting the Boom System
10.1 Adjusting the Mechanical Limits
The range of motion (vertical and horizontal) can be adjusted to prevent interference with obstacles,
such as walls and other equipment, by adjusting the position of mechanical stops. The mechanical
stops were set by Stryker during installation. If further adjustment is necessary, contact your Stryker
representative.
10.2 Adjusting the FLEXiS System Brake (OSC400 Only)

FLEXiS Systems without pneumatic brake systems have adjustable friction brakes, which prevent undesired drift. These brakes were adjusted by Stryker during installation, but brake readjustment may be
necessary due to brake wear or significant load changes that cause the boom to drift.
To adjust a brake:
1. Remove the collar around the bottom of
the drop tube, located directly above the
FLEXiS System by pressing in the tabs located on either side of the collar with a flat
instrument, such as a flathead screwdriver.
Figure 10.1 - Tab Location

2. Locate the flathead screw on the drop tube
and turn it clockwise increase brake friction, or turn it counter-clockwise decrease
brake friction.
3. If the boom continues to drift, tighten the
brakes further. If it becomes hard to move
the boom after tightening the brakes, loosen them a little until movement becomes
easier, but the boom doesnt drift.
Brake Screw
Figure 10.2 - Brake Screw Location
4. Replace the collar by securing the two halves together around the drop tube. Ensure that the
deeper lip is on the top to keep dust and other matter from entering the unit.
40
S
11. Cleaning and Disinfecting
Wipe the surfaces with a damp cloth, and if required, a mild cleaning solution.
WARNING This equipment is not intended to be sterilizable, and as such should not be
allowed to enter the sterile field.
WARNING Do not allow moisture to enter electrical outlets via spray or using a damp
cloth.
WARNING Make sure that no fluid enters the system during cleaning.
Caution
To avoid damage to plastic parts, do not use any scouring, alkaline, acidic,
or alcohol-based cleaning agents.
Caution
Do not use bleach on stainless steel parts.
Note
Cleaning and disinfecting must be performed by trained personnel. Follow the

requirements of the national committee responsible for hygiene and disinfection.
41
S
12. Troubleshooting
FLEXiS System does not rotate
Possible Cause
Solution
Excessive brake friction
Loosen the two brake screws on the sides of the drop tube,
(OSC400 only)
located immediately above the FLEXiS System.
Wrong brake release button being
Make sure the correct button is being pressed.
pressed
Arms will not move
Possible Cause
Brakes engaged
Solution
Check to make sure that brake buttons are depressed.
Mechanical limits are adjusted incorrectly
Contact a Stryker service representative to have the limits

checked.
Boom is drifting
Possible Cause
Brakes need adjustment
Brakes are not functioning
Solution
Check brakes from the top of the boom down.
Make sure that pneumatic brakes are 70 psi (5 bar) of air pressure.
FLEXiS System will not articulate up or down (MMP200 Only)

Possible Cause
Solution
Obstacle in path of the FLEXiS
Remove obstacle.
System
Maximum load capacity may be
Check load rating and remove equipment or accessories as
exceeded
necessary.
Hospital power is turned off

Hospital breaker is tripped
Damaged or stuck button on handle
Internal damage
E-stop may be engaged.
Check the articulation range against the technical specifications. If FLEXiS System does not move correctly, contact
Stryker Technical Support
Switch on power.
Reset breaker.
Contact Stryker Technical Support.
Pull out E-stop button.
42
S
FLEXiS System or Boom Arms will not rotate
Possible Cause
Solution
Brakes are engaged
Check to ensure the correct brake button(s) are depressed.
Obstacle in path of FLEXiS System
Remove obstacle.
FLEXiS System is rotated to the
Check the range of motion against the technical specificaphysical stops.
tions. If FLEXiS System does not move as intended, contact
Stryker Technical Support.
Damaged or stuck button on handle Contact Stryker Technical Support.
Internal damage
Brakes are adjusted too tight
Adjust according to Section 10.2, contact Stryker Technical
(OSC400 only)
Support.
Unable to stop FLEXiS System or Arm rotation
Possible Cause
Solution
Damaged or stuck button on handle Contact Stryker Technical Support.
Maximum load capacity may be
exceeded
necessary.
Low or no air pressure to system
Ensure the brake regulator to the FLEXiS System is set to at
least 80 psi.
Internal damage
Brakes required adjustment
Adjust brake friction according to Section 10.2, contact
(OSC400 only)
Stryker Technical Support.
No power to FLEXiS System electrical outlets
Possible Cause
Solution
Hospital power is turned off.
Switch on power.
Hospital breaker is tripped.
Reset breaker. Check that equipment does not overload circuit.
Damaged power outlet
Internal damage
Medical gas pressure too low
Possible Cause
Solution
Medical gas supply line closed
Check gas supply line valves.
Medical gas compressor malfunction Check gas compressor.
Medical gas supply line set to incor- Check gas supply line regulators.
rect pressure
Loose or damaged gas hose connec- Check gas hose connections and external accessories.
tion
Damaged gas outlet
Internal damage
43
S
Shelf is leaning
Possible Cause
Clamp screws are not tightened
Shelf max load capacity exceeded
Solution
Tighten bolts according to Section 8.2
necessary.
Shelf clamps are installed incorrectly Loosen shelf clamps and reattach according to Section 8.2.
Damaged shelf or clamps
Unable to adjust shelf supports
Adjustable shelf screws are tightened Loosen screws and adjust the supports, retighten screws after
adjustment.
Adjustable shelf screws are missing Reinstall screws into shelf supports through the bottom of the
shelf; contact Stryker Technical Support.
Damaged shelf
Note
If any of these issues cannot be resolved, please contact Technical Support or

your Stryker representative.
44
S
13. Technical Specifications
13.1 Environmental Specifications
13.1.1
Operating/Storage Conditions
Operating Humidity:
Operating Temperature
Operating Pressure
13.1.2
30%-75%
50-104 F (10-40 C)
500 to 1060hPa
Shipping Conditions
Shipping Humidity
Shipping Temperature
Shipping Pressure
10%-95%
-40-140 F (-40-60 C)
500 to 1060hPa
13.2 Electrical Specifications

Rated Input
(Branch Circuit Ratings)
Rated Output
(Branch Circuit Ratings)
Motor Ratings
U.S./CAN
30A max / 230V / 60Hz*
30A / 120V/ 60Hz
20A / 230V / 60Hz
20A / 120V / 60Hz**
15A / 230V / 60Hz
15A/120V/60Hz
International
16A / 230V / 50Hz
20A / 230V / 50Hz*
U.S./CAN
30A max / 230V / 60Hz*
30A / 120V/ 60Hz
20A / 230V / 60Hz
20A / 120V / 60Hz**
15A / 230V / 60Hz
15A/120V/60Hz
International
16A max / 230V / 50Hz
20A max / 230V / 50Hz*
230V/450W/50Hz
120V/500W/60Hz
* Maximum rating
** Typical U.S./CAN rating
45
S
Caution
The height adjustment in the motor arm is not suitable for continuous use.
Do not exceed the maximum operating time of 3 minutes. Allow to rest for
30 minutes after using for a maximum of 3 minutes.
13.3 Mechanical Specifications

Maximum Horizontal Reach
Articulating Boom: 80 inches (2030mm)
Non-Articulating: 96 inches (2440mm)

Standard Braking System
Combination pneumatic and friction
Gas Service
Configurable
Electrical Service
Configurable
Rotation (top arm)
330
Rotation (FLEXiS System)
340
Vertical Articulation (for articulating booms 23 up, 23 down
only)
Lifting Speed (for articulating booms only)
0.9 inches (23 mm) per second
Shelf Carrying Capacity*
750mm Shelf: 75 lbs (35 kg)
Adjustable Shelf Carrying Capacity*
Drawer Carrying Capacity
Keyboard Support Capacity
Accessory Rail Carrying Capacity*
Dual Drawer Carrying Capacity
* See Section 4 for details
46
450mm Shelf: 75 lbs (35 kg)

75 lbs (35 kg)
22 lbs (10 kg)
Standard Keyboard
37 lbs (17.5 kg)
22 lbs (10kg)
S
13.3.1
Boom Arm Carrying Capacities

Arm Set
MMP200
OSC400
OSC600
1st Arm
Length
31.5 (800mm)
39.4 (1000mm)
23.6 (600mm)
31.5 (800mm)
39.4 (1000mm)
47.2 (1200mm)
23.6 (600mm)
23.6 (600mm)
23.6 (600mm)
23.6 (600mm)
31.5 (800mm)
31.5 (800mm)
31.5 (800mm)
31.5 (800mm)
39.4 (1000mm)
39.4 (1000mm)
39.4 (1000mm)
39.4 (1000mm)
47.2 (1200mm)
47.2 (1200mm)
47.2 (1200mm)
47.2 (1200mm)
23.6 (600mm)
23.6 (600mm)
23.6 (600mm)
23.6 (600mm)
31.5 (800mm)
31.5 (800mm)
31.5 (800mm)
31.5 (800mm)
39.4 (1000mm)
39.4 (1000mm)
39.4 (1000mm)
39.4 (1000mm)
47.2 (1200mm)
47.2 (1200mm)
47.2 (1200mm)
47.2 (1200mm)
2nd Arm
Length
39.4 (1000mm)
39.4 (1000mm)
----23.6 (600mm)
31.5 (800mm)
39.4 (1000mm)
47.2 (1200mm)
23.6 (600mm)
31.5 (800mm)
39.4 (1000mm)
47.2 (1200mm)
23.6 (600mm)
31.5 (800mm)
39.4 (1000mm)
47.2 (1200mm)
23.6 (600mm)
31.5 (800mm)
39.4 (1000mm)
47.2 (1200mm)
-23.6 (600mm)
31.5 (800mm)
39.4 (1000mm)
-31.5 (800mm)
39.4 (1000mm)
47.2 (1200mm)
-23.6 (600mm)
31.5 (800mm)
39.4 (1000mm)
-31.5 (800mm)
39.4 (1000mm)
47.2 (1200mm)
Arm Load
capacity
330 lbs (150 kg)
330 lbs (150 kg)
1279 lbs (580 kg)
926 lbs (420 kg)
705 lbs (320 kg)
573 lbs (260 kg)
584 lbs (265 kg)
485 lbs (220 kg)
397 lbs (180 kg)
344 lbs (156 kg)
478 lbs (217 kg)
397 lbs (180 kg)
331 lbs (150 kg)
287 lbs (130 kg)
397 lbs (180 kg)
331 lbs (150 kg)
287 lbs (130 kg)
243 lbs (110 kg)
331 lbs (150 kg)
276 lbs (125 kg)
243 lbs (110 kg)
198 lbs (90 kg)
2125 lbs (964 kg)
988 lbs (448 kg)
818 lbs (371 kg)
690 lbs (313 kg)
1545 lbs (701 kg)
681 lbs (309 kg)
580 lbs (263 kg)
498 lbs (226 kg)
1215 lbs (551 kg)
690 lbs (313 kg)
580 lbs (263 kg)
492 lbs (223 kg)
955 lbs (433 kg)
485 lbs (220 kg)
417 lbs (189 kg)
360 lbs (163 kg)
47
S
Maximum load capacities will vary depending on the type of boom installed. See Section 4 to understand the load capacity for your boom.
13.3.2
Gas Hose Pressure Specifications
U.S. Specifications
Gas Service
Medical Air
Carbon Dioxide
Nitrous Oxide
Oxygen
Heliox (He/O2 and O2/He)
Nitrogen
Instrument Air
Medical - Surgical Vacuum
Waste Anesthetic Gas Disposal (WAGD)
Standard Gauge Pressure
345-350 kPa (50-55 psi)
1100-1275kPa (160-185 psi)

380mm to 760mm
(15 in. to 30 in.) HgV
380mm to 760mm
(15 in. to 30 in.) HgV
May vary with system
International Specifications
Gas Service
Compressed medical gases other than air or
nitrogen for driving surgical tools
Air or nitrogen for driving surgical tools
Vacuum
AGSS

Standard Gauge Pressure

400 +100
kPa
0
a
800 +200
kPa
-100
60b
Pressure as required for flow
specified in EN ISO 7396-2
Regional or national regulations/standards can require a different range.

Absolute pressure.
a/
b/
13.3.2.1
Gas Hose Testing
International Only - Prior to use of the equipment after installation, repair, or replacement of medical
gas hoses or outlets the following tests must be performed by properly trained personnel.
For medical gas supply systems perform the following tests according to EN 737-3:
Test for leakage
Test for obstruction
Test for particulate contamination
Test of gas identity
For anesthetic gas scavenging systems perform the following tests according to EN 737-2
48
S
Test for leakage
Test of flow and pressure drop
US Only - Prior to use of the equipment after installation, repair, or replacement of medical gas hoses
or outlets the gas system must be verified as required by NFPA 99. Verification tests shall be conducted
by a party technically competent and experienced in the field of medical gas and vacuum pipeline testing and meeting the requirements of ASSE 6030, Professional Qualifications Standard for Medical Gas
Systems Verifiers.
13.3.2.2
International Flow and Pressure Drop Characteristics
Maximum pressure drop of 25kPa with a flow rate of 60 l/min and a test pressure of 320 kPa.
13.4 Materials Policy

Stryker Communications guarantees that all equipment including accessories, packaging material,
labels, pouches, or other similar items do not contain latex, DEHP, BBP, DBP, or BPA.
13.5 Smoke Rating

Decorative parts with area less than 10 sq. ft. were tested for Flame Spread and Smoke Developed. The
material has a flame spread rating of 200 or less and, unless otherwise marked, a smoke developed rating of 200 or less.
Potentially applicable smoke ratings are as follows:
Romira Romiloy ABS/PC8170 - Smoke Index over 500 and Calculated to be 996.5
Romira Romiloy ABS/ PC 9170 - Smoke Index over 500 and Calculated to be 897.8
GE Cycoloy C6200 GY9A077 Smoke Index over 500 and Calculated to be 803.3
49
S
14. Maintenance
Note
Tests and maintenance must be performed by qualified personnel.
Use the following table as a guide for inspection:

Hospital Personnel Responsibility
Every 6 months
Visually inspect paint for damage
Cracks on plastic parts
Deformation of the system
Loose Parts
Maintenance Performed by Stryker

Every Other Year*
Connections and markings
Anesthetic gas conduction systems
Check gas hoses for cracks, leaks, or
other damage
Check gas hose manufacture test date.
Replace the hose after 10 years from the
test date.
Pneumatic brake function
Properly tighten brake screws
(OSC400 only)
* Please contact Stryker Technical Support or your Stryker Representative to schedule your preventative maintenance service.
Contact Stryker Communications in case of:
Faults
Damage
Service Needs
Caution
Use only Stryker original parts. Use of non-Stryker parts will void warranty.
14.1 Replacing a Fuse

This section only applies to articulating booms equipped with an Emergency Stop.
To change a fuse:
1. Open the fuse holder by turning the top cover with a flat head screw driver.
2. Once the cover is open, remove the old fuse and replace it with a new one.
3. Close the cover and turn it back to the locked position with a flat head screw driver.
Note
Use only Bussman, MDQ Series, 10A, 250V fuses.
Expected life is defined as the time that a device is expected to remain safe and functional after it is
placed into use. The expected life of the FLEXiS Boom System is 7 years from the date of product
installation. Additionally, the expected life of any accessory sold by Stryker for use with the FLEXiS
Boom System is seven years from the installation date of the Boom System. Within this time period,
Stryker will support the product by offering repair or replacement in accordance with the warranty or
at customer expense, as applicable.
50
S
15. Disposal of the Product
The device must be disposed of according to local laws and hospital practices.
Local regulations may include specifications regarding the disposal of this product. We request that
you contact Stryker when you plan to withdraw this device from service with the intention of discarding it.
15.1 Metals and Plastics

When disposing of a product or replacing any of its parts, check the recyclability of each item. When
recycling plastic parts, determine the material type. For more information about recycling, contact
your local waste management facility or visit related sites on the internet. Below are recycling symbols,
which are marked on parts made of plastic. Products marked with these symbols can be used as energy
waste.
51
S
16. Stryker Limited Warranty
This warranty applies to customers in the United States only. Outside of the USA, contact your Stryker
sales representative or your local Stryker subsidiary.
Stryker warrants that its products shall be free of defects of material and workmanship for a period of
two years after date of installation. Stryker will provide all parts and service required to restore equipment under warranty to good working condition, which may include shipment of replacement parts
and phone service consultation to conduct minor repairs.
Any modifications to this warranty policy are not valid unless made with explicit written approval of
Stryker.
This warranty covers all Stryker products with the exception of bulbs, sterilizable handles, filters and
any other disposable parts.
This warranty does not cover any cosmetic or superficial damage to product. Any modification to
product by Customer without the approval of Stryker will immediately void this warranty in its entirety.
This warranty covers only Stryker products and only such products that were installed and/or maintained by Stryker authorized personnel.
This warranty is valid only to the original purchaser of Stryker products directly from a Stryker authorized agent. The warranty cannot be transferred or assigned by the original purchaser.
52
S
17. Damage Claims
Shipping is FOB Origin. Title transfers to customer upon shipment. Stryker assumes responsibility for
loss or damage during shipping. Please contact Technical Support (866) 841-5663 for inside the U.S.,
(972) 410-7100 for international, or your Stryker representative if your shipment is lost or damaged.
If you need to return any item, contact Customer Service for an RMA number. After receiving an RMA
number, package the item as described by Customer Service. Ship the item to the following address:
(RMA#_____)
1410 Lakeside Parkway #100
Toll Free (inside the U.S): (877) 789-8106
International: (972) 410-7100
53
S
18. Contact Information
Contact Stryker Customer Service with questions or concerns.
1410 Lakeside Parkway #100
Flower, Mound, TX 75028
Toll Free: (877) 789-7100
1-972-410-7100
For international service locations, refer to the Stryker website at the following URL:
www.stryker.com.
54
1410 Lakeside Pkwy.,
t: 972.410.7100
www.stryker.com
Revision Descriptions.
By
Section A - Equipment Plan
Date
General Notes -------------------------------------------- AN

Equipment Legend --------------------------------------- AL
Equipment Plan ------------------------------------------- A1
Equipment Details ----------------------------- AD1 - AD3
Email:
Date Drawn: 7/15/2011

Quote: None
Order: None
Drawn By:
Contact Number:
Support Plan - Ceiling ----------------------------------- S2
N-SRD110004
Support Plan - Floor & Wall ---------------------------- S1
Project Manager:
Support Legend ------------------------------------------- SL
Philips Contacts
Support Notes --------------------------------------------- SN
Project Details
Section S - Support Plan
Drawing Number
Transport Details --------------------------------------- AD4
Support Details --------------------------------- SD1 - SD3
Section E - Electrical Plan

Electrical Notes ------------------------------------------- EN
Electrical Legend ----------------------------------------- EL
Electrical Plan ---------------------------------------------- E1
Raceway & Conduit Information ----------------- E2-E3
Electrical Details -------------------------------- ED1 - ED3
Remote Service Network ------------------------------- N1
Check List ----------------------------------------------- CHK
THIS SHEET IS PART OF THE DOCUMENT SET LISTED ON SHEET C1 AND SHOULD NOT BE SEPARATED.
C1
7.12.11
THE INFORMATION IN THIS PACKAGE IS PROVIDED AS A CUSTOMER CONVENIENCE, AND IS NOT TO BE CONSTRUED AS ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS OR CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS.
Philips assumes no liability nor offers any warranty for the fitness or adequacy of the premises or the utilities available at the premises in which the equipment is to be installed, used, or stored.
Rev.
Not Site Specific
Table of Contents
Allura FD20 Flexmove
Revision History
Note for Architects and/or Contractors: If revisions are listed, these drawings must be thoroughly reviewed so that all changes can be incorporated into your project.
Project
www.healthcare.philips.com
Standard Reference Drawing
Healthcare
Heating, ventilation, air conditioning requirement for general equipment locations must
1. Walls to be painted or covered, baseboards installed, floors to be tiled and/or covered, ceiling
shall have grid tiles and lighting fixtures installed and operational.
Equipment's designed airflow is from bottom to top and front to back. Please design the air
handling in the rack cabinet equipment area accordingly.
3. All electrical convenience, conduit, raceway, knockouts, cable openings, chase nipples, and
junction boxes installed and operational.
Power Output:
7.
All contractor supplied cables pulled and terminated.
8.
A dust-free environment in and around the procedure room.
480 VAC, 60 Hz
225 KVA
3 pole, 125 Amps

(10.0)
10. Architectural features such as computer floor, wood floor, casework, bulkheads, installed and
finished. When technical cabinets are installed in a closet with doors, it is suggested that the
customer install a temperature alarm in the event of an air conditional failure.
13. Clear door openings for moving equipment into the building must be 42" (1067mm) W x 82"
(2083mm) H min. 48" (1219mm) W x 82" (2083mm) H rec., Or larger contingent on an 8'-0"
(2438mm) corridor width.
Remote Control of Room Lighting

The control of customer lighting must incorporate an electrical isolation system such as
demonstrated on Sheet ED2. Lighting scheme is the responsibility of the customer.
(08.1)
14. Countertop is 30" for seated height and 36" for standing height.
Drawn By:
Remote Service Diagnostics

Medical imaging equipment to be installed by Philips Medical is equipped with a service diagnostic
feature which allows for remote and on site service diagnostics. To establish this feature, a RJ45
type ethernet 10/100/1000 Mbit network connector must be installed as shown on plan. Access to
customer's network via their remote access server is needed for Remote Service Network (RSN)
connectivity. All cost with this feature are the responsibility of the customer.
Email:
Note
Once Philips has moved equipment into the suite and started the installation, the contractor shall
schedule his work around the Philips installation team on site. It is suggested that a telephone be
provided in the room to receive telephone calls. This would alleviate facility staff from answering
calls for Philips personnel.
Contact Number:
(00.0)
Nominal Line Voltage:
Project Manager:
7. Extended Installation or Turnkey Work by Philips

Any room preparation requirements for Philips equipment indicated on these drawings is the
responsibility of the customer. If an extended installation or turnkey contract exists between
Philips and the customer for room preparation work required by the equipment represented on
these drawings, some of the responsibilities of the customer as depicted in these drawings may
be assumed by Philips. In the event of a conflict between the work described in the turnkey
contract workscope and these drawings, the turnkey contract workscope shall govern.
3 phase, 3 wire power and ground, delta or wye

3 phase, 4 wire power with neutral + ground, wye
Circuit Breaker:
9. All HVAC (heating, ventilating and air conditioning) installed and operational as per
specifications.
12. Philips does not install or connect developing tanks, automatic processors or associated
equipment, built in illuminators, cassette pass boxes, loading benches and cabinets, lead protective
screens, panels or lead glass window and frame. This is to be done by the customer/contractor.
6. Schedule
The general contractor should provide Philips with a schedule of work to assist in the
coordination of delivery of Philips supplied products which are to be installed by the contractor
and delivery of the primary equipment.
Supply Configuration:
Branch Power Requirement:
11. All plumbing installed and finished.
5. Labor
In the event local labor conditions make it impossible or undesirable to use Philips' regular
employees for such installation and connection, such work shall be performed by laborers
supplied by the customer, or by an independent contractor chosen by the customer at the
customer's expense, and in such case, Philips agrees to furnish adequate engineering
supervision for proper completion of the installation.
100KW
115v convenience outlets operational.

Quote: None
Order: None
N-SRD110004
(03.0)
AN
7.12.11
5.
Not Site Specific
Incoming mains power operational and connected to room x-ray breaker.
4.
Electrical Requirements
Velara with PDU 4000
Philips Contacts
4. Asbestos and Other Toxic Substances

Philips assumes no hazardous waste (i.e., PCB's in existing transformers) exists at the site. If
any hazardous material is found, it shall be the sole responsibility of the customer to properly
remove and dispose of this material at its expense. Any delays caused in the project for this
special handling shall result in Philips time period for completion being extended by like period
of time. Philips assumes that no asbestos material is involved in this project in any ceilings,
walls or floors. If any asbestos material is found anywhere on the site, it shall be the customer's
sole responsibility to properly remove and/or make safe this condition, at the customer's sole
expense.
(10.0)
2. Doors and windows, especially radiation protection barriers, installed and finished with locksets
operational.
6. All support structure correctly installed. All channels, pipes, beams and/or other supporting
devices should be level, parallel, and free of lateral or longitudinal movements.
3. Radiation Protection
The customer or his contractor, at his own expense, shall obtain the service of a licensed
radiation physicist to specify radiation protection. (X-Ray Tube output 150 KVp max.)
relative humidity at 20% - 80% with 10% max. variation.
Drawing Number
2. Permits
Customer shall obtain all permits and licenses required by federal, state/provincial or local
authorities in connection with the construction, installation and operation of the products and
related rules, regulations, shall bear any expense in obtaining same or in complying with any
ordinances and statutes.
A smooth efficient installation is vital to Philips and their customers. Understanding what the
minimum site preparation requirements are will help achieve this goal. The following list clearly
defines the requirements which must be fulfilled before the installation can begin.
Project Details
1. Responsibility
The customer shall be solely responsible, at its expense for preparation of site, including any
required structural alterations. The site preparation shall be in accordance with plans and
specifications provided by Philips. Compliance with all safety electrical and building codes
relevant to the equipment and its installation is the sole responsibility of customer. The
customer shall advise Philips of conditions at or near the site which could adversely affect the
carrying out of the installation work and shall ensure that such conditions are corrected and that
the site is fully prepared and available to Philips before the installation work is due to begin. The
customer shall provide all necessary plumbing, carpentry work, or conduit wiring required to
attach and install products ready for use.
HVAC Requirement for General Equipment Locations
Minimum Site Preparation Requirements
Project
General Specifications
Equipment Legend
A
Furnished and installed by Philips
Furnished by customer/contractor and installed by customer/contractor
C Installed by customer/contractor
D Furnished by Philips and installed by contractor
E
Existing
Future
G Optional item furnished by Philips
Velara Generator 40E Cabinet
510
2971 AD2
MP
Peripherial 40E Cabinet
510
2049 AD2
PBK
PDU 4000/UPS
860
2450 AD2
MA
Mains 40E Cabinet
826
5464 AD2
CY
Viewing/Control
126
567 AD2
DB
Documentation Box - Mounted on Wheels

(Final location to be coordinated with customer
and/or local Philips Service.)
176
- AD3
ATY
Exam Room Auxiliary Box
1.7 AD3
IH
Interventional Hardware
73
2424 AD3
PSU
Stationary Transfomer Unit
30
- AD3
XPD
Xper Pedestal
- AD3
Philips Contacts
Project Manager:
Project Details
Drawing Number
MG
Project
Drawn By:
- AD1
AL
7.12.11
1053
Not Site Specific
1195 AD1
A MQT Maquet Table
3880
Email:
Clea Stand Flexmove

Quote: None
Order: None
SP
Weight Heat Load

(lbs)
(btu/hr)
Contact Number:
Description
Detail Sheet
N-SRD110004
Equipment Designation
30'-0"
Maquet Table Floorplate
Centerline
6'-0"
Equipment closet doors to

be hung from ceiling mounted
track, no floor tracks allowed
MG
11'-0"
3rd Party Monitor Arm

with Philips Monitors
MP
MA
2'
.5m
4'
1m
XPD
8'
Project
1'
2m
(3100mm, +10mm / -0)

0
Not Site Specific
ATY
Required Ceiling Height : 10' - 2", +3/8 / -0
Equipment Layout
PSU
23'-4"

Centerline
MQT
SP
Project Manager:
Contact Number:
Email:
N-SRD110004

Quote: None
Order: None
31.50"
[800mm]
Connection
Box
Connection Box wall

mounted under counter
(Preferred)
Wall Raceway
31.50"
[800mm]
Drawn By:
Philips Contacts
Project Details
CY
Connection Box on
top of counter
underneath viewing
monitors (Option)
21.65"
[550mm]
4.88"
[124mm]
IH
Drawing Number
Not Site Specific

See SD3 Sheet for details
Customer's Physio
(PHY)
Coordinate final
location with
customer
7'-0"
Connection Box (CY) Mounting Options
3'-0"
Exact location to be coordinated by

Customer and local Philips service.
Recommended
Minimum
2'-8"
3rd Party Monitor Arm

with Philips Monitors
General Notes
* Counters and cabinetry shown to be supplied and installed by customer.
A1
7.12.11
11'-8"
11'-6"
PBK
.33"
[8mm]
41.93"
[1065mm]
122"
[3100mm]
Centerline of
Floorplate
SP
Heat Dissipation
Weight
Clea Stand Flexmove
1195 Btu/hr
3880 lbs
(301 kcal/hr)
(1760 kg)
MQT
11.42"
[290mm]
(07.0)
Weight
1053 lbs
(475 kg)
Heat Dissipation
- Btu/hr
(- kcal/hr)
Indicates equipment movement
Top
AD1
7.12.11
Not Site Specific
Project
168.75"
[4286mm]
Drawn By:
Email:
Maquet Table

Quote: None
Order: None
(11.0)
Contact Number:
Side
N-SRD110004
Front
Project Manager:
82.68"
[2100mm]
Philips Contacts
11.42"
[290mm]
Project Details
251.73"
[6394mm]
Drawing Number
18
Required Ceiling Height
168.75"
[4286mm]
+10/-0
122"
[3100mm]
145.20"
[3688mm]
173.21"
[4400mm]
Centerline
Table Pivot
6.85"
[174mm]
38.84"
[987mm]
57.68"
[1465mm]
CRC Cover
Front
Side
Front
Side
1/2" / 3/4"
dia. knockout
plug (4x)
Back
Side
826 lbs
Heat Dissipation
(375 kg)
5464 Btu/hr
(1377 kcal/hr)
PDU 4000/UPS
Weight
860 lbs
Heat Dissipation
(391 kg)
2450 Btu/hr
(617kcal/hr)
20.48"
[520mm]
Connection Box
(See SD3 for mounting options)
20.48"
[520mm]
6.00"
[152mm]
CRC Cover
CRC Cover
Front
2.39"
[61mm]
Front
Side
Keyboard
Front
Side
Mouse
Side
Weight
Heat Dissipation
Viewing/Control (All Components)
Acoustic noise level: <= 65 dB(A) @ 1 meter in front of the

rack and 1 meter high. (1 meter = 3.28')

(08.0)
MP
126 lbs
567 Btu/hr
(57 kg)
(143 kcal/hr)
Side
The CRC cover must be attached to the 40E rack only, not
to the wall.
(08.0)
CY
Front
to the wall.
Weight
Heat Dissipation
Peripherial 40E Cabinet

510 lbs
2049 Btu/hr
(08.0)
MG
(232 kg)
(516 kcal/hr)
Weight
Heat Dissipation
Velara Generator 40E Cabinet

510 lbs
2971 Btu/hr
(232 kg)
(749 kcal/hr)

Quote: None
Order: None
19.29"
[490mm]
1.38"
[35mm]
Top
1.22"
[31mm]
Top
76.98"
[1955mm]
8.39"
[213mm]
5.85"
[149mm]
LCD Monitor
21.66"
[550mm]
6.00"
[152mm]
Contact Number:
21.66"
[550mm]
N-SRD110004
Side
Top
Project Manager:
Top
Philips Contacts
Front
Side
CRC Cover
Project
CRC Cover
31.50"
[800mm]
Drawn By:
4.88"
[124mm]
PBK
76.98"
[1955mm]
Front
Weight
21.65"
[550mm]
16.14"
[410mm]
Mains 40E Cabinet
Top
17.05"
[433mm]
7.79"
[198mm]
Top
MA
Review Module
(08.0)
(10.0)
Imaging cardio T.S.O
(Optional)

Not Site Specific
to the wall.
Front
2.00" dia.
knockout
plug (2x)
11.90"
[302mm]
Side
1.50" dia.
knockout
plug
Drawing Number
Front
5.99"
[152mm]
Project Details
10.24"
[260mm]
Top
3.14"
[80mm]
4.39"
[112mm]
9.84"
[250mm]
6.85"
[174mm]
Top
20.51"
[521mm]
21.62"
[549mm]
Side
Geometry T.S.O.
(Optional)
XPER Module
5.99"
[152mm]
10.83"
[275mm]
Top
6.00"
[152mm]
Email:
Front
Side
20.95"
[532mm]
AD2
7.12.11
10.24"
[260mm]
21.66"
[550mm]
76.98"
[1955mm]
Front
Top
2.97"
[75mm]
11.89"
[302mm]
4.38"
[111mm]
2.99"
[76mm]
Top
Top
36.00"
[914mm]
9.84"
[250mm]
CRC Cover
CRC Extension
16.02"
[407mm]
13.20"
[335mm]
21.67"
[550mm]
Top
Top
21.67"
[550mm]
13.18"
[335mm]
Front
45.85"
[1164mm]
48.05"
[1220mm]
44.11"
[1120mm]
44.10"
[1120mm]
20.55"
[522mm]
Front
Side
Side
(08.0)
(08.0)
Xper Pedestal
XPD
(0 kcal/hr)
Heat Dissipation
- Btu/hr
(- kcal/hr)
Side
Keyboard
Top
3.94"
[100mm]
Front
9.06"
[230mm]
Side
Mouse
Front
Side
Multiswitch
Weight shown is for all components.

Front
(08.0)
Side
(09.0)
PSU
Weight
Heat Dissipation
Weight
Stationary Transformer Unit

30 lbs
(13.6 kg)
- Btu/hr
(- kcal/hr)
IH
Heat Dissipation
Email:
Front

Quote: None
Order: None
7.65"
[194mm]
14.10"
[358mm]
2.36"
[60mm]
1.38"
[35mm]
1.37"
[35mm]
15.60"
[396mm]
Top
Side
CPU
Top
Top
13.80"
[351mm]
Front
Side
19" Flat Panel

Monitor
Contact Number:
Front
19.29"
[490mm]
N-SRD110004
(0.47 kcal/hr)
Project
20.31"
[516mm]
(3 kg)
1.7 Btu/hr
Project Manager:
Heat Dissipation
Philips Contacts
7 lbs
13.23"
[336mm]
6.69"
[170mm]
Weight
Drawing Number
Auxiliary Box
ATY
Project Details
16.73"
[425mm]
(08.0)
Top
2.09"
[53mm]
Top
6.93"
[176mm]
17.40"
[442mm]
Side
18.86"
[479mm]
Front
7.44"
[189mm]
7.28"
[185mm]
11.22"
[285mm]
Top
Interventional Hardware (Flat Monitor)

73 lbs
2,424 Btu/hr
0 Btu/hr
(3 kg)
(33 kg)
(611 kcal/hr)
Drawn By:
Heat Dissipation
7 lbs
Not Site Specific
(45 kg)
2.56"
[65mm]
176 lbs
Weight
Weight
AD3
7.12.11
Documentation Box
DB
Detail - Poly Clea Ceiling (C-ARM) Transport Details
89.15"
[2264mm]
56.90"
[1445mm]
89.53"
[2274mm]
89.54"
[2274mm]
98.41"
[2500mm]
Transport Possibilities
76.22" (1936mm)
69.02" (1753mm)
77.76" (1975mm)
Height
73.4" (1865mm)
Weight
2050 lb (930 kg)
1940 lb (880 kg)
2061 lb (935 kg)
1764 lb (800 kg)
Weight
948 lb (430 kg)
Klick Wheels Small
Klick Wheels Small Elevator
Height
57.09" (1450mm)
54.80" (1392mm)
49.25" (1251mm)
79.53" (2020mm)
49.25" (1251mm)
79.53" (2020mm)
Weight
2094 lb (950 kg)
1973 lb (895 kg)
1896 lb (860 kg)
1896 lb (860 kg)
1896 lb (860 kg)
1896 lb (860 kg)
Contact Number:
Klick Wheels Wide Elevator
N-SRD110004
Klick Wheels Wide
Project Manager:
Pallet
Philips Contacts
93.11"
[2365mm]
Transport Possibilities
Crate
Drawing Number
34.84"
[885mm]
Project Details
34.84"
[885mm]
93.11"
[2365mm]
117.73"
[2990mm]
117.72"
[2990mm]
61.73"
[1568mm]
114.88"
[2918mm]
61.73"
[1568mm]
35.45"
[900mm]
114.87"
[2918mm]
38.98"
[990mm]
Project
Detail - Poly Clea Ceiling (L-ARM) Transport Details
77.95" (1980mm)
Drawn By:
Height
Crate
Not Site Specific
Skateboards
Email:
Klick Wheels Wide

Quote: None
Order: None
Pallet
Details
Crate
98.43"
[2500mm]
37.78"
[960mm]
AD4
7.12.11
64.92"
[1649mm]
43.31"
[1100mm]
43.31"
[1100mm]
Detail - Flexmove Transport Details
Equipment Support Information

1. General
The customer shall be solely responsible, at its expense, for preparation of the site, including any required
structural alterations. The site preparation shall be in accordance with this plan and specifications, the
architectural/construction drawings and in compliance with all safety and building codes. The customer shall be
solely responsible for obtaining all construction permits from jurisdictional authority.
2. Equipment Anchorage
Philips provides, with this plan and specifications, information relative to equipment size, weight, shape,
anchoring hole locations and forces which may be exerted on anchoring fasteners. The customer shall be solely
responsible, through the engineer of record for the building, to provide on the architectural/construction drawings,
information regarding the approved method of equipment anchoring to floors, wall and/or ceiling of the building.
Any anchorage test required by local authority shall be the customer's responsibility. Stud type anchor bolts
should not be specified as they hinder equipment removal for service. Consult with Philips service prior to
specifying anchor methods.
d. Any drilling and/or tapping of holes required to attach Philips equipment to the structural support apparatus
shall be the responsibility of the customer.
e. Fasteners/anchors (i.e., bolts, spring nuts, lock and flat washers) and strip closures shall be provided by the
customer.
5. Lighting
Lighting fixtures shall be placed in such a position that they are not obscured by equipment or its movement, nor
shall they interfere with Philips ceiling rails and equipment movement or otherwise adversely affect the
equipment. Such lighting fixture locations shall be the sole responsibility of the customer.

Project Manager:
Drawing Number
c. The structural support apparatus surface to which Philips equipment is to be attached, shall have horizontal
10. Stiffness Requirements of Ceiling

stiffness: 10,000,000 Newton/meter - 57.1 klb/in
stiffness: 20,000,000 Newtonmeter/Rad - 177615 klbin/Rad
The maximum deflection on the Philips rails must not exceed 1mm (0.04") caused by the static load (weight) of
the ceiling stand.
Drawn By:
Email:
9. Safety Factors
In a worst case situation the dynamic bolt force of a floor or ceiling must be multiplied by factor 4. (static bolt
force of the ceiling must be multiplied by factor 8). All safety factors are included in the bearing force values in
sheet SD1.

Quote: None
Order: None
8. Floor Obstructions/ Floor Coverings

There shall be no obstructions on the floor (sliding door tracks, etc.) in front of the Philips technical cabinets.
Floor must be clear to allow cabinets to be pulled away from the wall for service.
Contractor to verify with Philips the preferred floor covering installation method.
Contact Number:
7. Seismic Anchorage (For Seismic Zones Only)

All seismic anchorage hardware, including brackets, backing plates, bolts, etc., shall be supplied and installed by
the customer/contractor unless otherwise specified within the support legend on this sheet. Installation of
electronic cabinets to meet seismic anchorage requirements must be accomplished using flush mounted
expansion type anchor/bolt systems to facilitate the removal of a cabinet for maintenance. Do not use threaded
rod/adhesive anchor systems. Consult with Philips regarding any anchor system issues.
N-SRD110004
6. Ceiling Obstructions
There shall be no obstructions that project below the finished ceiling in the area covered by ceiling suspended
equipment travel.
SN
7.12.11
Project
Philips Contacts
Project Details
b. Contractor to clearly mark Philips equipment longitudinal centerline on bottom of each structural support.
Not Site Specific
4. Ceiling Support Apparatus

a. Philips provides, with this plan and specifications, information relative to size, weight and shape of ceiling
supported equipment. The customer shall be solely responsible, through the engineer of record for the building,
to provide on the architectural/construction drawings, information regarding the approved method of structural
support apparatus, fasteners and anchorage to which Philips will attach equipment. Any anchorage and/or load
test required by local authority shall be the customer's responsibility.
3. Floor Loading and Surface

Philips provides, with this plan and specifications, information relative to size, weight and shape of floor mounted
equipment. The customer shall be solely responsible, through the engineer of record for the building, to provide
on the architectural/construction drawings confirmation of the structural adequacy of the floor upon which the
equipment will be placed. Any load test required by local authority, shall be the customer's responsibility.
The floor surface upon which Philips equipment is to be placed/anchored shall be flat and level to within plus or
minus 1/16 inch (2mm) over a length of 39" (1m).
Floor & Wall Support Legend

See S1 for Floor & Wall Support Layout.
Furnished and installed/anchored by Philips (exceptions may exist, see Note 2)
Furnished by customer/contractor and installed/anchored by customer/contractor
Installed/anchored by customer/contractor
D
E
Furnished by Philips and installed/anchored by contractor

Existing
F Future
G Optional
Item Number
Detail Sheet
F2
Support in wall for Control Room Connection Box (CY)
SD3
F2
Anchors in wall for Control Room Connection Box (CY)
SD3
Ceiling Support Legend

See S2 for Ceiling Support Layout.
A
Installed by customer/contractor
D
E
Furnished by Philips and installed by contractor

Existing
SD1
F Future
G Optional
Item Number
Drawn By:
Email:
Unistrut (P1001 or equal) - Mounted Below Finished Ceiling

Quote: None
Order: None
C2
Contact Number:
SD1
SD2
SD2
N-SRD110004
2 - Philips Clea Flexmove Rails
Project Manager:
C1
Philips Contacts
Project Details
Description
Drawing Number
Detail Sheet
SL
7.12.11
Not Site Specific
F1
Description
Project
Notes:
1. Anchors for items that are installed/anchored by customer/contractor shall be provided by
customer/contractor.
2. Anchors for items that are installed/anchored by Philips shall be provided by Philips. If
customer's engineering documents specify anchors other than those listed in this document,
the anchors shall be provided by customer/contractor and installed by Philips.
3. In all instances, the wall and/or floor support are the sole responsibility of the
customer/contractor. The customer's architect/engineer of record shall specify wall and/or floor
support sufficient for the bolt forces shown on the details.
A
B
F2
Refer to Floor/Wall Support Legend Sheet SL
(3100mm, +10mm / -0)
8'
S1
7.12.11
Not Site Specific
Drawn By:
Email:
5'-5"

Quote: None
Order: None
2m
Contact Number:
1m
N-SRD110004
.5m
4'
Project
2'
Project Manager:
0
1'
Philips Contacts
Drawing Number
Floor & Wall Support Layout
Project Details
F1
Centerline
11'-8"

Centerline
11'-0"
Ceiling Support Layout

0
1'
2'
.5m
4'
1m
97"
8
(3100mm, +10mm / -0)
8'
14'-07
8"
C1
7"
98
C2
Typ.
Refer to Ceiling Support Legend Sheet SL
S2
7.12.11
Not Site Specific
Drawn By:
Email:

Quote: None
Order: None
2m
Contact Number:
43"
8
N-SRD110004
2'-3"
Project
2'-3"
Project Manager:
2'-3"
Philips Contacts
2'-3"
Project Details
2'-3"
Drawing Number
2'-3"

Centerline
11'-8"
2'-3"
7'-0"
2'-3"
5'-11"
2'-3"
7'-0"
5'-63
8"
1"
22
2'-0"
2'-0"

Centerline
11'-0"
1"
22
C1
Detail - Structural Allura FD20 Flexmove

Not site Specific
F1
Note: The bearing force shown for the Clea is the maximum instantaneous equipment bearing load that can result from abusive use of the
system. This force can occur at two locations simultaneously on the same Unistrut (or equal) rail. If seismic forces must be considered,
please refer to the seismic calculation sheets provided by Philips for the specific system components.
(11.0)
Drawn By:
C1
2.5"
[64mm]
(2.9"
75mm max.)
Email:
(2.9"
75mm max.)
9.84"
9.85"
[250mm]
[250mm]
685mm (27") maximum allowed distance between unistrut (ten unistrut required)
Floorplate supplied by Maquet / installed by Maquet.
Maquet Table
Clea Flexmove
Floorplate to Floor Bolt Forces:
Clea FM Forces:
(Tension)
Tmax = 2248 lbs/bolt
(Tension)
Tmax = 4130 lbs/support

Quote: None
Order: None
2.5"
[64mm]
Contact Number:
Philips
Rail
SD1
7.12.11
27.00"
[686mm]
N-SRD110004
27.00"
[686mm]
Not Site Specific
27.00"
[686mm]
Project
27.00"
[686mm]
Project Manager:
27.00"
[686mm]
27.00"
[686mm]
Philips Contacts
27.00"
[686mm]
Project Details
27.00"
[686mm]
Drawing Number
27.00"
[686mm]
66.32"
[1685mm]
168.75"
[4286mm]
Maquet Table
Floorplate
70.99"
[1803mm]
Philips
Rail
Detail - Flexmove Rail Cross-Section
Project
* Philips does not specify the overhead equipment support structure.

Unistrut (or equal) may or may not be used. If Unistrut are used, it is
up to Unistrut and the structural engineer for the project to
determine which of it's products are appropriate for each project.
* Finished ceiling must NOT be lower than the bottom of
the Unistrut in order to prevent damage to the finished ceiling
during the installation of clip rails.
Drawn By:
Email:
Contact Number:
N-SRD110004
* Unistrut elements must be rigid and comply with the ceiling structure
requirements. See SN sheet, line #4 "Ceiling Support Apparatus".
Project Manager:
* The inside of the Unistrut must be clear of obstructions (including paint).
Philips Contacts
* Fixing blocks for Philips ceiling rails (Clip rails) are designed
to be installed in P1001 Unistrut.
Drawing Number
Finished Ceiling
* Nothing shall be attached to the Unistrut with any fastener that

protrudes into the unistrut which would interfere with positioning of
the fixing block.
Project Details
Fixing Block
C1
5.88"
[150mm]
C2
(11.0)

Quote: None
Order: None
1.25"
[32mm]
0.63"
[16mm]
* Finished ceiling height to be mounted 1/4" above bottom of Unistrut.
SD2
7.12.11
P1001 (or equal) Unistrut
Not Site Specific
(Not to scale)
Detail - Fixing Block for Philips Ceiling Rails (Flexmove)
(Not to scale)
Pre-Evaluated and -Approved Anchor Reference List for Philips Installers

Anchors for items that are installed/anchored by customer/contractor shall be provided by customer/contractor. Anchors for items that are
installed/anchored by Philips shall be provided by Philips. If customer's engineering documents specify anchors other than those listed below, the
anchors shall be provided by customer/contractor and installed by Philips. In all instances, the wall and/or floor support are the sole responsibility of the
customer/contractor. The customer's architect/engineer of record shall specify wall and/or floor support sufficient for the bolt forces shown on the details.
Bolts, flat washer, lock

washer, spring nuts
A307 Grade or ASME

Grade 5 Bolts: 3 8" x 2"L
Spring Nuts: 3 8"
Unistrut
Round Phillips Head Self Drilling

Screws
Drywall with minimum 20 gauge Steel

backing
SPAX Multipurpose flat head

screw
Drywall with minimum 20 gauge Steel

backing
Toggler Snaptoggle and

(round head screws)
#BA and (#10-24 x
Project
Detail - Elevation View of Bolt Locations
(Not to scale)
Drawn By:
Email:
Contact Number:
N-SRD110004
To be made locally
Project Manager:
0.31"
[8mm]
Philips Contacts
Template
Wall Raceway
Connection Box
wall mounted under
counter (Preferred)
Connection Box Weight:
66 lbs (30kg)
Bolt Forces:
(Tension) Tmax = 14 lbs/bolt
(Shear) Vmax = 25 lbs/bolt
Notes:
Connection box needs to be electrically isolated from building steel.
Locate box within 6.5' (2 M) of the review module and monitors.

Quote: None
Order: None
to Wall
31.50"
[800mm]
F2
0.12"
[3mm]
Drawing Number
Connection Box wall

mounted under counter
(Preferred)
7.48"
[190mm]
Project Details
1.18"
[30mm]
Connection Box
on table (Option)
1.42"
[36mm]
Control area counter

(provided and installed by
customer)
1.81"
[46mm]
21.65"
[550mm]
7.48"
[190mm]
Connection
Box
23.81"
[605mm]
Detail - Connection Box Mounting Options

(11.0)
14.96"
[380mm]
13.78"
[350mm]
14.96"
[380mm]
1.17"
[30mm]
26.48"
[673mm]
Mavig Ceiling Track
(provided & installed by

customer/contractor)
(08.0)
SD3
7.12.11
(provided by Philips)
Not Site Specific
(provided by Philips)
Qty.
Anchor Size
Option
Control Room Connection

Box (IXR)
Support Size & Material
Anchor Style
Equipment
Emergency Power
General Electrical Information
The circuit protection for emergency power should be capable of handling a high initial surge of approximately 40 amps.
1. General
The customer shall be solely responsible, at its expense, for preparation of the site, including any required electrical alterations. The site preparation shall be in
accordance with this plan and specifications, the architectural/construction drawings and in compliance with all safety and electrical codes, the customer shall
be solely responsible for obtaining all electrical permits from jurisdictional authority.
The transfer switch must be double actuator type with a minimum time delay of 400 milliseconds in both directions (utility to emergency emergency to utility). This time is required to allow filters to dissipate their stored energy before a different mains voltage is applied.
Russelectric type RMTD, Asco Series 7000 delayed transition transfer switch or equivalent is recommended.
2. Materials and Labor

The customer shall be solely responsible, at its expense, to provide and install all electrical ducts, boxes, conduit, cables, wires, fittings, bushing, etc., As
separately specified herein.
To reduce the emergency power generator load demand, Philips equipment can be put into a lower power mode (5.5kVA fluoroscopy + 4kVA
geometry) of operation by the connection of a potential free closure from the transfer switch. This potential free, normally open contact, has
to be rated for 24VDC/100mA. For Philips cardio/vascular Integris equipment, the two wires from this contact have to be routed to the
equipment area and connected to the System Coordinator cabinet (MA).
3. Electrical Ducts and Boxes

Electrical ducts and boxes shall be accessible and have removable covers. Floor ducts and boxes shall have watertight covers. Ducts shall be divided into as
many as three separate channels by metal dividers, separately specified herein, to separate wiring and/or cables into groups as follows: Group A: power wiring
and/or cables. Group B: signal and/or data and protective ground wiring and/or cables. Group C: x-ray high voltage cables, the use of 90 deg. ells is not
acceptable. On ceiling duct and wall duct use 45 deg. bends at all corners. All intersecting points in duct to have cross over tunnels supplied and installed by
contractor to maintain separation of cables.
Philips does not require equipment to be on emergency power. If the customer deems it necessary for the equipment to be supplied with
emergency power, the following specifications must be applied:
(03.1)
Electrical Requirement Notes for Systems with PDU

Electrical power distribution at the facility shall comply with:
(03.0)
1. The contractor will supply & install all breakers, shunt trip and incoming power to the breakers. The exact location of the breakers and shunt trips will be
determined by the architect or contractor.
4. Provide and install 4 - 2" (50 mm) diameter. Chase nipples between adjacent wall boxes.
3. The following devices provide a high impedance, nonlinear voltage source, which may affect image quality:
Static UPS systems, Series filters, Power conditioners, and Voltage regulators.
Do not install such devices at the mains supply to medical imaging equipment without consulting Philips installation or service personnel.
4. Line impedance is the combined resistance and inductance of the electrical system and includes the impedance of the power source, the
facility distribution system, and all phase conductors between the source and the imaging equipment. Philips publishes recommended
conductor sizes based on equipment power requirements, acceptable voltage drops, and assumptions about the facility source impedance.
The minimum conductor size is based on the total line impedance and NEC requirements. Unless impedance calculations are performed by
an electrical engineer, the recommended values must be used.
(08.0)
5. Electrical raceway shall be installed with removable covers. The raceway should be accessible for the entire length. In case of non - accessible floors,
walls and ceilings, an adequate number of access hatches should be supplied to enable installation of cabling. Approved conduits may be substituted. All
raceways will be designed in a manner that will not allow cables to fall out of the raceway when the covers are removed. In most cases, this will require above
- ceiling raceway to be installed with the covers removable from the top. Raceway system as illustrated on this drawing are based upon length of furnished
cables. Any changes in routing of raceway system could exceed maximum allowable length of furnished cables. Conduit or raceway above - ceiling must be
kept as near to finished ceiling as possible.
6. Conduit sizes shall be verified by the architect, electrical engineer or contractor, in accordance with local or National Electrical Codes, whichever govern.
7. Convenience outlets are not illustrated. Their number and location are to be specified by the customer/architect.
8. Electrical contractor shall install ground bond wires at conduit openings within wall boxes as required by national and local electrical codes. Ground bond
wires and lugs shall be installed in such a way to prevent the inadvertent contact with the installed Philips equipment to maintain the Philips Equipotential
Grounding Configuration and maintain patient safety. Install a #6 AWG stranded ground wire in the conduits from the Main Disconnect (CB) to the PDU and
from the PDU to the MG wall box.
9. If the Philips system includes a PDU, the PDU is a "Separately Derived Source" by NEC standards, and must be ground according to NEC article 250-30.
10. Philips equipment must be electrically isolated from conduits, raceways, ducts, etc.
11. Acceptable cross-overs: Walker DuctCat. #RPD10-TUN-3C /, Square D Cat. #RSV122ST .
(10.0)
Drawn By:
3. All pre - terminated, cut to length cables, will be supplied and installed by Philips. All cables to the breakers, will be supplied and installed by the contractor,
subject to local arrangements.
Email:
2. Equipment that utilizes the facility power system to transmit control signals (especially clock systems) may interfere with medical imaging
equipment, thus requiring special filtering.
2. The contractor shall supply & install all pull boxes, raceways, conduit runs, stainless steel covers, etc. Conduit/raceways must be free from burrs and sharp
edges over its entire length. A Greenlee pull string/measuring tape (part no. 435, or equivalent) shall be provided with conduit runs.
Project Manager:
1. Power supplied to medical imaging equipment must be separate from power feeds to air conditioning, elevators, outdoor lighting, and
other frequently switched or motorized loads. Such loads can cause waveform distortion and voltage fluctuations that can hinder high quality
imaging.
Philips Contacts
Power Quality Guidelines
Project
Electrical Notes
Contact Number:
ANSI / NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code

Article 250 - Grounding
Article 517 - Healthcare Facilities
ANSI / NFPA 99 - Healthcare Facilities
NEMA standard XR9 - Power Supply Guideline for X-ray Machines
8. Dimmer Switches
X-ray room lights should be provided with dimmer switches.
Metal conduit shall not be used as the equipment ground conductor.
Not Site Specific
7. Warning Lights and Door Switches

"X-ray on" warning lights and x-ray termination door switches should be provided at all entrances to x-ray rooms as required by code.
the cross-sectional area of the phase
Drawing Number
1
2
Project Details
On systems with a PDU, the ground conductor for the power feeder shall never be less than
conductors and never smaller than #5 AWG.
N-SRD110004
Phase conductors to be size for instantaneous voltage drop per NEC 517 - 73 and Philips recommendations.
6. Disconnecting Means
A disconnecting means shall be provided as separately specified.

Quote: None
Order: None
Voltage to be supplied is 3 phase, delta or wye.
5. Conductors
Utilization voltages per ANSI C84.1 - 1982 range A.
EN
7.12.11
4. Conduit
Conduit point - to - point runs shall be as direct as possible. Empty conduit runs used for cables may require pull boxes located along the run. Consult with
Philips. A pull wire or cord shall be installed in each conduit run. All conduits which enter duct prior to their termination point must maintain separation from
other cables via use of dividers, cross over tunnels, or conduit supplied and installed by contractor from entrance into duct to exit from duct. Do not use flex
conduit unless approved by Philips Service.
Electrical Legend
Electrical Legend
Existing
Future
Existing
Future
Optional
Optional
Item Number
Detail Sheet
WL
Warning Light - Provide a surface or flush mounted light fixture above door to indicate when X-ray is on, if required
by local code or physicist of record. See Sheet "ED2" diagram for connection details. (Not shown on plan)
ED2
DS
Door Switch - 120V/5A switch limited to open when door is open. Mount in upper corner on strike side of main
entry door(s) (Cooper no. 1665 or equivalent), if required by local code or physicist of record. See Sheet "ED2"
diagram for connection details. (Not shown on plan)
ED2
PBK
MG
D MP
MA
CY
WM
Central ground busbar mounted in a 12"W x 12"H x 4"D pull box with hinged cover, surface mounted to the
bottom of "WR2" when possible.
18"W x 18"H x 8"D flanged-edge terminal wall box with removable screw-type cover plate, surface mounted 22"
A.F.F. to bottom of box, provide (1) 1 1/2" and (2) 2" conduits through "PBK" cover plate to PDU cabinet.
19 1/4"W x 67"H x 4"D flanged-edge terminal wall box, surface mounted 75" A.F.F. to top of box. General
contractor to cut top and/or bottom of box as required.
N1
RJ45 type Ethernet 10/100/1000 Mbit network connector with access to customer's network. Locate within 10'
(3050mm) of network card. Network fiber optic and Ethernet cabling, connectors, wall boxes, patch panels, etc.
are the responsibility of the purchaser. Philips assumes no responsibility for procurement, installation, or
maintenance of these components.
N2
RJ45 type Ethernet 10/100/1000 Mbit network connector. Access to customer's network via their remote access
server is needed for Remote Service Network (RSN) connectivity.
ED2
N1
ED1
B
ED2
120V/20A dedicated duplex outlet for service in the equipment room. (Not shown on plan)
120V/20A dedicated duplex outlet for IH (Interventional Hardware).
Grommet opening on "WR3". Approximate location shown is recommended and may be changed - verify
relocation with local Philips Service.
XPD
8"W x 8"H x 4"D pull box with removable screw-type cover plate, flush mounted 8" above finished floor to bottom
of the box. Location shown is recommended and may be changed - verify relocation with local Philips Service.
Project
PSU
18"W x 18"L x 6"D ceiling box, flush mounted with removable screw-type cover plate. grommeted opening on
cover for cable routing.
TV
18"W x 18"L x 6"D ceiling box, mounted above finished ceiling with removable screw-type cover plate. Box to be
located near the 3rd party ceiling boom(s) with the Philips monitors, coordinate locally. Not shown on plan.
10"W x 4"D wall raceway, surface mounted with removable screw-type cover plate. "WR1" is at finished floor.
WR1
WR2 "WR2" is at 75" A.F.F. to bottom of raceway.
ED3
WR3
10"W x 4"D wall raceway, surface mounted with removable screw-type cover plate. "WR3" is at finished floor.
"WR3" may need to be cut at the location of the "CY" connection box.
ED3
R1
10"W x 4"D riser duct with removable screw-type cover plate, surface mounted from wall raceway to wall box.
ED3
PHY
Stub up point for physiological monitoring cables. Run conduit to customer's physiological console location.
Contact manufacturer for power requirements, etc.
ATY
Auxiliary Box - 6"W x 6"H x 4"D wall box, flush mounted 70" A.F.F. to the bottom of the box with removable
screw-type cover plate. Height and location shown are recommended and may be changed - verify height and
relocation with local Philips Service.
Project Manager:
SP
Philips Contacts
Drawing Number
MQT
Project Details
10"W x 10"L x 6"D floor box, under the floor with a 4" core drill up to the underside of the Maquet floorplate.
Drawn By:
PBG
Ground electrode per N.E.C. 250-26, building steel preferred. (Not shown on plan)
Email:
GE
Analog phone line for service (convenience). (Not shown on plan)

Quote: None
Order: None
See E1 - E3 sheets for conduit and raceway requirements.
EL
7.12.11
ST
Shunt Trip (emergency off) - Large mushroom-head button on remote control station with contacts to operate
feature of "CB" (if required by local code or owner, and mandatory for VA and D.O.D installations). (Not shown on
plan)
ED1
Not Site Specific
480V, 3 phase 125 AMP circuit breaker with shunt trip. Run power from breaker to "PBK", leaving an 8' tail at
"PBK", and from "PBK" to "MG", leaving an 8' tail at each end. See Sheet "ED1" for power quality requirements.
Location per local code or owner requirements. (Not shown on plan)
Contact Number:
CB
N-SRD110004
Description
Description
Detail Sheet
Item Number
0
1'
2'
.5m
4'
1m
Electrical Layout

ATY
N1
N1
CY
WM
PHY
Refer to Electrical Legend - Sheet EL

and Raceway/Conduit - Sheet E2-E3

Email:

Quote: None
Order: None
WR3
5'-5"
Contact Number:
N2
N-SRD110004
1'-6"
Project
2m
Project Manager:
8'
Philips Contacts
(3100mm, +10mm / -0)
E1
7.12.11
MQT
Drawn By:
PBG
Project Details
MA
Not Site Specific
PSU
3"
1'-88
7'-0"
2'-2"
11'-8"
MP

Centerline
WR1
2'-2"
WR2
Drawing Number
9'-1"
2'-2"
2'-2"
1'-7"

Centerline
11'-0"
MG
PBK
R1
SP
Equipment Closet
Site Specific
11'-6"
2'-2"
2'-2"
2'-2"
1'-7"
10"
2'-2"
MP
MG
6'-3"
PBK
Control Room
Site Specific
8'-0"
Project
15'-8"
Finished Floor
WR1
Not Site Specific
R1
10"
PSU
6'-10"
PHY
Note: The use of 90 degree ells is not acceptable use 45

degree bends at all raceway corners. For conduit runs use
the minimum bending radius specific to the conduit diameter.
The use of crossover tunnels at all applicable locations is
required. The above mentioned recommendations will help to
ensure the integrity of the cables and fiber optic runs.
* Countertop Height Guide:
30" for standard seated height.
36" for standard standing height.
* Ensure that the wall junction boxes are mounted perpendicular to the floor.
* Verify exact ceiling height of Equipment and Control Room Area.
* Coordinate with facility to determine exact location of computers.

Quote: None
Order: None
WM
Drawn By:
Finished Floor
4'-0"
Email:
WR3
N-SRD110004
10"
WR3
Contact Number:
N2
Project Manager:
N1
Philips Contacts
CY
Drawing Number
N1
Project Details
2'-6"
5'-5"
E2
7.12.11
MA
PBG
9'-6"
WR2
Conduit Required
General Notes
General Notes
To
Power
Panel
CB
PBK
PBK
CB
PDU
Cabinet
PDU
Cabinet
Minimum Maximum
Conduit
Conduit
Length
Size
(P)
Per N.E.C. Per N.E.C.
(P)
1 1/2"
Conduit
Special
Requirements
Optional equipment, verify with local Philips Service
Run
No.
From
To
31
XPD
MP
32
TV
(P)
2"
33
TV
PBK
(P)
2"
50'
34
XPD
CB
ST
(P)
3/4"
50'
35
PHY
PBK
GE
(P)
3/4"
25'
36
PHY
(P)
3/4"
PBG
Room
Outlets
MA
WL
(P)
3/4"
55'
ATY
DS
(S)
3/4"
55'
10
ATY
MA
(S)
2 1/2"
41'
11
ATY
TV
(S)
3/4"
75'
12
SP
MG
(H)
2 1/2"
23'
13
SP
MG
(P)
1"
23'
14
SP
MG
(S)
1 1/2"
23'
15
SP
MP
(S)
2 1/2"
23'
16
SP
MP
(P)
1"
23'
17
SP
MP
(C)
2"
23'
Cooling fluid hoses for tube.
18
SP
MP
(C)
2 1/2"
23'
Cooling fluid hoses for detector.
19
SP
MA
(S)
2 1/2"
23'
20
MQT
PSU
(-)
3/4"
21
MQT
MP
(-)
3/4"
22
TV
MA
(P)
2"
52'
23
TV
MA
(S)
2 1/2"
52'
24
TV
MP
(S)
1 1/2"
54'
25
CY
MP
(S)
2"
50'
26
CY
MA
(P)
2"
55'
27
CY
MA
(S)
2 1/2"
55'
28
MA
WM
(S)
1"
82'
29
XPD
MA
(P)
3/4"
52'
30
XPD
MA
(S)
2"
52'
Control
Room
Control
Room
Control
Room
Minimum Maximum
Conduit
Conduit
Length
Size
Conduit
Quantity
Cable
Type
(*)
(S)
2"
52'
(S)
1 1/2"
(S)
1 1/2"
(S)
1 1/2"
XPD
(S)
2 1/2"
Physio
Monitor
(S)
2"
33'
Special
Requirements
Verify with local Philips Service (Physio Monitor).

For optional equipment (Interventional Hardware,
ViewForum, Xcelera, etc).
For future options (Bolus Chase, 3D-RA and Tableside
Analysis Module).
Optional for remote location.
See Sheet "ED2" for details.
H.T. Cables.
Connector must be removed to run the cable and

re-attached at the end of the run.
From
Cable
Type
(*)
Conduit existing - cables supplied and installed by contractor
Drawn By:
Run
No.
Conduit
Quantity
E3
7.12.11
Conduit
Conduit existing - cables supplied by Philips, installed by contractor
Not Site Specific
Optional equipment, verify with local Philips Service
Conduit existing - cables supplied and installed by Philips
Power (AC)
Power (DC)
Ground
Signal
High Tension
Cooling Hose
Air Supply Hose
Conduit existing - cables supplied and installed by contractor
P
D
G
S
H
C
A
Email:
Conduits and cables supplied and installed by contractor

Quote: None
Order: None
Conduit existing - cables supplied by Philips, installed by contractor
Conduit supplied/installed by contractor - Philips cables installed by contractor
Conduit existing - cables supplied and installed by Philips
Conduit supplied/installed by contractor - Philips cables installed by Philips
Contact Number:
A
B
Project
Conduits and cables supplied and installed by contractor
Power (AC)
Power (DC)
Ground
Signal
High Tension
Cooling Hose
Air Supply Hose
Project Manager:
P
D
G
S
H
C
A
Philips Contacts
Conduit supplied/installed by contractor - Philips cables installed by Philips

Conduit supplied/installed by contractor - Philips cables installed by contractor
All conduit runs must take most direct route point to point.
All conduit runs must have a pull string.
Project Details
A
B
1.
2.
N-SRD110004
All conduit runs must take most direct route point to point.
All conduit runs must have a pull string.
Drawing Number
1.
2.
Conduit Required
Detail - PDU 4000 Mounting Detail
Power Quality Requirements

Velara 100KW with PDU 4000
1
2"
36.00"
[914mm]
One 1 and 2" nipples mounted

through J-box "PBK" cover plate
18" x 18" x 8" J-box "PBK"
Power Output:
Supply Configuration:
100KW
3 phase, 3 wire power and ground, Delta or wye
3 phase, 4 wire power w/ Neutral + ground, wye
Nominal Line Voltage:

Line Voltage Variation:
Line Voltage Balance:
Frequency Variation:
480 VAC, 60 Hz
2% maximum of nominal voltage between phases
Voltage Surges:
To 110% of steady-state voltage 100 msecs.

Maximum duration, 6 per hour maximum
Voltage Sags:
To 90% of steady-state voltage 100 msecs.

Maximum duration, 6 per hour maximum
Line Impulses:
1000 VPK above phase-neutral RMS absolute

maximum. No more than 1 impulse per hour to exceed
500 VPK.
Neutral-Ground Voltage:
Neutral-Ground Impulses:
2.0 volts maximum RMS value

No more than 1 per hour that exceeds 25 volts and
1 Mjoule
High Frequency Noise:
3.0 volts steady-state maximum. Over 3.0 volts

permitted for 100 msec. maximum, 1 per hour max.
Grounded Conductor Impedance:
0.1 Ohms @ 60 hz. maximum
3 Phase & Ground
Max. Phase-phase
impedance @ CB
Panel
<
Max. Load Voltage

Drop @ CB Panel
18.2 V
Percent Regulation at
Maximum Load @ CB
Panel
3.8%
"MG"
Emergency Power
Note: Conductors, destinations, and number of conduit runs from PDU to J-box "PBK"
and from J-box to equipment will vary from system to system. Consult individual site
plans for detailed conduit schedules.
Output Voltage PDU 4000:

Max Inst. Current @ PDU output:
Max Phase-Phase Impedance:
Max Load Voltage Drop:
Percent Regulation at Max. Load:
305 Amps
<
24.4 V @ PDU output
6.4% @ PDU output
Minimum copper wire size, circuit breaker to PDU: #1 - Maximum 50' in length.
Diagram - PDU 4000 Electrical Interface

PBK
(00.0)
CB
Email:
242 A

Quote: None
Order: None
#1 AWG
Ground Electrode per NEC 250-30

(Building steel preferred)
Inst. Current
@ CB Panel
Contact Number:
Pull box for

Ground Busbar
"PBG"
N-SRD110004
Mains "MA"
Rack
X-ray Generator
Shunt
Trip
480VAC
95ft
120ft
151ft
193ft
226ft
271ft
365ft
Project Manager:
Out (X-ray Generator)

Mains "MA" Rack
Out (Ground Busbar)
1/0 AWG
2/0 AWG
3/0 AWG
4/0 AWG
250 KCM
300 KCM
400 KCM
Philips Contacts
C.B.
#1 AWG
If required by facility
or local code
Project
PDU 4000
Input
Drawing Number
Size per equipment

power requirements
Recommended conductor sizes for 1% impedance of branch conductors to circuit breaker (CB).
Drawn By:
18" x 18" x 8" J-box

"PBK"
Facility Source
(
225 KVA
8 Amps. @ 3 mA, 110 KVP continuous
3 pole, 125 amperes
201 KVA (1000 mA @ 100 KVP)
Branch Power:
Max Stand by Current:
Circuit Breaker:
Maximum Instantaneous Power:
Project Details
3 Phase, + gnd. Size

per conductor size chart
Not Site Specific
Velara 100KW with PDU 4000

1 21" chase nipples with fittings
(each input and output)
Provided by Customer /
Electrical Contractor
Branch Circuit and Wire Gauge Requirements
PDU 4000 with J-box "PBK" flush or surface mounted behind unit.
ED1
7.12.11
J-box "PBK", nipples and

other mounting hardware must be
supplied by customer as required.
Detail - Ground Busbar Application
Detail - Wall Box Mounting
2.52"
[64mm]
(Not to scale)
(Not to scale)
2.52"
[64mm]
To X-Ray
Generator(s)
#1 AWG from ground block

of PDU
#1 AWG
4.76"
[121mm]
To Philips'
equipment
insulated from
accidental earthing
PBG
(08.0)
(08.0)
Detail - Grounding
To room lights circuit
To room lights
circuit
n.c.
n.c.
Com
Com
n.o.
n.o.
#6 AWG green
stranded wire
Pass Through
Lug
Supplied by Contractor.
To be located in ceiling space
away from Philips equipment.
N
N
Philips
"MA" Rack
110V Relay*
Raceway
X2:2
MP
F24
1A
Door Switch
X105:2
(NC)
110V Relay*
X106:2
(NC)
Philips
"MA" Rack
X105:1
(NO)
X2:1
MG
Only used if customer

chooses to have the
room lights switched on
and off with the system's
room light's foot switch.
X106:1
(NO)
X105:3
(P)
24V Relay
24V Relay
X106:3
(P)
F25
20 A
MA
Philips ATY box
To be located in ceiling space
away from Philips equipment.
PBK
Hospital
supplied
24 VAC
Philips "MA" Rack
* The 110V relay should have heavy-duty contacts to handle the room lights current.
WL
DS
All items shown (except Philips items) to be supplied by Customer / Contractor.
Raceway
Diagram - Typical Connection of

X-Ray On Light, Door Switch, & Room Lights
(08.0)
Drawn By:
#10 Pan
Screw
Contractor to locate relay box
in ceiling space away from
Philips equipment.
This allows for the use

of a three way switch on
the wall of the exam
room for additional
control of lights.
Email:
*PBG - Busbar
Hospital supplied
110 VAC
N HOT
Xray On Light
Only used if customer

chooses to have the
room lights switched
off when X-ray is on
* PBG to be placed at a reachable height.
Use when customer wishes to

control some of the room lights
using the "X-ray On" signal.

Quote: None
Order: None
(Not to scale)
(Not site specific)
To other
equipment
and room
outlets
ED2
(08.0)
7.12.11
To metallic
structure
within patient
vicinity
Contact Number:
MA
N-SRD110004
MP
Project
MG
1. Furnished and installed by Customer / Contractor

2. Purchase from local Ferraz Shawmut distributor,
http://www.ferrazshawmutsales.com/index.htm
Catalog #69143.
3. 62000 - 69000 Series Blocks
http://www.ferrazshawmutsales.com/pdfs/PDB-LARGE.pdf
Not Site Specific
Finished Floor
The GSSNA specified "Central Ground

Busbar" serves as a ground reference for
GSSNA equipment. It may also serve as the
"Reference Grounding Point" of the room as
defined in NFPA-99 (3-5.2.1.2) for
non-PMSNA equipment.
Conductor sizes
#14 - #4 AWG
Project Manager:
Wall Duct
3.27"
[83mm]
75.00"
[1905mm]
7.80"
[198mm]
Test performed by GSSNA service ensure

that these specifications are met by the
GSSNA equipment. It is the facility's
responsibility to ensure that these
specifications are met by the wall outlet,
facility structure, and other equipment not
installed by GSSNA.
Philips Contacts
Full size grommetted

opening in top/bottom
of wall duct, with
grommet material
applied to all edges
for protection of
cables.
This equipment may be used for invasive

procedures; therefore, the area to be installed
is classified as critical care area per NFPA-99
and NFPA-70 (NEC). These documents
specify maximum touch voltages and ground
impedance in these areas.
Drawing Number
Terminal Box
General contractor
to cut bottom of box
as required
To be installed in
12" x 12" x 4" cut-out
box or equivalent.
Project Details
19
[48 .24"
9m
m]
5.51"
[140mm]
Invasive Procedures
Wall Duct
Detail - Cable Trough Divisions

Troughs or ducts must be separated by metal barriers into three sections:
1. High voltage (H.T.) cables to be run separately from all cables.
2. Power cables and ground cables can be run together.
3. Signal cables and data cables can be run together but must be separated
from power cables.
4. Video cables to be run separately from all other cables.
Contact Number:
N-SRD110004
Drawn By:
Project Manager:
Drawing Number
ED3
7.12.11
Philips Contacts
Project Details
Not Site Specific
(10.0)
Project
WR1 WR2 WR3 R1
Email:
5. It is important that all cables are placed in the appropriate trough and
at no given point do any cables from one division cross cables from
another. Trough separation must be continuous from the beginning
to the end of the run. Utilize crossover tunnels as appropriate.
6. Trough or ducts: steel with steel dividers grounded to building ground.
7. Contractor to provide cable restraints in all troughs.
8. Acceptable cross-overs: Walker DuctCat. #RPD10-TUN-3C /
Square D Cat. #RSV122ST
Video
(if not in conduit)

Quote: None
Order: None
Signal &
Data
Power &
Grounds
Philips Healthcare Remote Services Network (RSN)

Secure broadband connection required for Philips remote technical support, diagnostics, and applications assistance
Connectivity Details:
- A Site-to-Site connection from the RSN data center's Cisco router will be established to the HCF's
VPN concentrator.
- The VPN Tunnel will be an IPSEC, 3DES encrypted Tunnel using IKE as standard, but alternative
standards are also available, such as AES, MD5, SHA, Security Association lifetime and Encryption
Mode.
- Every system that we will be servicing remotely will have a static NAT IP that we configure on the
RSN Data center side.
Health Care Facility
Philips VPN or
Site-to-Site VPN
Philips
MR
Ultrasound
Internet
Philips
Nuc Med
Hospital
Network
Philips VPN or
Site-to-Site VPN
Ultrasound
Philips
PACS
Philips
Nuc Med
Hospital
Network
Ultrasound
Philips
MR
Philips
X-Ray
Philips
CT
Patient
Monitoring
Action Required by Hospital:

- Assign a fixed public IP Address from the ISP to be configured on the Philips router. This is the
DOTTED link on the picture connected to the firewall.
- Assign a Back end IP for the Philips router on the Hospital Network.
- Complete appropriate Site Checklist.
- Route traffic from within the hospital network with destination addresses 192.68.48.0/22 to internal
Philips router Ethernet interface. This is the DASHED line connected to the firewall.
Not Site Specific
Philips
MR
Philips
X-Ray
Philips
CT
Patient
Monitoring

- Assign a fixed public IP Address from the ISP to be configured on the Philips router. This is the
DOTTED link on the picture connected to the firewall.
- Configure and allow on the firewall on the DASHED line interface IPSec protocol communication
by opening protocol 500, 50, 51, 47 and port 23 + TACACS. Traffic should be between external IP
Address located on the Philips router and the RSN Data center IP address 192.68.48/24 and IP
address AOSN TACAS.
- Configure and allow on the firewall on the DASHED line interface access between the IP
address allocated by the hospital to the Philips internal Ethernet router interface and the target
modality IP address.
Drawn By:
Philips
PACS
Philips VPN or
Site-to-Site VPN

Philips
Router
Email:
Internet
General Network
Overview
(not site specific)

Quote: None
Order: None
Option 1: Parallel to HCF Firewall Connectivity Method

This connectivity method is designed for customers who prefer a Philips RSN Router installed on site
utilizing all the security features provided and managed by Philips.
Option 3: Router Installed Inside the HCF's DZM

This connectivity method is designed for customers who prefer the RSN Router installed inside
and existing, or new DMZ, allowing access to Philips equipment.
Contact Number:
Connectivity Details:
- An RSN Cisco 1711 or 1712 router will be preconfigured and installed at the HCF by Philips in
conjunction with the HCF IT representative.
- The VPN Tunnel will be an IPSEC, 3DES encrypted Tunnel using IKE and will be established from
the RSN-DC and terminated at the RSN Router on-site.
- One to One NAT is used to limit access to Philips equipment only.
- Router Config and IP auditing is enabled for Customer IT to view via website 24/7.
- Dedicated DSL connections are also supported.

- Assign a fixed public IP Address from the ISP to be configured on the Philips router. This is
the DOTTED link on the picture connected to the firewall.
- Configure and allow on the firewall on the DASHED line interface access between the IP address
allocated by the hospital to the Philips internal Ethernet router interface and the target modality IP
address.
N-SRD110004
Broadband Router Installed at Health Care Facility

This connectivity method is designed for customers who have a dedicated high speed connection for
Philips equipment.
Firewalls
Philips
CT
Patient
Monitoring
Project
Patient
Monitoring
Philips
CT

- Review and approve connection details.
- Configure and allow Site-to-Site access prior to setting up connectivity depending on the access
criteria that the HCF decides to implement (ex: Source IP filtering, destination IP filtering, NAT
assignment, etc.).
- Route traffic from within the hospital network with destination addresses 192.68.48.0/22 to the
designed IP provided by Philips.
General Network
Overview
(Not site specific)
Philips
X-Ray
Project Manager:
Shared VPN
Philips
Router
Philips
MR
Philips
X-Ray
Hospital
Network
Ultrasound
Philips
Nuc Med
Hospital
Network
Internet
c
Internet
Philips
PACS
Philips Contacts
Philips
Nuc Med
General Network
Overview
(not site specific)
Project Details
Philips
PACS

Philips
Router
Drawing Number
General Network
Overview
(Not site specific)
HCF VPN
Concentrator
Router
Option 2: Back End Connected to the HCF Firewall Connectivity Method

This connectivity method is designed for customers who prefer a Philips RSN Router installed on
site by setting up an IP-Based policy allowing access thru existing HCF Firewall to Philips
equipment.
N1
7.12.11
Broadband Site-to-Site Connectivity (Preferred)

This connectivity method is designed for customers who prefer a connection from the RSN Data
Center to the Health Care Facility (HCF) utilizing their existing VPN equipment.
Items Specific for the Cardio/Vascular modality
Instructions
This form is to be used by Project Manager, Contractor and Service Engineer.
Unistrut installed and level according to Philips specifications
Information is used to develop and determine site ready date.
Floor plates installed and level according to Philips specifications
Items listed are go/no go items for delivery unless noted as delay only items.
All cover plates have holes punched and nipples required and bushings installed
Items identified with *** as delayed items must be completed after hours or on weekend. These items cannot be accomplished while installation is in
progress. Also, these items must be completed within two days of installation start or they may stop installation.
Emergency power requirements installed according to Philips specifications
Site Readiness Checklist
Building steel ground installed to PDU
Modality:
________________________________________________________________________________
Room electrical grounds installed to PPC middle section
Order:
________________________________________________________________________________
Conduit lengths measured according to Philips specifications. NOTE: Specifications is from source box to destination box (not just conduit
run length)
Site Name:
________________________________________________________________________________
Location:
________________________________________________________________________________
Contact Name:
________________________________________________________________________________
Routing of ductwork and conduits must be installed according to Philips specifications
______________________________________________________________________
Customer site preparation verified in general against the Philips final planning drawings.
Ceiling lights installed.

Cable conduit and ductwork installed and clean. Position checked. Duct covers in place but not finally closed.
Cable opening are clear, without sharp edges. Pull strings in conduit. Installation per Philips specifications.
HVAC environmental equipment installed and working according to Philips specifications.
Project
Ceiling installation completed.

Electrical preparation according to Philips specifications.
Floors are tiled/covered finished. Flooring is covered with protective covering (scratch protection).
Floor leveled according to Philips drawings and specifications.
Not Site Specific
Doors installed.
Walls finished including painting.
All network cabling, drops installed according to Philips specifications (including hardcopy cameras).
All pre-cabling identified on Philips drawings has been installed.
Pre-move survey completed - Delivery route identified.
Drawn By:
Email:
Contact Number:
N-SRD110004
Cabinets and casework installed***.
Project Manager:
Room has been cleaned ***.
Philips Contacts
Dedicated phone line for modem use***.
Drawing Number
X-ray warning lights installed ***.
Project Details
Lead glass installed ***.
Philips RSN Champion contacted.

Approved for Delivery
Project Manager
Date
Service Engineer
Date

Quote: None
Order: None
RSN survey completed and submitted
CHK
7.12.11
Contact Phone Number:
TOSHIBA
Leading Innovation >>>
THESE PLANS ARE NOT TO BE USED FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES
THESE PLANS ARE NOT TO BE USED FOR

CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES
Medical Systems Group
TOSHIBA

TOSHIBA
TOSHIBA
THESE PLANS ARE NOT TO BE USED FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES

TOSHIBA

TOSHIBA
Example of Product
Artis zeego
Hybrid OR
Artis zeego Hybrid OP

PPCC-E Version 25.10.2010
Seite
1 von 36
Requirements for Planning

Information given in this PPCC document is meant for the preplanning stage only. Detailed
information is part of the final site specific plan obtained from the Siemens Planning Department.
Site preparation is the customer's responsibility. SIEMENS AG is only responsible for installation
and commissioning of the ordered equipment.
Page
Room Dimensions
Statics
Power Supply
Environment
Radiation Protection
10
Transport
10
Planning Recommendations
11
Planning Examples
16
Checklist and Releas
35
Notes
36
NOTE!
All technical information are only valid for angiographiy units.

Seite
2 von 36
Raumabmessungen
Room size Hybrid OR (diagonal arrangement 30)
900 x 800 cm
Recommended room size (~70 m)
500 x 738.5 cm
Technical minimum room size

(only for angio operation)

Seite
3 von 36
Static
Important weights
Component
Weight
Artis zeego Floor stand

(with Floor frame and mounting plate)
1813 kg
Cable reel
122 kg
Artis Patient table
max. 550 kg
Trumpf Patient table

Table column + floor installation plate
Carbon fiber tabletop
OR tabletop
Shuttle
181 kg
120 kg
112 kg
ca. 89 kg
Ceiling stand DCS PRO 4m DVI
275 kg
Ceiling stand DCS Large Display
185 kg
Ceiling stand DCS Extended

Large Display Container
Upper Body Radiation Shield
max. 355 kg
ca. 115 kg
max. 131 kg
Image system
150 kg
System control cabinet
270 kg
System control cabinet for Artis OR-Table
125 kg
Generator POLYDOROS A100
300 kg
Cable cabinet
120 kg
Control cabinet floor stand
167 kg

Seite
4 von 36
Floor stand
Resulting forces on the base plate with
Installation on self-leveling grout.
A) Floor frame
B) Installation plate
C) Marks for positioning the installation plate
The specifications includes static and dynamic forces. Maximum tensile force at 45.
Due to the rotational range of the floor stand, tensile forces can occur at every
attachment point of the mounting plate.
Mounting point
Tensile force in kN
Lateral force in kN
10,26
6,14
8,55
5,58
0,98
5,58
pressure
6,14
10,26
5,27
pressure
5,27
10,26
3,64
pressure
3,64
10,26
4,06
10
8,55
3,16
11
0,98
3,16
12
pressure
4,06
(assuming a 1300 kg floor stand + 170 kg C-Arm)

The specification includes static and dynamic forces.
Maximum tensile force at 0 and 90

Seite
5 von 36
Resulting tensile force
60,11 kN
Resulting compression load
38,51 kN
Max. concrete tensile pressure
0,61 N/mm
Max. tilting moment Mk
49 kNm #1
Max. torque moment MR
38 kNm #1
Max. horizontal force Fh
18 kN #1
Max. vertical force Fv
24 kN #1
#1 Depending on the orientation points of the installation plate

Maximum bending:
In the area of the floor stand installation plate, maximum 3 mm of deflection is permitted
when a vertical force of 14 kN is exerted.
Cable Reel
Ceiling load Fmax:
- vertical load per mounting point ( 4 screws ): max. 300 N
-horizontal load ( vertical and floating ) per mounting point ( 4 screws ): max. 100 N
Bending Point
Ceiling load Fmax:
- vertical load per mounting point ( 2 screws ): max. 2 kN
- horizontal load ( vertical an floating ) per mounting point ( 2 screws ): max. 500 N
Artis - Patient table

The max. tension is calculated with the table turned/tilted ( 45) and with the tabletop
extended completely towards the head-end position. The max. tension is determined with
the weight of the patient (200 kg) and accessories (40 kg) factored in.
The mounting plate will be anchored in reinforced concrete by means of 4 pcs. Hilti
heavy-duty expansion bolts. Permissible min. quality of the concrete: C20/25.
Load on each mounting point at the table foot-end: max. tensile force equaling 4.5 kN

Seite
6 von 36
Trumpf Patiente table

The maximum pull forces on the column occur when the tabletop is extended at the head
end and there is a maximum load on the table (patient weight and accessories).
Since the tabletop can be positioned rotated 180, the center of gravity can wander 360
around the column center. The center of gravity of the column is in the center.
Center of gravity of tabletop with patient
max. pull forces per anchor bolt for the column = 1280 N
max. tilt torque on column = 1365 Nm
Note: the maximum pull forces and tilt torque that occure, regardless of the table that is
used, were listed.
Ceiling stand DCS

Ceiling mounted for displays (DCS PRO, DCS Large Display)
Fzmax: 3,6 kN vertical ceiling load, floating single load
Dynamic load per mounting point
(2 screws, the screws are subjected to different loads, max. 2,9 kN per screw)
Ceiling mounted for displays (DCS extended)
Fzmax: 5,4 kN vertical ceiling load, floating single load
Dynamic load per mounting point
(2 screws, the screws are subjected to different loads, max. 4,2 kN per screw)
Use of Display Booms from non-Siemens Manufacturers

In place of a DCS, display boom from non-Siemens manufacturers can also be used by
the costumer.
The following display booms are excepted:
- motorized, height-adjustable display booms.
- Display boom that do not work according to the principle of spring-weight
compensation and manual movement
- Display booms with stationary column
For monitor cabling, a separate cable kit with transceivers and power distribution must be
ordered.
The max. configuration:
- Use as the 1 st DCS
o A max. of 8 monitors is permitted on the display boom.
o A max. of 3 monitors can be ordered from Siemens.
- Use as the 2 nd DCS
o A max. of 3 monitors is permitted on the display boom.
o A max. of 2 monitors can be ordered from Siemens.
VESA adapters are required to install the Siemens monitors (not included in the shipment).

Seite
7 von 36
Power Supply
Power requirements Generator POLYDOROS A100
Connection value
34,6 kVA
Internal / external fuse
50 A slow blow / 63 A slow blow
Line impedance
90 m
Power consumption Fluoroscopy

Radiography
8 kVA
160 kVA
Power line
3/N/PE, AC 400 V 10 %, 50/60 Hz 1 Hz

Power requirements System control cabinet
Connection value
Power consumption
Power line
22,2 kVA
17,2 kVA
3/N/PE, AC 400 V 10 %, 50/60 Hz 1 Hz
The installation has to conform to all National Guidelines and Codes.

Seite
8 von 36
Environment
Examination
and control room
Temperature range
Relative humidity
15 to 30 C (recommended 22 C)
20 to 75 % non-condensing
Image system
Temperature range
Relative humidity
Max. temperature gradient
Air flow volume
Max. noise generation
10 to 35 C
10 K / h
630 m/h
53 dB (A)
Generator
Temperature range
Relative humidity
Air flow volume
10 to 35 C
5K/h
160 m/h
55 dB (A)
Temperature range
Relative humidity
Air flow volume
15 to 30 C
5K/h
500 m/h
48 dB (A)
Temperature range
Relative humidity
System
control cabinet
Air flow volume
(for Artis OR-table)
10 to 35 C
5K/h
n.a.
n.a.
System
control cabinet
Cooling set
(company Klver)
Stand with
flat panel
detector

Cooling air
Air flow volume
5 to 30 C (frost-free room)
950 m/h
55 dB (A) at 50 Hz
59 dB (A) at 60 Hz

Air pressure
Mechanical impacts
Vibrations
5 C / h
70 bis 104 kPa
Max. 10 g / 16 ms
Max. 0.1 g / 10 bis 200 Hz
< 55 dB (A)
Seite
9 von 36
The structural radiation protection depends on the location of the unit and the
function of the surrounding rooms.
By order, the planning departments of Siemens prepares radiation protection
calculation and radiation protection plan.
Transport
The transport route (doors and hallway) requires sufficient dimensions for the
following parts:
Largest single part with packaging:
Floor stand: 186 x 115 x 200 cm (BxDxH), weight 2000 kg
Largest single part with packaging:
C-Arm 200 x 93 x 211 cm (BxTxH), weight 600 kg
The door must have a final clearance of 125 cm if bed entrance is requested.
Environment for storage and transport

System
Flat panel detector
Temperature range
-20 bis 60 C
-10 bis 55 C
Relative
humiduty
10 bis 95%
without condensation
20 bis 95%
without condensation
Air pressure
500 bis 1060 hPa
700 bis 1040 hPa
Mechanical impacts
Max. 10 g / 16 ms
Vibrations
Max. 2 g / 58 bis 150 Hz

Seite
10 von 36
Maximum distances between the cable outlets in m
Floor
stand
ceiling
outlet
(P1)
Floor stand
ceiling outlet (P1)
Floor stand
floor outlet (R1)
Generator (PU1)
System
control
cabinet 1
(SC1)
System
control
cabinet 2
(for Artis ORtable)
(SC2)
Floor stand
control
cabinet
(RC)
Image
System
(IS)
16
15
16
Floor stand control

cabinet (RC)
System control cabinet 2
(for Artis OR-table) (SC2)
13,4
5
10
2
DCS-Display (D1)
19
23
Control room
distributor (CR1)
19
20
Image System (long) (IS)
19,5
Image System (short)
(IS)
Artis Table (T1)
14 *1
Trumpf Table (T1)

Cooling set (CU1)
14
15
27
30
*1 not for Artis OR-patient table

Seite
11 von 36
Arrangement of cabinets and components

Generatorcabinet
Cablecabinet
SystemControl cab.
System contr. cab.

Artis OR-Table
Equipment Room
Cooling set
Floor stand
control
cabinet
Proposal :
Generator cabinet, system control cabinet and cooling set are located in the
equipment room (due to generation of noise and heat).
The cabinets can be set up as illustrated. Take note of the following:
The cabinets can be set up separated from each other or corner-to-corner only at the
places marked with arrows. If set up is corner-to-corner, maintain at least 40 mm space
to the next cabinet (needed to open the cabinet doors).
Generator cabinet and cable cabinet can also be positioned to the right of the system
control cabinet.
Image system:
Is regularly positioned within the control room (as standard). Its optional positioning in
the equipment room is possible only if this was explicitly indicated to Logistics already
in the time of order.
Cable cabinet (option):
The cable cabinet is required if the excess cable lengths cannot be stored in some other
manner (e.g. under access floor).

Seite
12 von 36
Do not place the cooling set in the examination room because of noise generation
And air circulation
According to the German standard (DIN 6812) an inter-visibility and a voice
communication is required between the patient and the operator.
Display screen workstations
For setting up display screen workstations, take account of the guidelines in the
Display Screen Workstation Directive as well as any national regulations!
Room lighting requirements out of the application of X-ray apparatus
Ambient light in rooms where diagnosis take place on image display devices
(monitors) must meet the following requirements:
- Free of dazzle, controllable, reproducible setting of the lighting intensity
(e.g. dimmer with scale)
- No reflections from windows, lamps and viewing boxes in the usual operating position
of the image display devices.
This is a specification of DIN 6868-57 in Germany, which should also be complied within
all other countries.
In regard to the lighting of rooms for diagnostic imaging and treatment procedures,
the intensity of the lighting in general depends on the type of procedure.
If only X-ray exposures are produced, the requirements for lighting for diagnostic imaging
with image intensifiers apply (50 lx).
When images are displayed on monitors, the possibility of reducing the general lighting
intensity must be provided (30 lx; if necessary, down to 1 lx).
Reflections and glare on the screen must be avoided (DIN 5035-3; EN 12464).
As a rule, therapy rooms require a general lighting with a nominal lighting intensity of
300 lx. This also applies to rooms where patients are treated with physical, radiological
or electromedical procedures.
Network
The individual (Siemens) components support the TCP/IP protocol.
A switched gigabit Ethernet with Autosense Ethernet switches is recommended
(1 Gbit/s in the backbone and 100 Mbit/s on high-end reporting workstations for
review and image distribution AP).
Autosense means that the active network component (switch) automatically detects
whether a terminal unit is connected at 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s or 1 Gbit/s.
The highest possible data throughput is automatically selected.
It should be noted that the necessary network cabling (minimum category 5) as well
as the required network components and connection sockets must be available
on the customer side.

Seite
13 von 36
Siemens Remote Service (SRS) and Network Integration

Siemens AG Healthcare Sector
Siemens Remote Services (SRS) is an efficient way for the
remote maintenance for your medical systems.
Remote diagnostics as well as remote service are providing
highest system availability.
For SRS a broadband or DSL- connection to the internet is
needed.
If an internet connection cannot be realized, an ISDN phone line
can be used with some restrictions.
SRS
Server
Needed:
Internet
(ISDN: phone
line)
Broadband connection (min. 768/128 kBit/s)
Router (For exclusive use with SRS, a router can be

obtained from Siemens without charge)
Flat rate (without time or volume restrictions)
Data protection and security is defined in the Siemens Remote

Service Security Concept.
Customer
Router
Netzwork / Switch
New
System
Existing
System(s)

Network
The Siemens components are supporting the TCP/IP protocol.
Recommended is the use of a 10/100/1000 Mbit/s switched Fast
Ethernet.
Keep in mind that the required network cables (minimum
requirements: CAT 5 TP) must be provided on site. Media
converters are necessary when fiber optic cable is used.
(Not part of the Siemens scope of delivery)
Network connection
To prepare the implementation of the new system into the existing
network environment, the availability of the needed network data at
least two weeks before starting the installation is mandatory.
This is the only way to ensure a seamless integration of the new
system into the workflow of the department.
Seite
14 von 36
Floor space and height (H) of the system components

Measurements in cm, not to scale

Seite
15 von 36
Unit arrangement (Cardiovascular Hybrid OR)

System 30-Arrangement with Artis OR-Table and DCS:
Measurements in cm, not to scale, equipment legend see on page 18

Seite
16 von 36
System 30-Arrangement with Artis OR-table and DCS (e.g. OR-position):


Seite
17 von 36
*1
The shown additional OR-components are only for visualization and are not part of
the unit.

Seite
18 von 36
System 30-Arrangement with Trumpf OR-Table and DCS :


Seite
19 von 36
System 30-Arrangement with Trumpf OR-Table and DCS (e.g. OR-position):


Seite
20 von 36
*1
the unit.

Seite
21 von 36
System 30-Arrangement with Artis OR-Table and Disp lay Boom:


Seite
22 von 36
System 30-Arrangement with Artis OR-Table and Disp lay Boom (e.g. OR-position):

Seite
23 von 36
*1
*2
-
the unit.
Use of Display Booms from non-Siemens Manufacturers following Display Booms
are excepted:
motorized, height-adjustable Display Booms
Display Booms that do not work according to the principle of spring-weight
Display Booms with stationary column

Seite
24 von 36
System 30-Arrangement with Trumpf OR-Table and Dis play Boom:


Seite
25 von 36
System 30-Arrangement with Trumpf OR-Table and Dis play Boom (e.g. OR-position):

Seite
26 von 36
*1
*2
-
the unit.
are excepted:

Seite
27 von 36
System Parallel-Arrangement with Artis OR-Table and DCS:


Seite
28 von 36
System Parallel-Arrangement with Artis OR-Table and DCS (e.g. OR-position):


Seite
29 von 36
*1
the unit.

Seite
30 von 36
System Parallel-Arrangement with Artis OR-Table and display boom:


Seite
31 von 36
System Parallel-Arrangement with Artis OR-Table and display boom (e.g. OR-position):

Seite
32 von 36
*1
*2
-
the unit.
are excepted:

Seite
33 von 36
Safety Area

Seite
34 von 36
Checklist
The following specifications are needed for final planning
Floor plan with details where the equipment will be installed with possible structural
changes if necessary
Floor plan of the rooms above and below the equipment with their use.
Sectional drawing of floor and rooms.
Specification of construction materials and wall thickness, for the calculation of the
structural radiation protection.
Specification of transport ways resp. accessibility of the rooms.
Equipment to be installed.
Release
The Preliminary in the following appendix was made with the available information
from the customer (see checklist).
The customer signs on the preliminary.
This preliminary will be used as the basis for the final planning.
The customer is aware that any changes made after this date could result in additional
expenses being incurred.
Before starting construction it is necessary to have final specification plans made by
Siemens.
Siemens will confirm if the construction site meets Siemens requirements only, if
contractual agreed upon.
All values are for orientation only. We reserve the right to make technical alterations to
the information provided in this document.

Seite
35 von 36
Notizen

Seite
36 von 36
Customer:
Address:
Example of product
Artis zee ceiling (Angio/Card)

Siemens contacts:
Project No.:
SAM No.:
Artis zee ceiling
SAP No.:
PPCC-E Release 2008-03-03
Page 1 of 18
Requirements for Planning

Information given in this PPCC document is meant for the preplanning stage only. Detailed
information is part of the final site specific plan obtained from the Siemens Planning Department.
Site preparation is the customer's responsibility. SIEMENS AG is only responsible for installation
and commissioning of the ordered equipment.
Page
Room Dimensions
Statics
Power Supply
Environment
Transport
10
Planning Example
15
Checklist and Release
17
Notes
18
Preliminary
Separate site specific customer drawing in the appendix of this document
Project No.:
SAM No.:
Artis zee ceiling
SAP No.:
Page 2 of 18
Room Dimensions
Optimum Room
With Basic table
730 x 510 cm
With Peri table, Tilting table and OR table
760 x 510 cm
Full rotation of the C-Arm system ( 135) possible in the head-end park position.
Minimum Room Dimensions

With Basic table
591 x 444 cm
With Peri table, Tilting table and OR table
621 x 444 cm
Park position of the C-Arm systems at the head end possible only laterally
(+ 90 or 90 ). Side change of the C-Arm system possible after moving the
ceiling stand out of the parking position in the foot-end direction.
Table longitudinal movement limited by the room width.
See also Floor space on page 14 and Planning example on page 15.
Project No.:
SAM No.:
Artis zee ceiling
SAP No.:
Page 3 of 18
MH
RH
Room Height (RH) 2700 to 2740 mm. Recommended room height 2710 mm
Measured from the highest point of the finished floor (with covering) to the lowest
point of the ceiling subconstruction.
Here, the area of the ceiling substructure in which the longitudinal rails for the
ceiling stand are installed is the determining factor.
Required Minimum Height (MH) 150 mm in the drop ceiling for corrugated hose holder
and laying cables.
Ceiling subconstruction
(e.g. Unistrut)
Room height
2700 to 2740 mm
Finished floor
(with covering)
300
3300
300
Orientation point
patient table
The crosshatched area is determined by the movement range of the ceiling stand
Max. admissible floor unevenness in the shaded area: 8mm
Project No.:
SAM No.:
Artis zee ceiling
SAP No.:
Page 4 of 18
Statics
Components
Weight
Basic table
452 kg
Peri table
482 kg
Tilting table
530 kg
OR table
550 kg
300 kg
270 kg
Cable cabinet
120 kg
System control cabinet for OR table
125 kg
Ceiling stand for the C-Arm

Ceiling stand DCS 2 with 1 BWD-18-D
Ceiling stand DCS 3 with 2 BWD-18-D
904 kg
242 kg
256 kg
Patient table
The installation plate (509 x 484 mm) is anchored on solid ground by means of
4 Hilti heavy-duty expansion bolts (in scope of delivery).
If necessary, any material in the location of the
mounting plate that does not have the required
load capacity must be replaced with filled concrete.
Minimum quality of the concrete: C20/25
Max. tensile force per mounting point: = 4.5 kN
The max. tension load is calculated with the table
turned/tilted ( 45) and with the tabletop
extended completely towards the head-end position.
The max. tension is determined with
the weight of the patient (200 kg) and
accessories (40 kg) factored in.
Project No.:
SAM No.:
Artis zee ceiling
SAP No.:
Page 5 of 18
Ceiling Substructure
A substructure of Unistrut or comparable support rails installed by the customers
contractor is required.
Ceiling stand for C-Arm

Vertical ceiling load Fxmax = 8.0 kN per mounting point
(= 2 crews, 4.0 kN per screw)
The dynamic load is exerted on each mounting point, because this is a floating
single load.
. Maximum transverse force Fymax = 2.0 kN exerted on the rail.
. Maximum longitudinal force Fzmax: = 4.0 kN exerted on the rail.
Ceiling stand DCS

Vertical ceiling load Fxmax: = 5,4 kN per mounting point.
(= 2 screws; the screws are subject to different loads, max. 4.2 kN each screw)
The dynamic load is exerted on each mounting point, because this is a floating
single load.
Project No.:
SAM No.:
Artis zee ceiling
SAP No.:
Page 6 of 18
Power Supply
Power requirements Generator POLYDOROS A100
Connection value
34.6 kVA
Line impedance
90 m
Power consumption Fluoroscopy

Radiography
8 kVA
160 kVA
Power line
3/N/PE, AC 400 V 10 %, 50/60 Hz 1 Hz
Power requirements System control cabinet

Connection value
24.2 kVA
Power consumption
Power line
8.5 kVA
3/N/PE, AC 400 V 10 %, 50/60 Hz 1 Hz
The installation has to conform to all National Guidelines and Codes.
Project No.:
SAM No.:
Artis zee ceiling
SAP No.:
Page 7 of 18
Environment
Examination
and control room
Temperature range
Relative humidity
15 to 30 C (recommended 22 C)
Image system
Temperature range
Relative humidity
Air flow volume
10 to 35 C
10 C/h
850 m/h
53 dB (A)
Generator
Temperature range
Relative humidity
Air flow volume
10 to 35 C
5 C/h
160 m/h
55 dB (A)
Temperature range
Relative humidity
Air flow volume
15 to 30 C
5 C/h
800 m/h
48 dB (A)
Temperature range
Relative humidity
Air flow volume
10 to 35 C
5 C/h
n.a.
n.a.
Cooling air
Air flow volume
5 to 30 C (frost-free room)
1100 m/h
55 dB (A) at 50 Hz
59 dB (A) at 60 Hz
DCS
Temperature range
Relative humidity
10 to 40 C
Axiom Sensis
Temperature range
Relative humidity
10 to 35 C
System
control cabinet 1
System
control cabinet 2
(for OR table)
Cooling set
(company Klver)
Project No.:
SAM No.:
Artis zee ceiling
SAP No.:
Page 8 of 18
The structural radiation protection depends on the location of the unit and the
function of the surrounding rooms.
By order, the planning departments of Siemens prepares radiation protection
calculation and radiation protection plan.
Transport
The transport route (doors and hallway) requires sufficient dimensions for the
following parts:
- Largest single part:
- Largest crate:
247 x 100 x 190 cm (WxDxH), weight 910 kg

263 x 118 x 207 cm (WxDxH), weight 1175 kg
The door must have a final clearance of 125cm if bed entrance is requested.
Project No.:
SAM No.:
Artis zee ceiling
SAP No.:
Page 9 of 18
Maximum distances between the cable outlets in m
Ceiling
stand
C-Bogen
System
control
cabinet 1
Generator
12.5
System
Control cabinet 1
11.5
SystemControl cabinet 2
2 *2
Image system
17
Control room
distributor
25
Cooling set
*1
*2
*3
*4
23.5
System
control
cabinet 2
Image
system
Control
room
distributor
25 *3
30
Patient
table
14 *1
Ceiling stand
DCS
11.5
Trolley
16 *4
14 *2
24.5
not with OR table

only with OR table
only if image system is not in the control room
6 m from ceiling outlet to trolley
Project No.:
SAM No.:
Artis zee ceiling
SAP No.:
Page 10 of 18
Arrangement of cabinets and components

Generator
cabinet
Cable
cabinet
System
contr: cab.
EQUIPMENT ROOM
Proposal 1
Cooling
set
EQUIPMENT ROOM
Cooling
set
Proposal 2
Generator
cabinet
Cable
cabinet
System
contr: cab.
EXAMINATION ROOM
Proposal 1:
Generator cabinet, system control cabinet(s) and cooling set are located in the
equipment room (due to generation of noise and heat).
Proposal 2:
Generator cabinet and system control cabinet(s) are located in the examination room,
the cooling set in equipment room.
The cabinets can be set up as illustrated. Take note of the following:
The cabinets can be set up separated from each other or corner-to-corner only at the
places marked with arrows. If set up is corner-to-corner, maintain at least 40 mm space
to the next cabinet (needed to open the cabinet doors).
Generator cabinet and cable cabinet can also be positioned to the right of the system
control cabinet(s).
Image system:
Is regularly positioned within the control room (as standard). Its optional positioning in
the equipment room or more than 3.5 m away from the control console is possible only if
this was explicitly indicated to Logistics already in the time of order.
Cable cabinet (option):
The cable cabinet is required if the excess cable lengths cannot be stored in some other
manner (e.g. under access floor).
Project No.:
SAM No.:
Artis zee ceiling
SAP No.:
Page 11 of 18
Do not place the cooling set in the examination room because of noise generation
And air circulation
According to the German standard (DIN 6812) an inter-visibility and a voice
communication is required between the patient and the operator.
Display screen workstations
For setting up display screen workstations, take account of the guidelines in the
Display Screen Workstation Directive as well as any national regulations !
Room lighting
Ambient light in rooms where diagnosis take place on image display devices
(monitors) must meet the following requirements:
- Free of dazzle, controllable, reproducible setting of the lighting intensity
(e.g. dimmer with scale)
- No reflections from windows, lamps and viewing boxes in the usual operating position
of the image display devices.
This is a specification of DIN 6868-57 in Germany, which should also be complied within
all other countries.
In regard to the lighting of rooms for diagnostic imaging and treatment procedures,
the intensity of the lighting in general depends on the type of procedure.
If only X-ray exposures are produced, the requirements for lighting for diagnostic imaging
with image intensifiers apply (50 lx).
When images are displayed on monitors, the possibility of reducing the general lighting
intensity must be provided (30 lx; if necessary, down to 1 lx).
Reflections and glare on the screen must be avoided (DIN 5035-3; EN 12464).
As a rule, therapy rooms require a general lighting with a nominal lighting intensity of
300 lx. This also applies to rooms where patients are treated with physical, radiological
or electromedical procedures.
Network
The individual (Siemens) components support the TCP/IP protocol.
A switched gigabit Ethernet with Autosense Ethernet switches is recommended
(1 Gbit/s in the backbone and 100 Mbit/s on high-end reporting workstations for
review and image distribution AP).
Autosense means that the active network component (switch) automatically detects
whether a terminal unit is connected at 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s or 1 Gbit/s.
The highest possible data throughput is automatically selected.
It should be noted that the necessary network cabling (minimum category 5) as well
as the required network components and connection sockets must be available
on the customer side.
Project No.:
SAM No.:
Artis zee ceiling
SAP No.:
Page 12 of 18
Siemens Remote Service (SRS) and Network Integration

Siemens AG Healthcare Sector
Siemens Remote Services (SRS) is an efficient way for the
remote maintenance for your medical systems.
Remote diagnostics as well as remote service are providing
highest system availability.
For SRS a broadband or DSL- connection to the internet is
needed.
If an internet connection cannot be realized, an ISDN phone line
can be used with some restrictions.
SRS
Server
Needed:
Internet
(ISDN: phone
line)
Broadband connection (min. 768/128 kBit/s)
Router (For exclusive use with SRS, a router can be

obtained from Siemens without charge)
Flat rate (without time or volume restrictions)
Data protection and security is defined in the Siemens Remote

Service Security Concept.
Customer
Router
Network / Switch
New
System
Existing
System(s)
Network
The Siemens components are supporting the TCP/IP protocol.
Recommended is the use of a 10/100/1000 Mbit/s switched Fast
Ethernet.
Keep in mind that the required network cables (minimum
requirements: CAT 5 TP) must be provided on site. Media
converters are necessary when fiber optic cable is used.
(Not part of the Siemens scope of delivery)
Network connection
To prepare the implementation of the new system into the existing
network environment, the availability of the needed network data at
least two weeks before starting the installation is mandatory.
This is the only way to ensure a seamless integration of the new
system into the workflow of the department.
Project No.:
SAM No.:
Artis zee ceiling
SAP No.:
Page 13 of 18
Floor space and height (H) of the system components

Measurements in cm, not to scale
510
730
381
65
80
100
Cooling unit
H = 50
43.4
Service area
Required space
80
100
43.4
160
Project No.:
SAM No.:
Artis zee ceiling
SAP No.:
Page 14 of 18
Planning Example
Measurements in cm, not to scale, legend see next page
590
1.15 1.08 1.10 1.13

1.14 1.09
1.11
1.20
250
1.12
285
CONTROL ROOM
46.2
1.06
C O O R I D O R
265.5
t ravel path
791
1.03
1.01
1.18
1.19
PREPARATION
300
EQUIPMENT ROOM
1.17
1.16
200
Project No.:
SAM No.:
Artis zee ceiling
SAP No.:
Page 15 of 18
Artis zee eiling (Angio/Card) Equipment Legend

Weight (kg), Heat dissipation to the air (W)
Pos.
1.01
1.02
1.03
1.04
1.05
1.06
1.07
1.08
1.09
1.10
1.11
1.12
1.13
1.14
1.15
1.16
1.17
1.18
1.19
1.20
Description
Ceiling stand
Basic table
Digital display M13 on DCS
Control console and ECC I on patient table
MEDRAD Injector on patient table
Ceiling stand DCS 3 with 2 BWD -18-D (live + ref.+ prep.)
Upper body radiation shield, moveable
Console for control elements and monitor
Control room distributor
Workplace Display with keyboard
Reference Display
AXIS image system
ACE
UPS for image system
Control console ECC II
Cooling unit (company Klver)
Cable cabinet
Axiom Sensis (incl. UPS and printer)
Project No.:
SAM No.:
Artis zee ceiling
SAP No.:
kg
904
452
7
4
10
256
71
60
29
10
10
150
6
51
3
300
42
270
120
140
W
200
200
Description
150
optional
optional
100
75
75 optional
1200
100 optional
optional
1000
2400
1600
optional
700 optional
Page 16 of 18
Checklist
The following specifications are needed for final planning
Floor plan with details where the equipment will be installed with possible structural
changes if necessary
Floor plan of the rooms above and below the equipment with their use.
Sectional drawing of floor and rooms.
Specification of construction materials and wall thickness, for the calculation of the
structural radiation protection.
Specification of transport ways respectively accessibility of the rooms.
Equipment to be installed.
Release
The Preliminary in the following appendix was made with the available information
from the customer (see checklist).
The customer signs on the preliminary.
This preliminary will be used as the basis for the final planning.
The customer is aware that any changes made after this date could result in additional
expenses being incurred.
Before starting construction it is necessary to have final specification plans made by
Siemens.
Siemens will confirm if the construction site meets Siemens requirements only, if
contractual agreed upon.
All values are for orientation only. We reserve the right to make technical alterations to
the information provided in this document.
Project No.:
SAM No.:
Artis zee ceiling
SAP No.:
Page 17 of 18
Notes
Project No.:
SAM No.:
Artis zee ceiling
SAP No.:
Page 18 of 18
AMSCO ELECTRIC STEAM

GENERATORS - CES SERIES
APPLICATION
Amsco Electric Steam Generators (CES
Series) provide the high-quality (97%vapor quality) steam needed to power
equipment such as sterilizers, water
stills, utensil sanitizers and water
temperature boosters for washing
equipment. They provide a steam
source when in-house supply is not
available, when an emergency standby
is required, or when a remote location
needs to be served.
When a deionized, distilled or reverse
osmosis water supply (min. resistivity
of 1 megohm/cm) is available, stainless
steel generators can also be used to
supply pure steam.
(Typical only - some details may vary.)
CONSTRUCTION
STERIS furnishes all components
necessary to obtain a complete
working unit, ready for (but not including) installation and connection to the
building utility service lines and the
equipment to be powered.
Heating Section
The pressure vessel is ASME Grade
carbon steel rated for 100 psig. If
selected, 316L stainless steel can be
supplied for use with deionized,
distilled or reverse osmosis water.
Seismic pre-approval; meets

Zone 4 when installed according to
the installation instructions.
STANDARDS
Generator meets the applicable
requirements of the following
standards:
American Society of Mechanical
Engineers Code, Section I, Part
PMB for power boilers and is so
stamped
Underwriters Laboratories
Incorporated
Canadian Standards Association
listings
FEATURES
Openings are provided for water inlet,
drain, steam outlet, gauges, instrumentation and immersion type heating
elements.
The entire heating section is insulated
with two inch thick glass fiber.
The Selections Checked Below Apply To This Equipment

GENERATOR RATING (KW)
30
75
150
40
100
180
60
120
ELECTRICITY*
208 V, 3 Phase 240 V, 3 Phase
380 V, 3 Phase 415 V, 3 Phase
CONSTRUCTION
316L Stainless Steel
Carbon Steel
480 V, 3 Phase
575 V, 3 Phase
* Other voltages are available on special order.
Item
Location(s)
SD-56R18 (6/1/01)
The flanged heaters include .427"

diameter incalloy 800 tubular elements
rated 105 W/in2 brazed into heavy duty
ASME flanges. Each element consists
of 80% nickel, 20% chromium resistance wire surrounded by high density
magnesium oxide insulation. The
elements are repressed to ensure high
density compression of all bends.
The heaters are individually fused for
208, 240, or 480 Volt, 50/60 Hz, 3phase operation as selected.*
Automatic controls operate on
120 Volt, 50/60 Hz electric service.
Operation of the generator is automatic. Standard components include:
Flush system - the generator's
heating section can be manually
flushed. Review local codes before
flushing generator.
Water-level control - energizes the
water pump and supply valve to
ensure proper water level in the
drum. This system uses a bronze or
stainless steel, positive displacement
pump, with drive motor wired for
operation on
120 Volt, 50/60 Hz electric service.
Motor has automatic overload
protection. In addition, it shuts off
power to the heaters if water in the
heating section should fall below a
preset level. System supply valve
withstands hydrostatic test of 300
psig (21.2 kg/cm2) and has a brass
or stainless steel body; non-magnetic, stainless-steel trim and dual
electromagnetic coil are included. A
water-level sight gauge with upper
and lower hand-valve shutoffs is
provided. Sightglass valves are
equipped with ASME rated automatic
shutoff if the sight gauge glass
should break.
Steam pressure controls - generators are supplied with operating and
high limit pressure controls. One (two
for 100-180 kW units) is used for
controlling the operating pressure of
the generator (0-90 psi adjustable
operating range) while the other is
used as a high limit pressure control,
and incorporates
a manual reset.
* Other voltages are available upon special
order.
Electric door interlock - interrupts

the 120 V control circuit whenever
the generator's main electrical door
panel is opened.
reasonable element life, STERIS

recommends the feed water quality
be controlled within the following
parameters:
Auxiliary low water cut-off - a

safety backup protection that turns
off the power to the heating
element(s) in the event of a low water
level control failure.
For Carbon Steel Generators
Water sensing system - if an

equipment malfunction occurs and
the outlet should fill with water, the
water sensing system closes the
steam outlet, preventing liquid from
entering service lines to user
devices. The system also activates a
visual alarm, alerting operator of
malfunction.
The boiler is fully insulated and
equipped with a steel jacket having a
baked enamel finish. Plumbing and
control devices are copper alloy or
stainless steel.
The boiler is equipped with an ON-OFF
control switch and pilot light.
If stainless steel construction is
selected, all components in contact
with feedwater and steam are 316L
stainless steel or equal.
PERFORMANCE
CAPABILITIES
Electric steam generators can provide
the high pressure steam (90 psig max.)
required for either single or multiple
equipment arrangements. Available
models are listed in
Engineering Data, next page.
NOTES
1. Pipe sizes shown indicate terminal
outlets only. Building service lines,
provided by others, must supply
the specified pressures and flow
rates.
2. STERIS recommends supplying hot
water at 140F (60C) (maximum
150F [60C]) to the generator to
minimize heat-up time and conserve electricity; cold water at 70F
(21C) may be substituted, but only
with sacrifice of heat-up time. For
proper boiler operation and
2
Nominal
Condition
Conditions
Temperature
as supplied
Total Hardness
as CaCO3*
0-17 mg/L
Total Dissolved
Solids
50-150 mg/L
Total Alkalinity
as CaCO3
50-100 mg/L
pH
6.8-7.5
Total Silica
0.1 - 1.0 mg/L
Resistivity ohms/cm**
2000-6000
Max.
Conditions
140F (60C)
130 mg/L
250 mg/L
180 mg/L
6.5-8.5
2.5 mg/L
26000
For Stainless Steel Generators:

requires deionized, distilled or
reverse osmosis water with
minimum resistivity of 1 megohm/
cm. Do not connect tap water to
stainless steel generators. Use of
water not meeting the required
feedwater quality will invalidate the
warranty and is a violation of ASME
Boiler Codes.
3. Clearances shown are minimal for
installing and servicing the equipment.
4. Disconnect switches (by others)
should be installed in electric
supply lines near the equipment.
Water in and steam out lines should
also be equipped with independent
shut-off valves.
5. STERIS recommends that steam
generating equipment be maintained and operated in an area
where temperature does not
exceed 100F (38C).
6. Other voltage specifications are
available through special order.
* 17.1 mg/L = 1 grain hardness
** WARNING - BURN HAZARD: Sterilizer operator
may be severely burned by scalding water if the
water level control malfunctions. The steam
generator level control may malfunction if the
supply water exceeds 26,000 ohms/cm (38.5
micro-mhos conductivity min.). Do not connect
to treated water (e.g., distilled, reverse osmosis,
deionized) unless water resistivity is determined
to be acceptable. If water exceeds 26,000
ohms/cm, contact STERIS Engineering Service
for information concerning modifications
required to the generator control system.
ENGINEERING DATA
Rating (kW)
30
40
60
75
100
120
150
180
Developed Boiler Horsepower
3.1
4.1
6.1
7.7
10.4
12.2
15.3
18.4
89.3
(40.6)
119
(54.1)
178.5
(81.1)
223
(101.4)
297.5
(135.2)
357
(162.3)
446.1
(202.8)
535.5
(243.4)
95.2
(43.3)
127
(57.7)
190.5
(86.6)
238.1
(108.2)
317.5
(144.3)
381.1
(173.2)
476.3
(216.5)
571.5
(259.8)
Gross BTU Output

(BTU/hr)
102,360
136,480
204,720
255,900
348,024
409,440
511,800
614,160
Operating Weight
lbs (kg)
388
(176)
393
(179)
458
(208)
468
(213)
842
(383)
1002
(456)
1002
(456)
1007
(458)
208 V - 3-Phase (amp/ph)
83
111
167
208
278
333
417
500
72
96
144
186
241
289
361
433
36
48
72
90
123
144
180
217
46
61
91
114
152
182
228
274
42
56
84
104
139
167
209
250
30
40
60
75
100
121
151
180
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
110
150
225
300
400
450
600
700
100
125
200
250
350
400
500
600
50
60
90
125
150
200
250
300
60
80
125
150
200
250
300
350
60
80
110
150
175
225
300
350
40
50
80
100
125
175
200
250
208 V - 3-Phase
2/0
250 or
6-1/0
400 or
6-2/0
500 or
6-3/0
900 or
6-250
6-400
6-500
240 V - 3-Phase
1/0
4/0
300 or
6-1/0
500 or
6-3/0
700 or
6-4/0
3-300
6-400
480 V - 3-Phase
1/0
2/0
4/0
300 or
6-1/0
400 or
6-2/0
380 V - 3-Phase
1/0
2/0
3/0
300 or
6-1/0
400 or
6-2/0
500 or
6-3/0
415 V - 3-Phase
2/0
3/0
250 or
6-1/0
400 or
6-2/0
500 or
6-3/0
575 V - 3-Phase
1/0
3/0
4/0
300 or
6-1/0
Water Consumption -- gph

(litres per hour) at 70 psig
water inlet 140F (60C)
12
(46)
16
(60)
25
(95)
31
(118)
43
(163)
51
(194)
63
(239)
76
(289)
Heat Loss -- BTU/hr at 70F

(21C); continuous operation
1750
1750
2600
3500
4400
4800
4800
4800
Generator Steam Output -- lbs/hr (kg/hr)

70F (21C) feedwater - 80 psig
operating pressure
140F (60C) feedwater - 80 psig
operating pressure
Electrical Requirements:
Heaters:
Controls & Pump Motor:

120 V - 1Phase
Fuse Breaker Size:
Input Wire Size**
** Minimum wire type - AWG (MCM) 90C CU (copper) wire only.
Steam Outlet (S)

For 30 to 75 kW generators:
3/4" NPT; for 100 to 180 kW
Generators: 1" NPT.
UTILITY REQUIREMENTS
Waste (W)
For 30 to 180 kW generators:
1" NPT.
Electrical (E2)
60 to 180 kW generators: 208, 240,
or 480 Volt, 3-Phase, 50/60 Hz.
Electrical (E1)
30 to 40 kW generators: 208,
240, or 480 Volt, 3-Phase, 50/60 Hz.
Hot Water (HW)

1/2" NPT; 20 to 50 psig (1.41 to
3.52 kg/cm2, dynamic); 140F (60C)
minimum - see Note 2.
Electrical (E3)
120 Volt, 15 Amp, 1-Phase 50/60 Hz
service for control and pump motor.
. . .CHECK LOCAL CODES. . .
DIMENSIONS - inches (mm)

18" * (457 mm)
18" *
(457 mm)
Generator
Size (kW)
18" *
(457 mm)
Overall Overall
Length Width
30 to75 kW
44
(1117)
29
(736)
30
(775)
36
(914)
24-1/4
(616)
15
(381)
20
(508)
100 to 180 kW
60
(1524)
33
(838)
34-1/4
(870)
51
(1295)
27-1/4
(692)
18
(457)
35
(889)
A
Overall
Height
Cabinet Cabinet Cabinet Service

Height Length Width Clearance
*Service Clearance
18" *
(457 mm)
**Pump Location - 10 to 20 kW Units

***Pump Location - 30 to 180 kW Units
B
E
E3
E1
D
E2
E2
HW
**
HW
***
W
FRONT VIEW
SIDE VIEW
REAR VIEW
NOTE: Because of STERIS's continuing program of research and development, all specifications and descriptions are subject to change
without notice. Some options may affect utility consumptions. Obtain approved drawings for design, and installation.
For further information, please contact:

STERIS Corporation
5960 Heisley Road
Mentor, OH 44060-1834 USA
440-354-2600 800-548-4873
www.steris.com
SD-56R18 2001, STERIS Corporation All rights reserved. MC (6/1/01)
This data is intended for the exclusive use of STERIS customers, including
architects or designers. Reproduction in whole or in part by others is prohibited.
CUSTOMER:
REFERENCE:
MODEL 833 HC
RIGHT HAND HINGED DOOR,

PIT MOUNTED VACUUM/GRAVITY
STEAM STERILIZERS FOR
HEALTHCARE APPLICATIONS
PRODUCT SPECIFICATION
PRODUCT
The Model 833HC Vacuum/Gravity Steam Sterilizer employs
both gravity/downward displacement with positive pulse
conditioning and pressure/vacuum pulsing for dynamic air
removal. Up to 14 cycles can be accessed in two easy steps.
Custom cycle names can be designated for each cycle during
installation. All cycle phases are sequenced and monitored by
the control system, providing both audible and visual notification of deviation from certain operating parameters.
APPLICATION
For general-purpose gravity or vacuum steam sterilization of
hospital instruments and supplies. The selectable temperature
range is from 250F to 275F (121C to 135C). Typical
applications include wrapped and unwrapped porous and
non-porous hard goods and fabric packs.
KEY FEATURES
CHAMBER DIMENSIONS
26.5'' (672 mm) wide x 62'' (1575 mm) high
42" (1067 mm) 39.6 Cu Ft (1120L)
76" (1930 mm) 72.0 Cu Ft (2040L)
SINGLE DOOR DESIGNATION,
RECESSED MOUNTED
Right Hand Hinged, Left Hand Control Column
DOUBLE DOOR DESIGNATION,
RECESSED BOTH ENDS
Control End (CE) Door Right Hand Swing, Left Hand
Control Column, Remote End (RE) door swing and
column opposite
Printer Location
Control End (CE)
Remote end (RE)
CONTROL PANEL LOCATION
On Unit
Wall Mounted
STEAM SOURCE
House steam
LANGUAGE (SELECT ONE)

ENGLISH
FRENCH
SPANISH
OPTIONS
Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS). Provides 115V power
for up to 30 minutes to complete a cycle in process.
Air Compressor
ACCESSORIES
4003 Floor Loading Cart
Qty. ____________
4003RC Floor Loading Cart
Qty. ____________
4004 Transfer Carriage
Qty. ____________
CYCLE DOCUMENTATION
QUALITY STATEMENT
Confidence in the Getinge Group is the most important quality
criterion. This must be the hallmark of all our external and
internal commitments, activities and products. Products and
services supplied by Getinge must conform to the agreed
terms and expectations to ensure recommendations for further
business. The achievement of these quality goals is the basis
for a continued competitive and successful enterprise.
STANDARDS AND CODES
The sterilizer shall comply with or meet the requirements of:
ASME (Section VIII, Division 1) Code for Pressure Vessels
Canadian Registration Number (CRN) Pressure Vessel
Design
Uniform Plumbing Code
ETL Listed to UL 61010A-1 and UL 61010A-2-041 by
Intertek Testing Services
ETL Listed to IEC 61010-1 and IEC 61010-2-041 by Intertek
Testing Services
cETL Listed to CSA C22.2 Nos. 1010.1 and 1010.2.041 by
Seismic Anchoring Requirements per California Building
Code
Cycle Performance Validated to ANSI/AAMI ST8
MICROCOMPUTER CONTROLS
Getinge Sterilizers employ a Hitachi 20 MHz microprocessor
on a dedicated controller (CPU) with 8 MB of RAM. The control
panel consists of an operator interface panel (called OP30), a
thermal printer, mechanical chamber and jacket pressure
gauges, status indicators, active touch sensitive switches, and
controls On/Off switch. A key lock is provided to insure all door
power is disconnected when entering the chamber.
Controls are located next to the door in a vertical column for
convenience. If specified, the OP30 operator interface panel
can be located remotely from the sterilizer with up to 32.8 feet
(10 m) of cable. An RS 232 port is provided for serial communications for central data collection or remote service analysis
and is ready for T-DOC connection. The OP30 operator
interface panel is a durable 1/4 VGA 5.7 inch diagonal color
screen with 320 x 240 pixels. Below the screen are five soft
keys to access other screens or displays and to make changes
to cycle parameters.
A screen saver extends the life of the back lit LCD. Touching
any key illuminates and reactivates the display. Push-button
switches are provided for door seal/unseal and cycle start.
International symbols with descriptive words help identify
function. Audible and visible operator feedback is provided
when a selection is made or a fault message is displayed.
Temperature can be set, controlled and displayed in degrees
Celsius or Fahrenheit and pressure in psia, bar or kPa. Double
door models have a printer at one end and complete OP30
Operator Interface display at both ends of the sterilizer for full
control capabilities at either door.
The printer documents cycle performance using special

thermal paper for a permanent record. Thermal printing allows
for quiet operation. At cycle completion, a cycle performance
record is printed. Paper is replaced by a drop in and quick
feed method and the printed strips can be either accumulated
on an automatic take-up reel, or torn off for individual cycle
storage. A last cycle duplicate print and paper feed switch is
provided. The printer is located on the control panel and
documents the following on a 200-dpi dot matrix printer (1.88''
[47.6 mm] wide print width):
Process start time and date, sterilizer name and number and
total cycle count
Cycle selected with time and temperature, with other adjustable parameters identified
Parameter Check provides an estimated numeric process
lethality
Cycle phase transition points, temperature, pressure and
total cycle time
Process fault information messages with time of occurrence
Summary verification of time at selected temperature
(min/max exposure values and daily cycle number)
End of cycle message with real time documented
Cycle verification signature line
OP30 Operator Interface Features
The OP30 color screen is divided into specific sections to
display selection and performance information in a consistent
manner. The top section identifies the time and temperature
selected for the cycle. Below that is the type of cycle selected.
The middle portion provides a choice of three screens to view
actual, real time cycle information. Pop-up dialog boxes to
change values appear within parameter selection screens to
implement changes. A Parameter Check feature estimates
the time and temperature process lethality and if values are
selected below the factory recommended values, a message
notifies the operator of Low Cycle values. The Parameter
Check notice is recorded on the printed strip. Cycle parameters are password protected.
The three screens are:
Detail. Displays real time process information in text form.

00:03:00
275.0 F
00:20:00
Exposure Time
Exposure Temp
Drying Time
P1 vac PREVAC1
01 STANDBY
Chamber Temp
84.4 F
Cham Press/PSIG
0.00 PSI
Jacket Temp
274.9 F
Atmosphere PSIA
14.25 PSI
Chamber PSIA
14.25 PSI
Steam Table Diff
-13.28 PSI
Exp. Temp Max
275.6 F
SETUP
The temperature of the discharge water is controlled by a

temperature device to be less than 140F (60C). This switch
also conserves water usage. The chamber drain is continuously monitored for the presence of water during a cycle. If
water is detected and cannot be automatically corrected, a
water in drain alarm alerts the operator.
00:00:00
01:12:44
SELECT
CYCLE
PARAMETER
UNSEAL
1. Detail Screen, vac cycle, 3 min exp @275F w/20 min dry
selected (pre cycle start).
Page 2 of 12
Plot Graph. Displays cycle temperature and pressure in

colored graph during a cycle.
00:10:00
135.0 C
00:20:00
Exposure Time
Exposure Temp
Drying Time
P8 grv GRAVITY1
02 DRYING
00:38:15
00:15:00
Chamber Temp
Chamber PSIA
87.4
0.34
C
PSI
TIME
00:50
SELECT
CYCLE
SETUP
PARAMETER
MORE
2. Plot Graph w/full plot, captured near the end of the cycle.
Gravity, 10 min exp @135C w/20 vac dry selected.
The lower portion of the screen provides text alarm messages

and non-critical system messages, both using color displays,
and soft key identifications. Navigating the various screens is
accomplished by use of soft keys, directional arrows to move
the cursor and change values, and the Enter key. Up to 14
factory recommended cycles are available. Time and temperature can be changed using a quick edit feature. Each change
prompts operator acceptance by the use of a Yes/No
acknowledgement and a Save soft key.
For Supervisor access, an alpha-numeric display provides
levels of access for individual operators and service. Using the
soft key labeled Setup provides the ability to:
select operating screens
adjust system menu for setting the time and date and establish users
establish passwords for each operator
access the about selection to identify the model and system
software number
choose date format, and temperature and pressure measurement
The supervisor can also select a Utilities Control feature, which
provides a seven-day timer for programmed startup and
shutdown of the sterilizer. The Utilities Control system shuts off
water and steam to the unit to conserve energy. Cycles running
beyond the programmed shutoff time will be completed.
Bar Graph. Displays temperature and pressure in a bar

graph, with a large, easy to read, time remaining to the end
of the cycle (averages the previous cycles for each cycle type).
P1
02
00:03:00
275.0 F
Exposure Time
Exposure Temp
00:16:00
Drying Time
vac PREVAC1
EXPOSURE
00:18:45
00:02:00
CHAMBER TEMP
CHAMBER PSIA
275.7 F
45.62 PSI
20
The factory recommended cycles are:

MODEL 833HC (14 cycles total)
3 Gravity cycles of 30 minutes exposure at 250F (121C)
with 30 minutes dry time
6 Vacuum cycles of 3 minutes exposure at 275F (135C),
with 16 minute minimum dry time for mixed loads of
wrapped instruments and linens
1 Bowie-Dick Test cycle of 3.5 minutes exposure at 273F
(134C) with zero dry time
1 Vacuum Leak Test cycle run at 268F (131C)
Note: Selection of time and temperatures other than factory
recommendations require user verification of the cycle efficacy.
Factory recommended cycles were validated to ANSI/AAMI ST8.
REMAINING TIME
PERFORMANCE
SETUP
SELECT
CYCLE
PARAMETER
MORE
3. Bar graph captured during the Dry phase. Countdown timer

provides time to cycle complete.
When installed and connected to specified utility services, the

system provides accurate and repeatable performance. During
the timed exposure phase, the temperature will be controlled
by the chamber sensor at 0.9F (0.5C) above the set point
(0.2C). Temperature selectivity is in 0.1F (0.1C) increments.
Timing functions are selectable in one-second increments, and
accuracy is within 0.04%. Temperature is controlled by a time
proportioning continuous algorithm, called Proportional
Integral (PI). A battery with a 10 year life holds programmed
cycle values in memory. In the event of a power interruption,
current cycle status is stored for up to 1 minute.
Page 3 of 12
CYCLE PROGRESSION
Gravity/Wrapped Goods (pressure pulse preconditioning)
a. Conditioningsteam flows into the chamber for a timed
period, followed by a series of positive pressure pulses to
remove chamber air.
b. Heat-Upto selected temperature.
c. Exposureselected chamber temperature is maintained
and timed.
d. Exhaustchamber vented to atmospheric pressure.
e. Dryfiltered air is drawn through chamber for the duration of time selected. (Either Gravity or Vacuum Dry is
selectable; Vacuum Dry is recommended.)
f. Cycle Completesignaled by a tone, display message
and light.
Prevac/ Wrapped Goods (vacuum/pressure pulsing
preconditioning)
period, followed by a series of pressure/vacuum pulses to
remove chamber air.
c. Exposureselected chamber temperature is attained
and timed.
e. Drya vacuum is created for the duration of the time
selected. Filtered air is admitted at the end of the drying
time.
f. Cycle Completesignaled by a tone, light and display
message.
CONSTRUCTION
The chamber is constructed of an inner shell reinforced by a
series of U channels that form the outer jacket of the
chamber. The gasket ring and backhead (on single door
models) are formed and welded to the chamber body.
Chamber and door material is 6 mm (0.236'') thick and are
constructed of Stainless Steel, Type SA240 Gr. 316Ti. The
jacket material is also 316Ti. The interior chamber finish is
polished to a high luster finish. All pressure vessel construction
meets ASME code requirements for working pressures up to
45 psig (310 kPa). The gasket ring holds a continuous, onepiece silicone gasket, 0.787'' (20 mm) in diameter. The body
assembly is thermally insulated with 1.5'' fiberglass insulation
and is double thick between the jacket U channels.
HINGED DOOR
The door operation is powered by an electric motor and is
actuated by a switch. The open motion is in two steps. First,
the door pivots up to clear the door locking pins and finished
floor, then swings open. The door will stop automatically if an
obstruction is encountered. In an emergency, the power door
can be opened manually by a qualified technician. At the
beginning of the cycle, steam pressure behind the gasket
automatically seals the door and retracts automatically at the
end of the cycle. Sealing is positive and consistent. The gasket
is recessed for added protection and long life. Once the cycle
begins and the chamber is pressurized, the door cannot be
opened. A safety switch prevents steam from entering the
chamber when the door is not in the closed and sealed
position. The door is insulated with fiberglass insulation and
covered with a stainless steel panel.
PANELING
The control panel and paneling is constructed of nominal
0.050'' (1.27 mm) 300 series #3 brushed finished stainless
steel and is hinged for easy access to electronic components.
The trim panels are built-in to fit within a recessed wall.
WARRANTY
Getinge USA, Inc. warrants that each sterilizer is carefully
tested, inspected and leaves the factory in proper working
condition, free from visible defects. Sterilizers are warranted for
one year from the start of the warranty, including parts and
labor (excluding expendable parts). The ASME pressure vessel
is further warranted to the original owner against structural
failure for a period of 15 years from the date of initial operation.
See warranty pamphlet for complete details.
A steam baffle is provided to prevent condensation from

wetting the load. An extra threaded opening permits passage
of thermocouple leads to monitor interior and load temperatures. Steam connection to the chamber and jacket are 316L
material. A manual gasket retract valve is provided for
emergency chamber access.
Page 4 of 12
Page 5 of 12
Page 6 of 12
Page 7 of 12
Page 8 of 12
Page 9 of 12
Page 10 of 12
Page 11 of 12
Getinge is the worlds leading provider of solutions for effective

cleaning, disinfection and sterilization in the healthcare and life
science sectors. We are dedicated to helping our customers
provide better care at a lower cost. We do this by offering
well-thought-through and customized solutions. This means
that we are with our customers all the way from architectural
planning and education to traceability and support with
complete solutions, long-term commitment and global presence.
Getinge Always with you.
Getinge USA, Inc

1777 East Henrietta Road
Rochester, New York 14623-3133
USA
Phone: (800) 475-9040
Fax:
(585) 272-5033
info@getingeusa.com
www.getinge.com
www.getinge.com
Getinge Canada Ltd.

1575 South Gateway Road, Unit C
Mississauga, Ontario L4W 5J1
Canada
Phone: (905) 629-8777
info@getingeusa.com
www.getinge.com
HC_ST_PS_833RightHandPitMounted_0710_EN_US
is aare
registered
trademark.
in U.S.A.
the actual
actual products
product may
DS833HC RHPM 1209
ARJO, GETINGE GETiNGE
and MAQUET
registered
trademarks.Printed
Printed
in U.S.A. Getinge
Getingeisisconstantly
constantlyreviewing
reviewing its
its products
products for
for improvements.
improvements. Consequently,
Consequently, the
may differ
differ sightly
slightly from
from the
the products
products pictured
pictured and
and described
described here.
here.
COMPLETE SOLUTIONS FOR INFECTION CONTROL
Model 833HC
Right Hand Hinged Door,

Floor Mounted Vacuum/Gravity
Steam Sterilizers for Healthcare
Applications
data and specifications
PRODUCT
APPLICATION
hospital instruments and supplies. The selectable temperature range is from 250F to 275F (121C to 135C). Typical
CHAMBER DIMENSIONS
26.5'' (672 mm) wide x 62'' (1575 mm) high
42" (1067 mm) 39.6 Cu Ft (1120L)
76" (1930 mm) 72.0 Cu Ft (2040L)

RECESSED MOUNTED

RECESSED BOTH ENDS
Control End (CE) Door Right Hand Swing, Left Hand
column opposite
Printer Location
Control End (CE)
Remote end (RE)

On Unit
Wall Mounted
MOUNTING
Floor Mounted with Scissors Lift
Floor Mounted for use with Transfer Carriage

ENGLISH
FRENCH
SPANISH
OPTIONS
Air Compressor
ACCESSORIES
STEAM SOURCE
House steam
Qty. ____________
Qty. ____________
Qty. ____________
STANDARDS AND CODES

Design
Testing Services
Code
gauges, status indicators, active touch sensitive switches,
and controls On/Off switch. A key lock is provided to insure all
door power is disconnected when entering the chamber.
Celsius or Fahrenheit and pressure in psia, bar or kPa.
Double door models have a printer at one end and complete
OP30 Operator Interface display at both ends of the sterilizer
for full control capabilities at either door.
CYCLE DOCUMENTATION

feed method and the printed strips can be either
accumulated on an automatic take-up reel, or torn off for
individual cycle storage. A last cycle duplicate print and
paper feed switch is provided. The printer is located on the
control panel and documents the following on a 200-dpi dot
matrix printer (1.88'' [47.6 mm] wide print width):
Process start time and date, sterilizer name and number
and total cycle count
lethality
total cycle time

00:03:00
275.0 F
00:20:00
Exposure Time
Exposure Temp
Drying Time
P1 vac PREVAC1
01 STANDBY
00:00:00
01:12:44
Chamber Temp
84.4 F
Cham Press/PSIG
0.00 PSI
Jacket Temp
274.9 F
Atmosphere PSIA
14.25 PSI
Chamber PSIA
14.25 PSI
Steam Table Diff
-13.28 PSI
Exp. Temp Max
275.6 F
SETUP
SELECT
CYCLE
PARAMETER
UNSEAL

00:10:00
135.0 C
00:20:00
Exposure Time
Exposure Temp
Drying Time
P8 grv GRAVITY1
02 DRYING
00:38:15
00:15:00
Chamber Temp
Chamber PSIA
87.4
0.34
C
PSI
TIME
00:50
SELECT
CYCLE
SETUP
PARAMETER
MORE

factory recommended cycles are available. Time and temperature can be changed using a quick edit feature. Each
change prompts operator acceptance by the use of a Yes/No
levels of access for individual operators and service. Using
the soft key labeled Setup provides the ability to:
software number
The supervisor can also select a Utilities Control feature,
which provides a seven-day timer for programmed startup and
shutdown of the sterilizer. The Utilities Control system shuts
off water and steam to the unit to conserve energy. Cycles running beyond the programmed shutoff time will be completed.

graph, with a large, easy to read, time remaining to the end of
the cycle (averages the previous cycles for each cycle type).
P1
02
00:03:00
275.0 F
Exposure Time
Exposure Temp
00:16:00
Drying Time
vac PREVAC1
EXPOSURE
00:18:45
00:02:00
CHAMBER TEMP
CHAMBER PSIA
275.7 F
45.62 PSI
20

REMAINING TIME
PERFORMANCE
SETUP
SELECT
CYCLE
PARAMETER
MORE


system provides accurate and repeatable performance.
During the timed exposure phase, the temperature will be
controlled by the chamber sensor at 0.9F (0.5C) above the
set point (0.2C). Temperature selectivity is in 0.1F (0.1C)
increments. Timing functions are selectable in one-second
increments, and accuracy is within 0.04%. Temperature is
controlled by a time proportioning continuous algorithm,
called Proportional Integral (PI). A battery with a 10 year life
holds programmed cycle values in memory. In the event of
a power interruption, current cycle status is stored for up to
1 minute.
CYCLE PROGRESSION
Gravity / Wrapped Goods (pressure pulse preconditioning)
remove chamber air.
c. Exposure selected chamber temperature is maintained and timed.
and light.
Prevac / Wrapped Goods (vacuum / pressure pulsing
preconditioning)
period, followed by a series of pressure/vacuum pulses
to remove chamber air.
c. Exposure selected chamber temperature is attained
and timed.
e. Dry a vacuum is created for the duration of the time
time.
message.
CONSTRUCTION
polished to a high luster finish. All pressure vessel
construction meets ASME code requirements for working
pressures up to 45 psig (310 kPa). The gasket ring holds a
continuous, one-piece silicone gasket, 0.787'' (20 mm) in
diameter. The body assembly is thermally insulated with 1.5''
fiberglass insulation and is double thick between the jacket
U channels.

HINGED DOOR
end of the cycle. Sealing is positive and consistent. The
gasket is recessed for added protection and long life. Once
the cycle begins and the chamber is pressurized, the door
cannot be opened. A safety switch prevents steam from
entering the chamber when the door is not in the closed and
sealed position. The door is insulated with fiberglass insulation and covered with a stainless steel panel.
PANELING
WARRANTY
condition, free from visible defects. Sterilizers are warranted
for one year from the start of the warranty, including parts and
labor (excluding expendable parts). The ASME pressure
vessel is further warranted to the original owner against
structural failure for a period of 15 years from the date of initial
operation. See warranty pamphlet for complete details.
Getinge is constantly reviewing its products for improvements. Consequently, the actual product may differ slightly from the product pictured and described here.
Printed in U.S.A.
Arjo, Getinge and MAQUET are registered trademarks.
DS833HC RHFM 0206
Getinge USA, Inc.

U.S.A.
Phone: (800) 475-9040
Fax: (585) 272-5033
Email: info@getingeusa.com
www.getingeusa.com
THE GETINGE GROUP is a leading global provider of equipment

and systems that contribute to quality enhancement and cost
efficiency within healthcare and life sciences. Equipment, services
and technologies are supplied under the brands ARJO for patient
hygiene, patient handling and wound care, GETINGE for infection
control and prevention within healthcare and life science and MAQUET
for surgical workplaces, cardiopulmonary and critical care.
CUSTOMER:
REFERENCE:
MODEL 833 HC
LEFT HAND HINGED DOOR,

FLOOR MOUNTED VACUUM/GRAVITY
PRODUCT
APPLICATION
range is from 230F to 275F (110C to 135C) and from
219F to 275F (104C to 135C) for liquid cycles. Typical
non-porous hard goods, gowns or towel packs.
KEY FEATURES
CHAMBER DIMENSIONS
26.5'' (672 mm) wide x 62'' (1575 mm) high
42" (1067 mm) 39.6 Cu Ft (1120L)
76" (1930 mm) 72.0 Cu Ft (2040L)
RECESSED MOUNTED
Left Hand Hinged, Right Hand Control Column
RECESSED BOTH ENDS
Control End (CE) Door Left Hand Swing, Right Hand
column opposite
Printer Location
Control End (CE)
Remote end (RE)
On Unit
Wall Mounted
MOUNTING
Floor Mounted with Scissors Lift
Floor Mounted for use with Transfer Carriage
STEAM SOURCE
House steam
ENGLISH
FRENCH
SPANISH
OPTIONS
Air Compressor
ACCESSORIES
Qty. ____________
Qty. ____________
Qty. ____________
CYCLE DOCUMENTATION
QUALITY STATEMENT
STANDARDS AND CODES
Design

ETL Listed to IEC 61010-1 and IEC 61010-2-041 by
cETL Listed to CSA C22.2 Nos. 1010.1 and 1010.2.041
by Intertek Testing Services
Code


Process start time and date, sterilizer name and number
and total cycle count
Cycle selected with time and temperature, with other
adjustable parameters identified
Parameter Check provides an estimated numeric
process lethality
total cycle time
Process fault information messages with time of
occurrence
OP30 OPERATOR INTERFACE FEATURES

00:03:00
275.0 F
00:20:00
Exposure Time
Exposure Temp
Drying Time
P1 vac PREVAC1
01 STANDBY
00:00:00
01:12:44
Chamber Temp
84.4 F
Cham Press/PSIG
0.00 PSI
Jacket Temp
274.9 F
Atmosphere PSIA
14.25 PSI
Chamber PSIA
14.25 PSI
Steam Table Diff
-13.28 PSI
Exp. Temp Max
275.6 F
SETUP
SELECT
CYCLE
PARAMETER
UNSEAL
Page 2 of 12

00:10:00
135.0 C
00:20:00
Exposure Time
Exposure Temp
Drying Time
P8 grv GRAVITY1
02 DRYING
00:38:15
00:15:00
Chamber Temp
Chamber PSIA
87.4
0.34
C
PSI
TIME
00:50
SELECT
CYCLE
SETUP
PARAMETER
MORE


adjust system menu for setting the time and date and
establish users

access the about selection to identify the model and
system software number
choose date format, and temperature and pressure
measurement

P1
02
00:03:00
275.0 F
Exposure Time
Exposure Temp
00:16:00
Drying Time
vac PREVAC1
EXPOSURE
00:18:45
00:02:00
CHAMBER TEMP
CHAMBER PSIA
275.7 F
45.62 PSI
20
SELECT
CYCLE
PARAMETER


REMAINING TIME
SETUP
MORE

PERFORMANCE
Page 3 of 12
CYCLE PROGRESSION

a. Conditioningsteam flows into the chamber for a
timed period, followed by a series of positive pressure
pulses to remove chamber air.
c. Exposureselected chamber temperature is maintained and timed.
e. Dryfiltered air is drawn through chamber for the
duration of time selected. (Either Gravity or Vacuum Dry
is selectable; Vacuum Dry is recommended.)
and light.
Prevac/Wrapped Goods (vacuum/pressure pulsing

preconditioning)
a. Conditioningsteam flows into the chamber for a
timed period, followed by a series of pressure/vacuum
and timed.
time.
message.
CONSTRUCTION

45 psig (310 kPa). The gasket ring holds a continuous, onepiece silicone gasket, 0.787'' (20mm) in diameter. The body
HINGED DOOR
PANELING
WARRANTY

Page 4 of 12
Page 5 of 12
Page 6 of 12
Page 7 of 12
Page 8 of 12
Page 9 of 12
Page 10 of 12
Page 11 of 12
UI
Getinge is constantly reviewing its products for improvements. Consequently, the actual products may differ slightly from the products pictured and described here.
EQ
E
N
RT
HOW
NG
NO
NI
W-
TRAI
TR
ACEABILITY
DS833HC LHFM 1007
ARJO, GETINGE and MAQUET are registered trademarks.
Printed in U.S.A.
Getinge provides complete solutions for effective and

efficient cleaning, disinfection and sterilization in the
healthcare and life science sectors. Our know-how
comprises everything from architectural planning,
production and handling equipment, to systems for
full traceability of sterile goods. Our commitment
covers expert advice, training and long-term technical
support.
Getinge USA, Inc.

U.S.A.
Phone: (800) 475-9040
Fax:
(585) 272-5033
info@getingeusa.com www.getingeusa.com
THE GETINGE GROUP is a leading global provider of equipment and

systems that contribute to quality enhancement and cost efficiency within
healthcare and life sciences. Equipment, services and technologies are
supplied under the brands ARJO for patient hygiene, patient handling and
wound care, GETINGE for infection control and prevention within healthcare
and life science and MAQUET for surgical workplaces, cardiopulmonary
and critical care.
CUSTOMER:
REFERENCE:
MODEL 833 HC
LEFT HAND HINGED DOOR,

PIT MOUNTED VACUUM/GRAVITY
PRODUCT
APPLICATION
range is from 250F to 275F (121C to 135C). Typical
KEY FEATURES
CHAMBER DIMENSIONS
26.5'' (672 mm) wide x 62'' (1575 mm) high
42" (1067 mm) 39.6 Cu Ft (1120L)
76" (1930 mm) 72.0 Cu Ft (2040L)
RECESSED MOUNTED
RECESSED BOTH ENDS
Control End (CE) Door Left Hand Swing, Right Hand
column opposite
Printer Location
Control End (CE)
Remote end (RE)
On Unit
Wall Mounted
STEAM SOURCE
House steam

ENGLISH
FRENCH
SPANISH
OPTIONS
Air Compressor
ACCESSORIES
Qty. ____________
Qty. ____________
Qty. ____________
CYCLE DOCUMENTATION
QUALITY STATEMENT
STANDARDS AND CODES
Design
Testing Services
Code

Process start time and date, sterilizer name and number and
total cycle count
lethality
total cycle time

00:03:00
275.0 F
00:20:00
Exposure Time
Exposure Temp
Drying Time
P1 vac PREVAC1
01 STANDBY
00:00:00
01:12:44
Chamber Temp
84.4 F
Cham Press/PSIG
0.00 PSI
Jacket Temp
274.9 F
Atmosphere PSIA
14.25 PSI
Chamber PSIA
14.25 PSI
Steam Table Diff
-13.28 PSI
Exp. Temp Max
275.6 F
SETUP
SELECT
CYCLE
PARAMETER
UNSEAL
Page 2 of 12

00:10:00
135.0 C
00:20:00
Exposure Time
Exposure Temp
Drying Time
P8 grv GRAVITY1
02 DRYING
00:38:15
00:15:00
Chamber Temp
Chamber PSIA
87.4
0.34
C
PSI
TIME
00:50
SELECT
CYCLE
SETUP
PARAMETER
MORE

software number

P1
02
00:03:00
275.0 F
Exposure Time
Exposure Temp
00:16:00
Drying Time
vac PREVAC1
EXPOSURE
00:18:45
00:02:00
CHAMBER TEMP
CHAMBER PSIA
275.7 F
45.62 PSI
20

REMAINING TIME
PERFORMANCE
SETUP
SELECT
CYCLE
PARAMETER
MORE


Page 3 of 12
CYCLE PROGRESSION
remove chamber air.
c. Exposureselected chamber temperature is maintained
and timed.
and light.
Prevac/ Wrapped Goods (vacuum/pressure pulsing
preconditioning)
period, followed by a series of pressure/vacuum pulses to
remove chamber air.
and timed.
time.
message.
CONSTRUCTION
45 psig (310 kPa). The gasket ring holds a continuous, onepiece silicone gasket, 0.787'' (20 mm) in diameter. The body
HINGED DOOR
PANELING
WARRANTY

Page 4 of 12
Page 5 of 12
Page 6 of 12
Page 7 of 12
Page 8 of 12
Page 9 of 12
Page 10 of 12
Page 11 of 12

Getinge USA, Inc

USA
Phone: (800) 475-9040
Fax:
(585) 272-5033
info@getingeusa.com
www.getinge.com
www.getinge.com
Getinge Canada Ltd.

Canada
Phone: (905) 629-8777
info@getingeusa.com
www.getinge.com
Printed in U.S.A.
DS833HC LHPM 0110

ARJO, GETINGE andGETINGE
MAQUET is
area rregistered
egistered trademarks.
HC_ST_PS_833LeftHandPitMounted_0710_EN_US
trademark.
CUSTOMER:
REFERENCE:
700 SERIES
VACUUM/GRAVITY STEAM STERILIZERS

FOR HEALTHCARE APPLICATIONS
PRODUCT
both gravity/downward displacement with positive pulse conditioning and pressure/vacuum pulsing for dynamic air removal. Up to 20 cycles can be easily accessed in two easy steps.
Custom cycle names can be designated for each cycle and
each cycle can be reconfigured for easy access. All cycle
phases are sequenced and monitored by the control system,
providing both audible and visual notification of deviation from
certain operating parameters.
APPLICATION
range is from 230F to 275F (110C to 135C) and from
219F to 275F (104C to 135C) for liquid cycles. Typical
non-porous hard goods, gowns or towel packs and liquids in
self-venting or unsealed containers. The liquid exhaust is
microcomputer controlled for linear and consistent liquid cool
down, programmable within a specified range.
KEY FEATURES
CHAMBER DIMENSIONS
26.5" (672mm) wide x 36" (920mm) high
39" (1000mm) 21.5 Cu Ft (616L)
53" (1350mm) 29.3 Cu Ft (831L)
61" (1550mm) 33.7 Cu Ft (955L)
SINGLE DOOR MOUNTING
Recessed
Cabinet
SINGLE DOOR DESIGNATIONS
DOUBLE DOOR MOUNTING (53" AND 61" ONLY)
Cabinet, recessed one end
Recessed both ends
DOUBLE DOOR DESIGNATIONS
Control End (CE) DoorRight Hand Swing, Left Hand
column opposite.
Control End (CE) DoorLeft Hand Swing, Right Hand
column opposite.
Printer Location
Control End (CE)
Remote end (RE)

On Unit
Wall Mounted
STEAM SOURCE
House steam
ENGLISH
FRENCH
SPANISH
OPTIONS
Air Compressor
Limited Access Kit
T-DOC Digital Data Logging Software
TM
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
Rack with three shelves
Loading Car
Qty. ______________
Transfer Carriage
Qty. ______________
QUALITY STATEMENT
STANDARDS AND CODES
Design
ETL Listed to UL 61010A-1 and UL61010A-2-041
ETL Listed to IEC 61010-1 and IEC 61010-2-041
cETL Listed to CSA C22.2 Nos. 1010.1 and 1010.2.041
Code (2001)
STANDARD SAFETY FEATURES
Steam Interlock Door Switch prevents steam from

entering the chamber when the door is not sealed.
Steam Safety Valve(s) There are Steam Safety Relief

valve(s) which ensures that the pressure in the chamber
and or jacket do not over pressurize.
Door obstruction shut-off. If the automatic door

encounters an obstacle, a safety clutch stops the door
movement and after a short time-out the motor is shut
down.
Analog chamber gauges. Two needle-style gauges give

pressure readings in the jacket and chamber even in the
event of micro-computer control system outage or power
outage.
Program check. The control system validates all userprogrammed cycle parameters against safe effective cycle
recommendations. A warning appears if users attempt to
program a cycle beyond recommended parameters.
Supervisor password. A supervisor password is required

to change cycle names or parameters.
Abort alert. Aborted cycles result in a warning message

that requires operator intervention before the chamber
can be reopened.
Gasket retract valve. In the event emergency access to

the chamber becomes necessary the gasket may be
retracted manually.
Door safety baffle. In the unlikely event of a catastrophic

door gasket failure, gasket will blow out and a baffle at the
chamber mouth directs steam away from areas where
operators might be working.
Water alarm. High water levels in the drain that cannot be

corrected automatically result in an audible alert.
Audible door alarm. When the automatic door is in motion

(opening or closing), an audible alarm chirps throughout
the door open/close cycle.
Door motion is totally contained within door covers so that

there is no risk to operator as door slides to lock position.
convenience. If specified, the control column can be located
remotely from the sterilizer with up to 32.8 feet (10 m) of cable.
An RS 232 port is provided for serial communications for
central data collection or remote service analysis and
is ready for T-DOC connection. The OP30 operator interface
panel is a durable 14 VGA 5.7 inch diagonal color screen with
320x240 pixels. Below the screen are five soft keys to access
other screens or displays and to make changes to cycle
parameters.
switches, with international symbols and descriptive words,
provide door seal and unseal and movement of the door.
Audible and visible operator feedback is provided when a
selection is made or a fault message is displayed. Temperature
can be set, controlled and displayed in degrees Celsius or
Fahrenheit and pressure in psia, bar or kPa. Double door
models have a printer at one end and complete OP30
also conserves water usage. The chamber drain is
continuously monitored for the presence of water when the
controls are on at all times. If water is detected and cannot be
automatically corrected, a water in drain alarm alerts the
operator.
CYCLE DOCUMENTATION
storage. A last cycle duplicate print and paper feed switch
is provided. The printer is located on the control panel and
documents the following on a 200-dpi dot matrix printer (1.88"
[47.6mm] wide print width):
Process start time and date, sterilizer name and number,
daily cycle number and total cycle count
Cycle selected with time and temperature, with other
adjustable parameters identified
total cycle time
Process fault information messages with time of
occurrence.
Parameter Check provided a calulated, numeric process
lethality
(min/max exposure values)
Page 2 of 12
OP30 OPERATOR INTERFACE FEATURES

implement changes. Parameter Check feature is used to verify
selected exposure time and exposure temperature settings are
within an allowable range. If time and temerature is selected
below factory recommended values, a message will be
displayed. Parameters are password protected.

graph, with a large, easy to read, time remaining to the
end of the cycle (averages the last three cycles for each
cycle type).
00:03:00
275.0 F
00:00:10
Exposure Time
Exposure Temp
Drying Time
P14 f 3 FLASH3+
02 EXPOSURE
Chamber Temp
Chamber PSIA
275.5 F
46.02 PSI
00:03:00
275.0 F
00:20:00
Exposure Time
Exposure Temp
Drying Time
P1 vac PREVAC1
01 STANDBY
SETUP
SELECT
CYCLE
PARAMETER
MORE
00:00:00
01:12:44
Chamber Temp
84.4 F
Cham Press/PSIG
0.00 PSI
Jacket Temp
274.9 F
Atmosphere PSIA
14.25 PSI
Chamber PSIA
14.25 PSI
Steam Table Diff
-13.28 PSI
Exp. Temp Max
275.6 F
REMAINING TIME
SELECT
CYCLE
SETUP
00:06:46
00:02:00

and soft key identifications.
PARAMETER
UNSEAL

00:10:00
135.0 C
00:20:00
Exposure Time
Exposure Temp
Drying Time
P8 grv GRAVITY1
02 DRYING
00:38:15
00:15:00
Chamber Temp
Chamber PSIA
87.4
0.34
C
PSI
Navigating the various screens is accomplished by use of soft

keys, directional arrows to move the cursor and change
values, and the Enter key. Up to 20 factory recommended
cycles are available. Time and temperature can be changed
using a quick edit feature. Each change prompts operator
acceptance by the use of a Yes/No acknowledgement and a
Save soft key.
print the last cycle
adjust system menu for setting the calendar and to
establish users
access the about selection to identify the model and
system software number.
choose language, date format, and temperature and
pressure measurement
adjust parameters through password access
TIME
00:50
SETUP
SELECT
CYCLE
PARAMETER
MORE
Page 3 of 12

water and steam to the unit to conserve energy. Cycles
running beyond the programmed shutoff time will be
completed.
with 30 minutes dry time.
with 30 minutes dry time.
with the following applications:
3 minutes minimum Dry time for a load of linen.
16 minute minimum Dry time for mixed loads of
wrapped instrument and linens.
1 Gravity Flash* cycle for unwrapped non-porous items of
3 minutes exposure at 275F (135C) with 10 second
Dry time.
(134C) with zero dry time.
1 Vacuum Leak Test cycle run at 268F (131C).
2 Liquid** Cycles at 250F (121C), with one at 30
minutes and one at 45 minutes exposure.
CYCLE PROGRESSION

a. Conditioning steam flows into the chamber for a
timed period, followed by a series of positive pressure
b. Heat-Up to selected temperature.
and timed.
d. Exhaust chamber vented to atmospheric pressure.
e. Dry filtered air is drawn through chamber for the
duration of time selected (either Gravity or Vacuum Dry
is selectable, Vacuum Dry is recommended).
f. Cycle Complete signaled by a tone, display
message and light.
Prevac/Wrapped Goods (Vacuum/Pressure Pulsing Preconditioning)

a. Conditioning steam flows into the chamber for a time
period, followed by a series of pressure/vacuum pulses
to remove chamber air.
b. Heat up to selected temperature.
and timed.
d. Exhaust chamber vented to below atmospheric
pressure.
e. Dry a vacuum is created for the duration of the time
selected, filtered air is admitted at the end of the drying
time; chamber to atmospheric pressure.
f. Cycle Complete signaled by a tone, light and display
message.
Gravity/Unwrapped Goods (3 minutes for nonporous

items)
a. Conditioning steam flows into chamber for a timed
period to remove air.
and timed.
d. Exhaust Chamber vented to atmospheric pressure.
e. Dry filtered air is drawn through chamber for the
duration of time selected.
f. Cycle Complete signaled by a tone, light and display
message.
Liquids
a. Conditioning steam flows into chamber for a timed
period to remove air.
and timed.
d. Exhaust an adjustable linear exhaust.
e. Cycle Complete signaled by a tone, light and display
message.

*Steam sterilization by the unwrapped (Flash) method is employed when time
does not permit the use of the preferable, wrapped sterilization procedure.
Implantables should never be sterilized by the unwrapped method.
**The liquid cycle, if used, is not intended for the sterilization of liquids used
directly for patient contact.
PERFORMANCE
by the chamber sensor at 0.9F (0.5C) above the set point (
0.2C). Temperature selectivity is in 0.1F (0.1C) increments.
Page 4 of 12
CONSTRUCTION
The chamber is
is constructed
constructed ofofan
aninner
innershell
shellreinforced
reinforcedbyby
a
aseries
seriesof ofU
Uchannels
channelsthat
thatform
form the
the outer
outer jacket
jacket of
of the
Chamber material is 5mm (0.197) thick and door material is
6mm (0.236)
areare
constructed
of 316
stainless
(0.236)thick,
thick,and
andboth
both
constructed
of Stainless
steel.
The jacket
also
316 material
stainless
steel.
The
Steel, Type
SA240 material
Gr. 316Ti.isThe
jacket
is also
316Ti.
interior
chamber
finish
is polished
to to
a ahigh
The interior
chamber
finish
is polished
highluster
luster finish.
finish. All
pressure vessel construction meets ASME code requirements
requirements
for working
working pressures
pressuresup
uptoto4545
psig
(310
kPa).
gasket
psig
(310
kPa).
TheThe
gasket
ring
ring
a continuous,
one-piece
0.63
holdsholds
a continuous,
one-piece
siliconesilicone
gasket, gasket,
0.63 (16mm)
(16mm)
in diameter.
body assembly
is thermally
in diameter.
The bodyThe
assembly
is thermally
insulated insulated
with 1.5
with
1.5 fiberglass
and thick
is double
thickthe
between
the
fiberglass
insulation insulation
and is double
between
jacket U
jacket
Uchannels.
channels.
A steam
steam baffle
baffle is
is provided
provided to
to prevent
prevent condensation
condensation from
wetting the
theload.
load.
An extra
threaded
permits
An extra
threaded
openingopening
permits passage
passage
of thermocouple
to monitor
interiorand
and load
of thermocouple
leads leads
to monitor
interior
temperatures. Steam connection to the chamber and jacket
are 316L
316 material.
stainless Asteel.
A gasket
manualretract
gasket
retract
valve for
is
manual
valve
is provided
provided
forchamber
emergency
chamber
access.
When
rack and
emergency
access.
When
rack and
shelves
are
shelves
supplied,
shelf adjustments
will be approximately
supplied,areshelf
adjustments
will be approximately
every 2.5
every
2.5 (63.5mm).
rack supports
and are
shelves
(63.5mm).
Individual Individual
rack supports
and shelves
easyare
to
easy
to remove
for cleaning.
remove
for cleaning.
HINGED DOOR
actuated by a switch. The open motion is in two steps. First, a
slide to clear the door locking pins, then it swings open. The
door will stop automatically if an obstruction is encountered. In
an emergency, the power door can be opened manually by a
qualified technician. At the beginning of the cycle, steam
pressure behind the gasket automatically seals the door and
retracts automatically at the end of the cycle. Sealing is
positive and consistent. The gasket is recessed for added
protection and long life. Once the cycle begins and the
chamber is pressurized, the door cannot be opened. A safety
switch prevents steam from entering the chamber when the
door is not in the closed and sealed position. The door is
insulated with fiberglass insulation and covered with a stainless
steel panel.
PANELING
0.050 (1.27 mm) 300 series #3 brushed finished stainless
The trim panels are built-in to fit within a recessed wall or
optional cabinet. When specified, the cabinet model will be
made of the same material. The control column can be wall
mounted.
WARRANTY
ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT
Getinge steam sterilizers are designed and constructed with
our environment in mind. To aid in the conservation of natural
resources, and in recognition of prevailing Environmental
Policies, particularly ISO 14001, Getinge steam sterilizers are
more than 90% (by weight) recyclable.
Under normal operation, Getinge steam sterilizers produce no
harmful byproducts. The steam sterilization process, in and of
itself, produces nothing more than hot drain water.
Page 5 of 12
Page 6 of 12
Page 7 of 12
Page 8 of 12
Page 9 of 12
Page 10 of 12
Page 11 of 12

Getinge USA, Inc

USA
Phone: (800) 475-9040
Fax:
(585) 272-5033
info@getingeusa.com
www.getinge.com
www.getinge.com
Getinge Canada Ltd.

Canada
Phone: (905) 629-8777
info@getingeusa.com
www.getinge.com
GETINGE is a registered trademark. Printed in U.S.A.
HC_ST_PS_700Series_0810_EN_US
SYM
DATE
REVISION
AUTH
04-17-00
RELEASED
FE
85 (TYP)
36 MIN*
26
1 MIN**
4
E2
SV
W
E1
6.5 7
7.8
.75
1.8
11.5
180 MAX
19
30 MIN*
21
23
SERVICE AREA
CLEARANCE
D2
.44 (4X)
MOUNTING HOLES
58 (TYP)
S
7
15
PANEL
CLEARANCE
D1
16.4
16 MIN**
18
36 MIN*
2.13
19.5
33
*ACCESS TO SERVICE AREAS TO BE

SUPPLIED BY CUSTOMER. ACCESS DOOR
MUST NOT BE LESS THAN 24"WIDE X 78"
HIGH.
**1"MINIMUM
DISTANCE FROM
COMBUSTIBLE
MATERIALS ALL
AROUND EXCEPT
AS NOTED.
SERVICE AREA
CLEARANCE
PLAN VIEW
SV
S
E1
E2
47
42
42
39
36
D1
D2
9
10
31
2.3
SIDE VIEW
FRONT VIEW
TOLERANCES
(EXCEPT AS NOTED)
DECIMAL
SCALE
JOB
GETINGE/CASTLE
1/64
FRACTIONAL
TITLE
.005
ANGULAR
1
DATE
04-17-00
1:16
DRAWN BY
FE
APPROVED BY
CM
ELECTRIC BOILER MODELS ES24-ES72

DRAWING
NUMBER
ES24-72GC
ELECTRIC BOILER
Model No. ES24-72 (208V, 240V, 480V)
SERVICE
Refer to National and all applicable local codes for specific installation requirements. All piping to be installed by a licensed plumber.
Pipe
Flow Rates
On Unit
Pressure Range Dynamic
Size
Connection
At Unit
ES24
ES30
ES36
ES48
ES60
ES72
To Unit
W= Water Inlet
100 psig min.
.48 gpm min.
.60
.72
.96
1.20
1.44
[7.0 kg/cm2 min.]
1/2 [13] NPT female
1/2[13]
[.11 m3/Hr min.]
[.14]
[.17]
[.22]
[.28]
[.33]
see note 1
NPT
S= Steam Outlet
90 psig max.
73 lbs./Hr
91
109
145
181
217
1 [25] NPT male
1 [25]
[6.3 kg/cm2 max.]
[34 kg/Hr]
[42]
[50]
[66]
[83]
[99]
see note 2
NPT
D1= Drain
1 [25]
90 psig max.
See note 3
1 [25] NPT male
NPT
[6.3 kg/cm2 max.]
D2= Drain
See note 3
1 [25]
90 psig max.
1 [25] NPT male
NPT
[6.3 kg/cm2 max.]
SV= Safety Valve Vent
See note 4
1 [25]
100 psig
1 [25] NPT female
NPT
[7.0 kg/cm2]
ELECTRICAL SUPPLY
Service
E1= Power Circuit
Model No.
ES24
ES30
ES36
ES48
ES60
ES72
E2= Control Circuit
see note 5
Model No.
ES24
ES30
ES36
ES48
ES60
ES72
ES24-72GC
ES24-72
320
320
320
330
360
360
Utility
Max. current
Wire Size
Conduit
24 kW, 208V, 60 Hz, 3 Ph

24 kW, 240V, 60 Hz, 3 Ph
24 kW, 480V, 60 Hz, 3 Ph
30 kW, 208V, 60 Hz, 3 Ph
30 kW, 240V, 60 Hz, 3 Ph
30 kW, 480V, 60 Hz, 3 Ph
36 kW, 208V, 60 Hz, 3 Ph
36 kW, 240V, 60 Hz, 3 Ph
36 kW, 480V, 60 Hz, 3 Ph
48 kW, 208V, 60 Hz, 3 Ph
48 kW, 240V, 60 Hz, 3 Ph
48 kW, 480V, 60 Hz, 3 Ph
60 kW, 208V, 60 Hz, 3 Ph
60 kW, 240V, 60 Hz, 3 Ph
60 kW, 480V, 60 Hz, 3 Ph
72 kW, 208V, 60 Hz, 3 Ph
72 kW, 240V, 60 Hz, 3 Ph
72 kW, 480V, 60 Hz, 3 Ph
120V, 60 Hz, 3 Ph
67 Amps
58 Amps
29 Amps
84 Amps
73 Amps
37 Amps
100 Amps
87 Amps
44 Amps
134 Amps
116 Amps
58 Amps
167 Amps
145 Amps
73 Amps
200 Amps
174 Amps
87 Amps
12 Amps
4 GA 90C CU
4 GA 90C CU
10 GA 90C CU
3 GA 90C CU
4 GA 90C CU
8 GA 90C CU
1 GA 90C CU
2 GA 90C CU
6 GA 90C CU
00 GA 90C CU
0 GA 90C CU
4 GA 90C CU
000 GA 90C CU
00 GA 90C CU
4 GA 90C CU
250 MCM 90C CU
000 GA 90C CU
2 GA 90C CU
14 GA 90C CU
1 conduit [25]
1 conduit [25]
conduit [13]
1-1/4 conduit [32]
1 conduit [25]
3/4 conduit [19]
1-1/2 conduit [38]
1-1/4 conduit [32]
3/4 conduit [19]
2 conduit [51]
2 conduit [51]
1 conduit [25]
2 conduit [51]
2 conduit [51]
1 conduit [25]
2-1/2 conduit [64]
2 conduit [51]
1-1/4 conduit [32]
conduit [13]
UNIT WEIGHTS AND MEASUREMENTS

Weights
Measurements (Crated)
Crated
Uncrated
Length
Width
lbs. [145 kg.]
265 lbs. [120 kg.]
31 in. [.79m]
38 in. [.97m]
lbs. [145 kg.]
265 lbs. [120 kg.]
31 in. [.79m]
38 in. [.97m]
lbs. [145 kg.]
265 lbs. [120 kg.]
31 in. [.79m]
38 in. [.97m]
lbs. [150 kg.]
275 lbs. [125 kg.]
31 in. [.79m]
38 in. [.97m]
lbs. [164 kg.]
300 lbs. [136 kg.]
31 in. [.79m]
38 in. [.97m]
lbs. [164 kg.]
300 lbs. [136 kg.]
31 in. [.79m]
38 in. [.97m]
Prepared by: F Endozo
52
52
52
52
52
52
Height
in. [1.32m]
in. [1.32m]
in. [1.32m]
in. [1.32m]
in. [1.32m]
in. [1.32m]
Revised: November 28, 2001
SYM
DATE
REVISION
AUTH
06-14-00
RELEASED
FE
A (TYP)
* ACCESS TO SERVICE AREAS

TO BE SUPPLIED BY
CUSTOMER. ACCESS DOOR
MUST NOT BE LESS THAN 24"
WIDE X 78" HIGH.
36 MIN*
1 M IN **
C
4
E1
W
N
SERVICE AREA
CLEARANCE
D (TYP)
10
SV
E2
36 M IN *
SERVICE AREA
CLEARANCE
180 MAX
.44 (4X)
MOUNTING
HOLES
1 MIN*
D1
** 1" MINIMUM
DISTANCE
FROM
COMBUSTIBLE
MATERIALS ALL
AROUND
EXCEPT AS
NOTED.
1.5
F
PANEL
CLEARANCE
J
K
36 M IN *
D2
16 MIN**
SERVICE AREA
CLEARANCE
PLAN VIEW
S
SV
E1
48
56
58
63
E2
NOTE:
FRONT ELECTRIC PANEL
ON 208V & 240V ONLY
D2
13
16
PANEL CLEARANCE
BOTH SIDES
17
2.5
180 MAX
D1
TOLERANCES
(EXCEPT AS NOTED)
DECIMAL
SCALE
JOB
GETINGE/CASTLE
1/64
SIDE VIEW
FRONT VIEW
FRACTIONAL
TITLE
.005
ANGULAR
1
DRAWN BY
FE
APPROVED BY
CM
ELECTRIC BOILER
MODELS ES100-ES180 (208V, 240V, 480V)
DATE
06-14-00
DRAWING
NUMBER
ES100-180GC
ELECTRIC BOILER
Model No. ES100-180 (208V, 240V, 480V)
Model
ES100
ES135-ES180
A
87
89
B
28
30
C
19
20
D
103
105
E
18
20
DIMENSIONS
F
G
13
17
15
18
H
22
24
J
32
34
K
35
37
L
10
11
M
15
16
N
28
30
P
31
33
SERVICE
Refer to National and all applicable local codes for specific installation requirements. All piping to be installed by a licensed plumber.
Pressure Range
Flow Rates
On Unit
Pipe Size
Dynamic
Connection
To Unit
ES100
ES135
ES160
ES180
At Unit
W= Water Inlet
100 psig min.
.2.04 gpm min.
2.70
3.20
3.60
[7.0 kg/cm2 min.]
1/2[13]
[.47 m3/Hr min.]
[.62]
[.73]
[.82]
3/4 [19] NPT female
NPT
see note 1
S= Steam Outlet
308 lbs./Hr
407
482
542
90 psig max.
see note 2
[140 kg/Hr]
[185]
[219]
[246]
[6.3 kg/cm2 max.]
ES100 1-1/2 [31]
1-1/2 [31]
NPT male
NPT
ES1352 [51]
2 [51]
ES180
NPT male
NPT
D1= Drain
See note 3
1 [25]
90 psig max.
1 [25] NPT male
NPT
[6.3 kg/cm2 max.]
D2= Drain
1 [25]
90 psig max.
See note 3
1 [25] NPT male
NPT
[6.3 kg/cm2 max.]
SV= Safety Valve Vent
See note 4
1-1/4 [32]
100 psig
1-1/4 [32] NPT female
NPT
[7.0 kg/cm2]
ELECTRICAL SUPPLY
Service
E1= Power Circuit
Model No.
ES100
ES135
ES160
ES180
E2= Control Circuit
see note 5
Model No.
ES100
ES135
ES160
ES180
ES100-180GC
ES100-180
600
625
625
625
Utility
Max. current
Wire Size
Conduit
102 kW, 208V, 60 Hz, 3 Ph

102 kW , 240V, 60 Hz, 3 Ph
102 kW, 480V, 60 Hz, 3 Ph
135 kW, 208V, 60 Hz, 3 Ph
135 kW, 240V, 60 Hz, 3 Ph
135 kW, 480V, 60 Hz, 3 Ph
160 kW, 208V, 60 Hz, 3 Ph
160 kW, 240V, 60 Hz, 3 Ph
160 kW, 480V, 60 Hz, 3 Ph
180 kW, 208V, 60 Hz, 3 Ph
180 kW, 240V, 60 Hz, 3 Ph
180 kW, 480V, 60 Hz, 3 Ph
120V, 60 Hz, 1 Ph
284 Amps
246 Amps
123 Amps
375 Amps
325 Amps
163 Amps
445 Amps
385 Amps
193 Amps
500 Amps
434 Amps
217 Amps
12 Amps
400 MCM 90C CU

350 MCM 90C CU
0 GA 90C CU
700 MCM 90C CU
500 MCM 90C CU
000 GA 90C CU
900 MCM 90C CU
700 MCM 90C CU
0000 GA 90C CU
1250 MCM 90C CU
900 MCM 90C CU
250 MCM 90C CU
14 GA 90C CU
3 conduit [76]
3 conduit [76]
2 conduit [51]
4 conduit [102]
3 conduit [76]
2 conduit [51]
4 conduit [102]
4 conduit [102]
2 conduit [51]]
5 conduit [127]
4 conduit [102]
2-1/2 conduit [64]
conduit [13]
UNIT WEIGHTS AND MEASUREMENTS

Weights
Measurements (Crated)
Crated
Uncrated
Length
Width
lbs. [273 kg.]
500 lbs. [227 kg.]
37 in. [.94 m]
43 in. [1.09 m]
lbs. [284 kg.]
545 lbs. [248 kg.]
37 in. [.94 m]
43 in. [1.09 m]
lbs. [284 kg.]
545 lbs. [248 kg.]
37 in. [.94 m]
43 in. [1.09 m]
lbs. [284 kg.]
545 lbs. [248 kg.]
37 in. [.94 m]
43 in. [1.09 m]
67
67
67
67
Height
in. [1.70
in. [1.70
in. [1.70
in. [1.70
m]
m]
m]
m]
ELECTRIC BOILER
Model No. ES24-72 (208V, 240V, 480V)
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Notes
Cold water:
a) Steam generator package must come with feedwater pump. Pressure at pump inlet to be 0 psig minimum.
b) The optional feedwater pump requires mechanical electrical and plumbing hook -up by customer. A separate electrical service to the
water booster pump junction box is necessary.
c) If pump and boiler are plumbed within 30 feet (pipe length) a minimum of 2 check valves are required on boiler to avoid damage to
pump.
d) Water quality information: For optimum results, the feed water supply should be tested prior to initial startup. If the mineral content
exceeds the following recommended limits, various external treatment processes (water softener, etc.) may be used to correct the
problem. Blow down the boiler at least daily to lower the concentration of impurities and maintain the pH level ab ove 7.0.
e) Feedwater quality:
Hardness
0.5 to 5.0 grains/gallon (8 -85 ppm)
Resistivity
Not to exceed 50 k ohms/cm
Steam Outlet:
a) For best performance, a 1/2 npt globe valve rated 100 psi minimum steam service should be plumbed as close as practicable to
steam outlet pipe.
Drains:
a) It shall be the customers responsibility to provide a proper drainage system in accordance with applicable local codes.
Safety Valve:
a) Caution must be exercised not to reduce the discharge capacity of the relief valve.
b) Check local codes for special requirements.
Electric:
a) It shall be the customers responsibility to provide generator with control voltage E2.
b) An optional transformer is available for 240V/120V or 480V/120V.
ORDERING INFORMATION:
Model ES24 Electric Steam Boiler:
ES24100B3
ES24100C3
ES24100F3
ES30100B3
ES30100C3
ES30100F3
ES36100B3
ES36100C3
ES36100F3
ES48100B3
ES48100C3
ES48100F3
ES60100B3
ES60100C3
ES60100F3
ES72100B3
ES72100C3
ES72100F3
24 kW
24 kW
24 kW
30 kW
30 kW
30 kW
36 kW
36 kW
36 kW
48 kW
48 kW
48 kW
60 kW
60 kW
60 kW
72 kW
72 kW
72 kW
ES38002A
1/3 hp 120V 1ph
Transformer:
ES99329C
ES99329F
1kVA 240V / 120V

1kVA 480V / 120V
Automatic Blowdown System:
ES81600-2
Auxiliary Low Water Cutoff:
ES81017MR
Blowdown Separator:
BDT-ASME36
Options: Motor & pump:
ES24-72GC
208V 3ph 100 psi

240V 3ph 100 psi
480V 3ph 100 psi
208V 3ph 100 psi
240V 3ph 100 psi
480V 3ph 100 psi
208V 3ph 100 psi
240V 3ph 100 psi
480V 3ph 100 psi
208V 3ph 100 psi
240V 3ph 100 psi
480V 3ph 100 psi
208V 3ph 100 psi
240V 3ph 100 psi
480V 3ph 100 psi
208V 3ph 100 psi
240V 3ph 100 psi
480V 3ph 100 psi
ELECTRIC BOILER
Model No. ES100-180 (208V, 240V, 480V)
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Notes
Cold water:
a) Steam generator package must come with feedwater pump. Pressure at pump inlet to be 0 psig minimum.
b) The optional feedwater pump requires mechanical, electrical and plumbing hook -up by customer. A separate electrical service to the
water booster pump junction box is necessary.
c) If pump and boiler are plumbed within 30 feet (pipe length) a minimum of 2 check valves are required on boiler to avoid damage to
pump.
d) Water quality information: For optimum results, the feed water supply should be tested prior to initial startup. If the mineral content
exceeds the following recommended limits, various external treatment processes (water softener, etc.) may be used to correct the
problem. Blow down the boiler at least daily to lower the concentration of impurities and maintain the pH level above 7.0.
e) Feedwater quality:
Hardness
0.5 to 5.0 grains/gallon (8 -85 ppm)
Resistivity
Not to exceed 50 k ohms/cm
Steam Outlet:
a) For best performance, a 1 npt globe valve rated 100 psi minimum steam service should be plumbed as close as practicable to steam
outlet pipe.
Drains:
a) It shall be the customers responsibility to provide a proper drainage system in accordance with applicable local codes.
Safety Valve:
a) Caution must be exercised not to reduce the discharge capacity of the relief valve.
b) Check local codes for special requirements.
Electric:
a) It shall be the customers responsibility to provide generator with control voltage E2.
b) An optional transformer is available for 240V/120V or 480V/120V.
ORDERING INFORMATION:
ES100100B3
ES100100C3
ES100100F3
ES135100B3
ES135100C3
ES135100F3
ES160100B3
ES160100C3
ES160100F3
ES180100B3
ES180100C3
ES180100F3
102 kW
102 kW
102 kW
135 kW
135 kW
135 kW
160 kW
160 kW
160 kW
180 kW
180 kW
180 kW
ES38020A
1/2 hp 120V 1ph
Transformer:
ES99335C
ES99335F
1-1/2 kVA 240V / 120V

1-1/2 kVA 480V / 120V
Automatic Blowdown System:
ES81600-3
ES81600-4
Autoblowdown for ES100

Autoblowdown for ES135-ES180
Auxiliary Low Water Cutoff:
ES81017MR
Blowdown Separator:
BDT-ASME42
Options: Motor & pump:
ES100-180GC
208V 3ph 100 psi

240V 3ph 100 psi
480V 3ph 100 psi
208V 3ph 100 psi
240V 3ph 100 psi
480V 3ph 100 psi
208V 3ph 100 psi
240V 3ph 100 psi
480V 3ph 100 psi
208V 3ph 100 psi
240V 3ph 100 psi
480V 3ph 100 psi
Sussman DS 2472-180GC 1201
AMSCO EVOLUTION STEAM STERILIZERS NORTH AMERICA

APPLICATION
This sterilizer is configured for
prevacuum sterilization of heat- and
moisture-stable materials used in
healthcare facilities. These units are
equipped with prevacuum, Steam Flush
Pressure Pulse (SFPP), gravity, liquid,
DART (Bowie-Dick) and vacuum leak
test cycles.
DESCRIPTION
Amsco Evolution Steam Sterilizers
are equipped with the latest features in
both state-of-the-art technology and
ease of use.
26 x 26" (660 x 660 mm) Sterilizer

Vertical Sliding Door
26 x 37.5" (660 x 953 mm) Sterilizer

Horizontal Sliding Door
Primary Product Features

26 x 37.5" (660 x 953
mm) Sterilizer
Hinged door for 26 x 37.5" (660 x 953

mm) sterilizers. Door may be hinged
on either left side or right side.
All plumbing components are
mounted to a free-standing, modular
rack (stand). The stand connects to
the core sterilizer assembly during
installation.
Vertical-sliding door 26 x 26" (660 x
660 mm) or horizontal-sliding door
26 x 37.5" (660 x 953 mm):
Typical only - some details may vary.
For 26 x 26" (660 x 660 mm) sterilizers, door travels vertically down to
open and up to close.
For 26 x 37.5" (660 x 953 mm) sterilizers, door travels horizontally right
to left to open.
An advanced, PC-based control

system employs user-friendly
interface screens, with enhanced
graphics.
8.4" (214 mm) color touch screen
display.
Ink on paper impact printer.

TYPE
Prevacuum
Steam Flush Pressure Pulse (SFPP)
MODEL NUMBER/SIZE
HC900 / 26 x 37-1/2 x 42"
(660 x 950 x 1067 mm)
HC1200 / 26 x 37-1/2 x 54"
(660 x 950 x 1372 mm)
HC1500 / 26 x 37.5 x 66"
(660 x 953 x 1676 mm)
HC600 / 26 x 26 x 39"
(660 x 660 x 991 mm)
HC800 / 26 x 26 x 49"
(660 x 660 x 1245 mm)
HC1000 / 26 x 26 x 61"
(660 x 660 x 1549 mm)
STERILIZER ELECTRIC SERVICE
208/240 V ac, 50/60 Hz, 3-Phase, 12 A/Phase
480 V ac, 50/60 Hz, 3-Phase, 6 A/Phase
STEAM SOURCE
House Steam
72 kW Optional Integral Electric Steam Generator
208V, 50/60 Hz, 3-Phase, 203 A
240V, 50/60 Hz, 3-Phase,176 A
480V, 50/60 Hz, 3-Phase, 89 A
STEAM PIPING
Copper/Brass
Optional Right-hand Piping
NOTE: Left-hand piping is standard
DOOR CONFIGURATION
(26 X 37.5" STERILIZERS, ONLY)
Single-Door
Hinged Door
Horizontal-Sliding
Left-Hand
Right-Hand (not available for sliding door
units)
Double-Door
Hinged Door
Note: Operating End hinge position listed first, Nonoperating End hinge listed second.
Right-Hand/Left-Hand
Right-Hand/Right-Hand
Left-Hand/Right-Hand
Left-Hand/Left-Hand
Horizontal-Sliding Door
Note: Operating end slide direction listed first, Nonoperating end slide direction listed second.
Left-Hand/Right-Hand
(Direction of door movement is right-hand to lefthand, as viewed from the sterilizer's operating end.)
ACCESSORIES
42" (1067 mm) Chamber Length
Loading Car
Transfer Carriage
Chamber Track Assembly
Single Door Double Door
Loading Car, Transfer Carriage and Track
Assembly
Single Door Double Door
Chamber Rack and Shelf (39" & 42" Units, only)
REMOTE MONITORING
ProConnect Response Center (Remote
Monitoring, Priority Technical Support,
Customer Care Center Access, Equipment
Performance Reports)
DOOR CONFIGURATION
(26 X 26" STERILIZERS, ONLY)
Single Door Vertical Sliding
Double Door Vertical Sliding
SINGLE-DOOR MOUNTING
Cabinet Enclosed/Freestanding
Recessed
DOUBLE-DOOR MOUNTING
Recessed through One Wall
Recessed through Two Walls
Item ________________________
Location(s)___________________
____________________________
SD889 (02/01/11)
Model Number
Internal Dimensions
Inches (Millimeters)
Cubic
Inches
Cubic
Feet
HC600
26 x 26 x 39" (660 x 660 x 991 mm)
26,364
15.2
HC800
26 x 26 x 49" (660 x 660 x 1245 mm)
33, 124
19.1
HC1000
26 x 26 x 61" (660 x 660 x 1549 mm)
41, 236
23.8
HC900
26 x 37.5 x 42" (660 x 953 x 1067 mm)
35,100
20.3
HC1200
26 x 37.5 x 54" (660 x 953 x 1372 mm)
46,800
27.0
HC1500
26 x 37.5 x 66" (660 x 953 x 1676 mm)
64,350
37.2
an equipment alarm. Also included are priority technical

support, online parts ordering, equipment performance
dashboards, and scheduling service at eservice.steris.com.
ProConnect can be directly connected through the sterilizer
control or can reside on a separate PC in the department.
Standard communication interface with most PC-compatible

peripheral devices (e.g., data collection systems, printers)
Automatic check of control program and cycle data
maintains process integrity
Control is designed to accommodate integrated remote
monitoring and instrument tracking interfaces.
UTILITIES CONSERVATION FEATURES
STANDARDS
Resistive Thermal Detectors (RTD) are installed for precise

sterilizer temperature control and conservation of utilities. The
dual element chamber drain line RTD senses and controls
temperature variations within the sterilizer chamber. A jacket
RTD provides temperature control within the jacket space.
These RTD signals, converted into electrical impulses, provide
accurate control inputs and readouts throughout entire cycle.
Each sterilizer meets applicable requirements of the following

listings and standards, and carries the appropriate symbols:
ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1 for unfired pressure
vessels. The pressure vessel is so stamped; ASME Form
U-1 is furnished. Shell and door are constructed to withstand
working pressure of 45 psig (3.1 bar).
Electronic water saving control includes an RTD to minimize

the amount of water used in condensing the exhausted
chamber steam and condensate.
Underwriters Laboratory (UL) Standard 61010-1 as

certified by Intertek Testing services.
Canadian Standards Association (CSA) Standard C22.2,
No. 1010 as certified by Intertek Testing services.
Automatic utilities start-up/shutdown permits utilities

conservation. Shutdown may be programmed to activate at the
end of any designated cycle or time of day. When activated,
the control system automatically shuts off all utility valves,
conserving steam and water usage. Sterilizer utilities can be
restarted either by programmed time or manual operation. A
different shutdown and restart time can be programmed for
each day.
FEATURES
26 x 37.5" (660 x 953 mm) Chamber Cross-section or
26 x 26" (660 x 660 mm) Chamber Cross-section sized to
allow for efficient, high-volume processing of sterilization
containers, trays and packs.
Insulation sleeve is fitted around exterior of the sterilizer vessel

to conserve heat and limit heat loss to the surrounding
environment. The sleeve is sealed and held in place by hookand-loop closures. Insulation is asbestos-free and chloridefree, silicone impregnated, oil- and water-resistant fiberglass.
Fast-operating, low-effort manual door lock mechanism

(hinged door models) allows door to be locked or unlocked
using a single 30 handle motion, with a fast operating, loweffort door lock mechanism.
Power Door operates quietly, and consists of a motor-driven
cable and pulley mechanism. Vertical- and horizontal-sliding
door is controlled from control panel push buttons. The door
slides open, propelled by the cable and pulley driven electric
motor. Double door configurations are supplied with controls
at both ends of the sterilizer to help prevent the possibility of
cross-contamination.
Two-stage vacuum pump is supplied on all units to effectively

pull chamber to specified vacuum levels, reduce cycle time by
shortening conditioning and exhaust times; as well as reduce
water consumption.
Software calibration is performed in the Service Mode,

accessible through the touch screen displays, and
accomplished using external or internal temperature and
pressure sources. Control system provides printed record of
all calibration data for verification to current readings.
All processing cycles factory programmed into the sterilizer

control have been validated to AAMI/ANSI ST-8.
PROCESSING CYCLES
IMPORTANT: Applicable cycles have been validated to satisfy

the requirements outlined below. If cycle parameters (sterilize
time, dry time, temperature) other than those listed are required,
it is the responsibility of the healthcare facility to consult and
follow the device manufacturers written instructions.
Pneumatic valves are fitted in piping for steam, water and

exhaust control.
Dry Times for Prevacuum and SFPP are based upon maximum
load as follows:
Principle piping components and the primary control

assembly are mounted to a separate, modular support rack
(plumbing stand). The plumbing stand connects during
installation to core chamber and frame assembly, allowing for
increased access for service and maintenance procedures
when necessary.
26 x 26" (660 x 660 mm) sterilizer - three full shelves of 25 lb

(11 kg) instrument trays
26 x 37.5" (660 x 953 mm) sterilizer - four full shelves of 25 lb
(11 kg) instrument trays
ProConnect Response Center - Minimize response time and

unscheduled downtime on your equipment. Secure, internetbased, 24/7 remote monitoring enables both Predictive
Maintenance as well as instant alerts to STERIS when there is
Prevacuum configuration sterilizers are factory programmed

with the following cycles: 270F (132C) Prevacuum, Gravity,
SFPP, Liquid, 275F (135C) Prevacuum; SFPP and Test
2
275F (135C) Prevacuum Cycle: For sterilizing doublewrapped instrument trays.

Sterilize temperature: 275F (135C)
Sterilize time: 3 minutes
Dry time: 30 minutes
250F (121C) Gravity Cycle: For sterilizing fabrics.
270F (132C) Gravity Cycle: For sterilizing doublewrapped instrument trays.
Ready State Screen

270F (132C) Gravity Cycle: For sterilizing fabric packs.
Liquid Cycle: This cycle is used for sterilizing liquids in
borosilicate containers with vented closures.
Factory programmed sterilize time: 45 minutes
Dry time: not applicable
IMPORTANT: It is inappropriate for a healthcare facility to
sterilize liquids for direct contact with patients.
Options Screen
Steam Flush Pressure Pulse (SFPP) configuration sterilizers

are factory programmed with the following cycles: SFPP,
Prevacuum, Gravity, Liquid and Test Cycles. See cycle
descriptions below for more details:
Cycles. Prevacuum cycles feature vacuum pulses followed by

pressure pulses for porous load cycles. Prevacuum cycles
are intended for efficient, high-volume processing of heat- and
moisture-stable materials, such as fabrics and wrapped hard
goods. This process incorporates a series of vacuum/pressure
pulses to condition the load prior to sterilization.
Default SFPP Cycles

270F (132C) SFPP Cycle: For efficient, high-volume
processing of double wrapped instrument trays and fabric
packs. This process incorporates a series of steam flushes
and pressure pulses at pressures above atmospheric levels
to condition load prior to sterilization.
Default Prevac Cycles

270F (132C) Prevacuum Cycle: For efficient, highvolume processing of heat- and moisture-stable materials,
such as fabrics and wrapped hard goods. This process
incorporates a series of pressure/vacuum pulses to
condition the load prior to sterilization.

275F (135C) SFPP Cycle: For sterilizing double-wrapped

instrument trays.

270F (132C) Prevacuum Cycle: For sterilizing single

fabric packs.


Dry time: 5 minutes
adjustable to meet specific processing requirements. All

operator-accessible control functions can be changed using
the touch screen control.
270F (132C) SFPP Cycle: For sterilizing single fabric

packs.
IMPORTANT: If cycle parameters (sterilize time, dry time,

temperature) other than those listed are required, it is the
responsibility of the healthcare facility to consult and follow the
device manufacturers written instructions.

Dry time: 5 minutes
Cycle values and operating features may be adjusted and

verified prior to cycle operation. Cycle parameters are retained
in control memory for repeated use.
Once cycle is started, cycles and cycle values cannot be
changed until cycle is complete. If chamber temperature drops
below set point during the exposure phase, the timer is set to
stop and automatically reset once normal operating
temperature is reached.

Critical control system components are housed within a sealed

compartment to protect the components from moisture and
heat generated during the sterilization process.

Operator interface control panel, consisting of a touch

screen, is located on the operating (i.e., load or non-sterile)
end of the sterilizer.

The operator interface consists of a touch-sensitive, color

screen. This display allows for control communications,
graphics and excellent visibility in most environments. The
display panel, in conjunction with the control, is used as the
monitor for the operator. All sterilizer functions, including cycle
initiation and cycle configuration, are operated by pressing the
touch-sensitive areas on the display. Display indicates
appropriate control buttons, operator prompts, and status
messages necessary to assist in sterilizer operation. All
displayed messages are complete phrases with no codes to
be cross-referenced. Display also indicates any abnormal
conditions that may exist either in or out of a cycle. Control
buffer memory retains up to ten previously-run cycles for later
access.

24-Character ink-on-paper printer, located below touch

screen, provides an easy-to-read printed record of all pertinent
cycle data on 2.25" (57 mm) wide paper. Data is automatically
printed at the beginning and end of each cycle and at transition
points during the cycle.Three paper tape rolls and two printer
ribbons are furnished with each unit.

TESTING CYCLES
Non-operating end (NOE) control panel, on double-door

sterilizers only, includes a touch sensitive screen similar to the
operating end screen. Preprogrammed cycles can be started
from the NOE control panel. Display concurrently shows the
same information as the operating end screen display. Other
controls located at the non-operating end include door control
pushbuttons (if power door), jacket and chamber gauges and
an emergency-stop button (if power door).
DART Warm-up Cycle: This cycle is used to warm chamber

to operating temperature prior to performing a DART (BowieDick) Test cycle.
DART (Bowie-Dick) Test Cycle: This cycle is used for
conducting Bowie-Dick tests. Recommended load is a
properly prepared Bowie-Dick test pack. Preprogrammed
cycle parameters cannot be adjusted by the user.
Cycle configuration is performed by accessing the Change

Values menu through the operating end touch screen.
Sterilize temperature: 270 (132C)

Sterilize time: 3 minutes and 30 seconds
In addition to adjustment of cycle values, the following

operating parameters can also be changed through the
Machine Setup menu:
Dry time: 1 minute

Vacuum Leak Test: This cycle is used for testing the
vacuum integrity of the sterilizers piping. Sterilizer chamber
must be empty while running this test cycle. All timing is
preprogrammed and cannot be adjusted.
Time display and printout units 24-hour or AM/PM.

Audible signals, end-of-cycle signals and alarm signals
have three adjustable volume levels available through the
control and display panel.
Temperature display and printout units Fahrenheit (F) or
Celsius (C). Temperature is set, displayed, controlled and
printed to the nearest 0.1. Recalibration is not required
when changing temperature units.
CONTROL SYSTEM
Design Features
The control system monitors and controls all sterilizer
operations and functions. The control system is factoryprogrammed with standard sterilizing cycles. Each cycle is
Pressure/vacuum display and printout units psig/InHg or

bar. Recalibration is not required when changing pressure
units.
4
SAFETY FEATURES
Vacuum System
Emergency stop button located on the front panel, below the

sterilizer control touch pad (Power Door Units Only). When
pressed, immediately shuts off all outputs on the sterilizer. A
key is used to reset the switch.
Two-stage vacuum pump reduces chamber pressure during

prevacuum and post-drying phases. Air is drawn from the
chamber through the vacuum system. Following the dry phase,
chamber vacuum is relieved to atmospheric pressure by
admitting air through a bacteria-retentive filter.
Control lockout switch equipped on chamber door(s), senses

when door seal is energized and tight against the door. Control
prevents cycle from starting until the limit switch signal is
received. If control loses appropriate signal during cycle, alarm
activates, cycle aborts and chamber safely vents with a
controlled exhaust.
Steam Source
Sterilizers are piped, valved and trapped to receive buildingsupplied steam delivered at 50 to 80 psig (3.5 to 5.6 bar)
dynamic. Standard steam piping is constructed of copper and
brass and includes a shutoff valve, separator and a pressure
regulator. (An optional, integral electric steam generator is also
available.)
Chamber float switch activates alarm, aborts cycle and safely

vents chamber with a controlled exhaust if excessive
condensate is detected in the vessel chamber.
Piping
Pressure relief valve limits the amount of pressure buildup so

that the rated pressure in the vessel is not exceeded.
All piping is located on a modular plumbing rack (stand).

Plumbing stand can be located on either side of the sterilizer.
Power door safety feature causes door drive to slip if the

sliding door encounters an obstruction during its movement.
MOUNTING ARRANGEMENT
CONSTRUCTION
Sterilizers are arranged for either freestanding or recessed

installation, as specified. Each sterilizer is height-adjustable.
Sterilizer subframe is equipped with a synthetic rubber gasket
to ensure tight fit between the cabinet panels on freestanding
units or between the front cabinet panel and wall partition on
recessed units.
Shell Assembly
Two fully fabricated Type 316L stainless-steel shells, welded
one within the other, form the sterilizer vessel. Type 316L
stainless-steel end frame(s) is welded to door end. On single
door units, back of chamber is fitted with welded, 316L
stainless-steel dished head.
On freestanding units, stainless-steel side panels and a

louvered top panel enclose the sterilizer body and piping.
Sterilizer vessel is ASME and PED rated at 45 psig (3.1 bar)

and insulated. Vessel includes one 1"-NPT chamber port for
Customer use.
ACCESSORIES
Material Handling Accessories include stainless-steel
chamber tracks and stainless-steel loading cars with paintedsteel or stainless-steel transfer carriages. Stainless-steel
chamber rack and shelf are available for 39" (991 mm)
sterilizers only. See separate product literature for details.
Steam-supply opening inside the chamber is shielded by a

stainless-steel baffle.
Chamber Door(s)
Door is constructed of Type 316L stainless steel.
Optional Integral Steam Generator is constructed of 316L

stainless steel or carbon steel. Generator is integral for 26 x
37.5" and 26 x 26" vertical door sterilizers. The steam generator
is equipped with three main heating elements. Generator is
operated by sterilizer control system. (Refer to ENGINEERING
DATA / UTILITY REQUIREMENTS on page 6 for utilities
specifications.)
During cycle operation, door is sealed by a steam-activated

door seal. Door seal is constructed of a special long-life rubber
compound. When sterilize cycle is complete, the seal retracts
under vacuum into a machined groove in the sterilizer's end
frame.
A proximity switch is used by the control to determine if door
is closed. An additional seal pressure switch prevents
inadvertent cycle initiation if door is not sealed.
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
The door assembly is equipped with a mechanical locking

mechanism that ensures the door cannot be opened as long
as the seal is intact and energized and more than 2 psig (0.14
bar) pressure is in the chamber.
A global network of skilled service specialists can provide

periodic inspections and adjustments to help assure low-cost
peak performance. STERIS representatives can provide
information regarding annual maintenance agreements.
The sterilizer door is fitted with a stainless-steel panel that

insulates the operator from the chamber end frame, reducing
the chance of accidental contact with a hot metal surface.
Chamber Drain System

Drain system is designed to prevent pollutants from entering
into the water-supply system and sterilizer.
The automatic condensing system, consisting of a heat
exchanger, converts chamber steam to condensate and
disposes condensate to waste. Cooling water flow is regulated
by the waste line RTD to minimize water usage. Water supply
shutoff valve is located in the recessed area of the unit.
NOTES
6. Depending on the loading equipment used, additional

clearance is required:
1. Customer is responsible for backflow protection, if required.
If shelves are used, length of sterilizer plus 24" (610 mm)

at each door (36" [914 mm] and 39" [991 mm] sterilizers,
only).
2. Pipe sizes shown indicate terminal outlets only. Building

service lines, provided by others, must supply the specified
pressures and flow rates.
If loading car and carriage will be used, twice the length

of sterilizer at each door.
3. Disconnect switches (with OFF position lockout only;

switches not supplied by STERIS) should be installed in
electric supply lines near the equipment.
7. Floor drain should be provided within confines of sterilizer

framework.
4. Access to the recessing area from the control end of the

sterilizer is recommended.
CUSTOMER IS RESPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE WITH

APPLICABLE LOCAL AND NATIONAL CODES AND
REGULATIONS.
5. Clearances shown are minimal for installing and servicing

the equipment.
ENGINEERING DATA / UTILITY REQUIREMENTS

Drain:
Electric:
House Steam:
2" ODT drain terminal (Floor drain capacity must handle peak water consumption)
Control and Vacuum Pump: 208-240 Volt, 3-phase, 50/60 Hz, 12 Amps/phase. 16A circuit breaker recommended.
480 Volt, 3-phase, 50/60 Hz, 6 Amps/phase. 8A circuit breaker recommended.
Size: 3/4" NPT
Pressure: 50 to 80 psig (3.45 to 5.5 bar), dynamic, condensate free, and 97% to 100% vapor quality.
Consumption
(270F [132C] Cycle):
26 x 26" (660 x 660 mm)
26 x 37.5" (660 x 953 mm)
Feed Water:
Average: 42 lb/cycle (19 kg/cycle)
Peak: 310 PPH (141 kg/hr)
Size: 3/4" NPT,

Pressure: 20 to 50 psig (1.4 to 3.5 bar), dynamic. Temperature: 59F (15C), maximum.
Consumption:
26 x 26" (660 x 660 mm)
39" (991 mm) Chamber Length Peak: 13 gpm (49 lpm) / Average: 112 gal/cycle (424 l/cycle)
26 x 37.5" (660 x 953 mm)
Compressed Air (CA):

Sterilizer Operating Weight:
Optional Integral Steam Generator:
1/4" NPT 80-100 psig (5.5 to 6.9 bar psig), oil free, dehumidified, 3 cfm
26 x 26 x 39" (660 x 660 x 991 mm) 2756 lb (1250 kg)
26 x 26 x 49" (660 x 660 x 1245 mm) 3200 lb (1450 kg)
26 x 26 x 61" (660 x 660 x 1549 mm ) 3500 lb (1590 kg)
26 x 37.5 x 42" (660 x 950 x 1067 mm) 3800 lb (1720 kg)
26 x 37.5 x 54" (660 x 950 x 1372 mm) 4200 lb (1900 kg)
26 x 37.5 x 66" (660 x 953 x 1676 mm) 4700 lb (2132 kg)
Water: 3/4 NPT; hot water temperature 140F (60C).
Generator Drain: 3/4" NPT
Electric: 208 Volt, 50/60Hz, 203 Amp, 3-phase minimum. 300A circuit breaker recommended.
240 Volt, 50/60Hz, 176 Amp, 3-phase minimum. 225A circuit breaker recommended.
480 Volt, 50/60Hz, 89 Amp, 3-phase minimum. 125A circuit breaker recommended.
Boiler empty weight: 595 lb (270 kg); boiler operating weight: 800 lb (363 kg)
Telecommunications Requirements
for ProConnect Response Center
Each sterilizer requires an active wired or wireless TCP/IP network, 10/100BaseT Ethernet connection located as
indicated on the equipment drawing, Internet access and an IP address on the facility network.
For connection via a separate PC: 5 GB of available hard drive space to run the service agent. Can be installed on:
Dedicated PC running Windows XP with 2.8GHz processor, 512MB of RAM
Virtual Machine
Server
Local STERIS login at the PC with a username of STERIS and the password should be ProConnect (STERIS Customer
Number).
Ethernet cable to connect each piece of STERIS equipment and the dedicated PC to the facility network, if not
connected directly to the sterilizer control.
6
NOTES:
1. Chamber length(s) indicated within brackets [ ] following Equipment Drawing Title.
Refer to the Following Equipment Drawings for Installation Details

Equipment Drawing Number
Equipment Drawing Title
62941-091
General Notes Applicable to Sterilizer Equipment Drawings
129390-151
26 x 26" Evolution Steam Ster. Double Sliding Door Recessed Two Walls Electric Heat
with Steam Generator [49" (1245 mm), 61" (1549 mm)]
129390-152
26 x 26" Evolution Steam Ster. Double Sliding Door Recessed Two Walls Steam Heat
[49" (1245 mm), 61" (1549 mm)]
129390-153
26 x 26" Evolution Steam Ster. Single Sliding Door Recessed One Wall Electric Heat
129390-154
26 x 26" Evolution Steam Ster. Single Sliding Door Recessed One Wall Steam Heat
[49" (1245 mm), 61" (1549 mm)]
129390-155
26 x 26" Evolution Steam Ster. Single Sliding Door Cabinet Steam Heat [49" (1245
mm), 61" (1549 mm)]
129390-156
26 x 26" Evolution Steam Ster. Single Sliding Door Cabinet Electric Heat with Steam
Generator [49" (1245 mm), 61" (1549 mm)]
129390-157
26 x 26" Evolution Steam Ster. Double Sliding Door Recessed One Wall Steam Heat
[49" (1245 mm), 61" (1549 mm)]
129390-158
26 x 26" Evolution Steam Ster. Double Sliding Door Recessed One Wall Electric Heat
129390-168
26 x 26" Evolution Steam Ster. Double Sliding Door Recessed Two Walls Electric Heat
with Steam Generator [39" (991 mm)]
129390-169
26 x 26" Evolution Steam Ster. Double Sliding Door Recessed Two Walls Steam Heat
[39" (991 mm)]
129390-170
26 x 26" Evolution Steam Ster. Double Sliding Door Recessed One Wall Steam Heat
[39" (991 mm)]
129390-171
26 x 26" Evolution Steam Ster. Double Sliding Door Recessed One Wall Electric Heat
with Steam Generator [39" (991 mm)]
129390-159
26 x 37-1/2" Evolution Steam Ster. Double Sliding Door Recessed Two Walls Electric
Heat with Steam Generator [48" (1219 mm), 60" 1524 mm)]
129390-160
26 x 37-1/2" Evolution Steam Ster. Double Sliding Door Recessed Two Walls Steam
Heat [48" (1219 mm), 60" 1524 mm)]
129390-161
26 x 37-1/2" Evolution Steam Ster. Single Sliding Door Recessed One Wall Electric
129390-162
26 x 37-1/2" Evolution Steam Ster. Single Sliding Door Recessed One Wall Steam Heat
[48" (1219 mm), 60" 1524 mm)]
129390-163
26 x 37-1/2" Evolution Steam Ster. Single Sliding Door Cabinet Steam Heat [48" (1219
mm), 60" 1524 mm)]
129390-164
26 x 37-1/2" Evolution Steam Ster. Single Sliding Door Cabinet Electric Heat with
Steam Generator [48" (1219 mm), 60" 1524 mm)]
129390-165
26 x 37-1/2" Evolution Steam Ster. Double Sliding Door Recessed One Wall Steam
Heat [48" (1219 mm), 60" 1524 mm)]
129390-166
26 x 37-1/2" Evolution Steam Ster. Double Sliding Door Recessed One Wall Electric
129390-172
26 x 37-1/2" Evolution Steam Ster. Double Sliding Door Recessed Two Walls Electric
Heat with Steam Generator [36" (914 mm)]
129390-173
26 x 37-1/2" Evolution Steam Ster. Double Sliding Door Recessed Two Walls Steam
Heat [36" (914 mm)]
Refer to the Following Equipment Drawings for Installation Details (Continued)

129390-174
26 x 37-1/2" Evolution Steam Ster. Double Sliding Door Recessed One Wall Steam
Heat [36" (914 mm)]
129390-175
26 x 37-1/2" Evolution Steam Ster. Double Sliding Door Recessed One Wall Electric
129390-213
26 x 37-1/2" Evolution Steam Ster. Single Sliding Door Recessed One Wall Electric
129390-214
26 x 37-1/2" Evolution Steam Ster. Single Sliding Door Recessed One Wall Steam Heat
[36" (914 mm)]
129390-215
26 x 37-1/2" Evolution Steam Ster. Single Sliding Door Cabinet Steam Heat [36" (914
mm)]
129390-216
26 x 37-1/2" Evolution Steam Ster. Single Sliding Door Cabinet Electric Heat with
Steam Generator [36" (914 mm)]
129390-201
26 x 37-1/2" Evolution Steam Ster. Single (Hinge) Door Recessed One Wall Electric
129390-202
26 x 37-1/2" Evolution Steam Ster. Single (Hinge) Door Recessed One Wall Steam
Heat [48" (1219 mm), 60" 1524 mm)]
129390-203
26 x 37-1/2" Evolution Steam Ster. Single (Hinge) Door Cabinet Electric Heat with
Steam Generator [48" (1219 mm), 60" 1524 mm)]
129390-204
26 x 37-1/2" Evolution Steam Ster. Single (Hinge) Door Cabinet Steam Heat [48" (1219
mm), 60" 1524 mm)]
129390-205
26 x 37-1/2" Evolution Steam Ster. Single (Hinge) Door Recessed Two Walls Electric
129390-206
26 x 37-1/2" Evolution Steam Ster. Double (Hinge) Door Cabinet Steam Heat [48"
(1219 mm), 60" 1524 mm)]
129390-207
26 x 37-1/2" Evolution Steam Ster. Double (Hinge) Door Recessed One Wall Electric
129290-208
26 x 37-1/2" Evolution Steam Ster. Double (Hinge) Door Recessed One Wall Steam
Heat [48" (1219 mm), 60" 1524 mm)]
129390-209
26 x 37-1/2" Evolution Steam Ster. Double (Hinge) Door Recessed Two Walls Electric
129390-210
26 x 37-1/2" Evolution Steam Ster. Double (Hinge) Door Recessed Two Walls Steam
Heat [36" (914 mm)]
129390-211
26 x 37-1/2" Evolution Steam Ster. Double (Hinge) Door Recessed One Wall Electric
129390-212
26 x 37-1/2" Evolution Steam Ster. Double (Hinge) Door Recessed One Wall Steam
Heat [36" (914 mm)]
129390-221
26 x 37-1/2" Evolution Steam Ster. Single (Hinge) Door Recessed One Wall Electric
129390-222
26 x 37-1/2" Evolution Steam Ster. Single (Hinge) Door Recessed One Wall Steam
Heat [36" (914 mm)]
129390-223
26 x 37-1/2" Evolution Steam Ster. Single (Hinge) Door Cabinet Electric Heat with
Steam Generator [36" (914 mm)]
129390-224
26 x 37-1/2" Evolution Steam Ster. Single (Hinge) Door Cabinet Steam Heat [36"
(914 mm)]
Recessed, Two Walls 26 x 26" (660 x 660 mm)

Double Sliding-Door Configuration
Drawing not to scale.

Dimensions are typical.
NOTE: Refer to table on

page 6 for engineering
data and utilities
4.5" (114 mm)

Typical
Plan View
28.5"
(724 mm)
52"
(1321 mm)
50" (1270 mm)
0.25" (6 mm)
Service Clearance
(see Table 1, page 10)
Typical Wall Opening
4" (102 mm)

Typical Both Walls
Operating End
NonOperating
End
80.5"
(2045 mm)
77" (1956 mm)
0.25" (6 mm)
Wall
Opening
44.5"
(1130 mm)
Finished
Floor
Side View
Drawing not to scale. Dimensions are typical.

data and utilities
Recessed, One Wall 26 x 26" (660 x 660 mm)

Single Sliding-Door Configuration
4.5" (114 mm)
Typical
28.5"
(724 mm)
1321 mm
(52")
50" (1270 mm)
0.25" (6 mm)
Typical Wall Opening
4" (102 mm)

Typical
Service Clearance
(see Table 1)
Operating End
80.5"
(2045 mm)
77" (1956 mm)
0.25" (6 mm)
44.5"
(1130 mm)
Finished
Floor
Side View
Table 1. 26 x 26" (660 x 660 mm) Sterilizer Service Clearance (Dimension "S")
Chamber
Length
39" (991 mm)
Recessed,
Two Walls
Recessed,
One Wall
Cabinet,
Single Door
46" (1168 mm)
46" (1168 mm)
N/A
10

data and utilities
Cabinet Enclosed 26 x 26" (660 x 660 mm)

Single Sliding-Door Configuration
4.5" (114 mm)
Typical
Plan View
28.5"
(699 mm)
52"
(1321 mm)
71"
(1803 mm)
Service Clearance
Operating End
80.5"
(2045 mm)
44.5"
(1130 mm)
Finished
Floor
Side View
11
Recessed, Two Walls 26 x 37.5" (660 x 953 mm)

Drawing not to scale.

Dimensions are typical.

data and utilities
114 mm (4.5")
Typical Both Walls
Plan View
28.9"
(733 mm)
73"
(1853 mm)
Service Clearance
4" (102 mm)
Typical Both Walls
NonOperating
End
Operating
End
77.25"
(1962 mm)
74.25" (1886 mm)

0.25" (6 mm)
42"
(1067 mm)
Finished
Floor
Side View
Table 2. 660 x 953 Sterilizer Service Clearance (Dimension "S")

Chamber
Length
66" (1676 mm)
Double Door
Recessed, One Wall
Double Door
Recessed, Two Walls
Single Door
Recessed, One Wall
66" (1676 mm)
77.25" (1962 mm)
95.5" (2425 mm)
12
Cabinet,
Single Door
78.5" (1994 mm)

data and utilities
Recessed, One Wall 26 x 37.5" (660 x 953 mm)

4.5" (114 mm)
Typical
Plan View
28.9"
(733 mm)
73"
(1853 mm)
Service Clearance
4" (102mm)
Typical
NonOperating
End
Operating
End
77.25"
(1962 mm) Typical
74.25" (1886 mm)

0.25" (6 mm)
Wall Opening
42"
(1067 mm)
Finished
Floor
Side View
13

data and utilities
Recessed Two Walls 26 x 37.5" (660 x 953 mm)

Double Hinge-Door Configuration
Plan View
Non-Operating
End
26"
(660 mm)
57.5"
(1460 mm)
Wall Opening
Service Clearance
NonOperating
End
Operating
End
79.25"
(2013 mm)
0.25" (6mm)
Wall
Opening
74.25"
(1886 mm)
0.25" (6mm)
42"
(1067 mm)
Finished
Floor
Side View
Table 3. 26 x 37.5 (660 x 953 mm) Hinge-Door Sterilizer Service Clearance

Chamber
Length
Double Door
Recessed, One Wall
Double Door
Recessed, Two Walls
Single Door
Recessed One Wall
Cabinet
Single Door
66" (1676 mm)
72" (1829 mm)
76" (1930 mm)
96" (2435 mm)
83" (2121mm)
14

data and utilities
Recessed, One Wall 26 x 37.5" (660 x 953 mm)

Single Hinge-Door Configuration
Clearance for Right-Hand

Door Swing
4.5"
(114 mm)
Plan View
36"
(914 mm)
29.5"
(749 mm)
36"
(914 mm)
Service Clearance
Clearance for Left-Hand

Door Swing
30"
(762 mm)
Front Clearance for Door

Swing
Operating
End
77.25"
(1,962 mm)
42"
(1,067 mm)
Finished
Floor
Side View
15
For Further Information, contact:

STERIS Corporation
5960 Heisley Road
440-354-2600 800-548-4873
www.steris.com
SD889 2011, STERIS Corporation. All rights reserved. (02/01/11)
This document is intended for the exclusive use of STERIS Customers, including
architects or designers. Reproduction in whole or in part by any party other than
a Customer is prohibited.
AMSCO EVOLUTION FLOORLOADER

STEAM STERILIZER
APPLICATION
This sterilizer is configured for
prevacuum sterilization of heat- and
moisture-stable materials used in
healthcare facilities. These units are
equipped with prevacuum, Steam Flush
Pressure Pulse (SFPP), gravity, liquid,
DART (Bowie-Dick) and vacuum leak
test cycles.
DESCRIPTION
Amsco Evolution Floor Loading
Steam Sterilizers are to be easy to use
and are equipped with the latest stateof-the-art technology.
Primary Product Features

All plumbing components are
mounted to a free-standing,
modular rack (stand). The stand
connects to the core sterilizer
assembly during installation.
The sterilizers horizontal-sliding
door travels horizontally right to left to
open.
An advanced, PC-based control
system employs user-friendly
interface screens, with enhanced
graphics.
8.4" (214 mm) color touch screen
display.
Ink-on-paper impact printer.
Standard communication interface
with most PC-compatible peripheral
devices (e.g., data collection
systems, printers).
Typical only - some details may vary.
Control is designed to accommodate

remote monitoring and instrument
tracking interfaces.
Underwriters Laboratory (UL)

Standard 61010-1 as certified by
Intertek Testing services.
STANDARDS
Canadian Standards Association

(CSA) Standard C22.2, No. 1010 as
certified by Intertek Testing services.
Each sterilizer meets applicable

requirements of the following listings and
standards, and carries the appropriate
symbols:
FEATURES
ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1

for unfired pressure vessels. The
pressure vessel is so stamped; ASME
Form U-1 is furnished. Shell and door
are constructed to withstand working
pressure of 45 psig (3.1 bar).
Pressure Equipment Directive,
PED 97/23/EC
26 x 61" (660 x 1550 mm) Chamber

Cross-section sized to allow for efficient,
high-volume processing of sterilization
containers, trays and packs.
Power Door slides open or closed
horizontally, using a pneumaticallydriven cylinder mechanism. Horizontalsliding door is controlled from control
panel push buttons. Double door

TYPE
Prevacuum
Steam Flush Pressure Pulse (SFPP)
MODEL NUMBER/SIZE
HC2000 / 26 x 61 x 49"
(660 x 1550 x 1245 mm)
HC3000 / 26 x 61 x 72"
(660 x 1550 x 1850 mm)
STERILIZER ELECTRIC SERVICE
208/240 V ac, 50/60 Hz, 3-Phase, 12 A/Phase
480 V ac, 50/60 Hz, 3-Phase, 6 A/Phase
STEAM SOURCE
House Steam
STEAM PIPING
Copper/Brass
Stainless Steel
DOOR CONFIGURATION
Single-Door
Horizontal-Sliding (Left-Hand)
Double-Door
Horizontal-Sliding Door (Left-Hand/RightHand)
NOTES: Operating end slide direction listed first,
Non-operating end slide direction listed second.
(Direction of door movement is right-hand to lefthand, as viewed from the sterilizer's operating
end.)
ACCESSORIES
One Loading Car for 49" (1245 mm) Chamber
Length
Two Loading Cars for 72" (1850 mm) Chamber
Length
REMOTE MONITORING
ProConnect Response Center (Remote
Monitoring, Priority Technical Support,
Customer Care Center Access, Equipment
Performance Reports)
SINGLE-DOOR MOUNTING
Recessed
DOUBLE-DOOR MOUNTING
Recessed through Two Walls
Item ________________________
Location(s)___________________
____________________________
SD922 (07/01/10)
Model Number
Internal Dimensions
Inches (Millimeters)
Cubic
Inches
Cubic
Feet
HC2000
26 x 61 x 49" (660 x 1550 x 1245 mm)
77,714
45.0
HC3000
26 x 61 x 72" (660 x 1550 x 1850 mm)
144,192
66.1
configurations are supplied with controls at both ends of the

sterilizer.
Software calibration is performed in the Service Mode,
accessible through the touch screen displays, and
accomplished using external or internal temperature and
pressure sources. Control system provides printed record of
all calibration data for verification to current readings.
Pneumatic valves are used in piping for steam, water, door
and exhaust control.
Principle piping components and the primary control
assembly are mounted to a separate, modular support rack
(plumbing stand). The plumbing stand connects during
installation to the core chamber, allowing for increased access
for service and maintenance procedures when necessary.
Ready State Screen
ProConnect Response Center Minimize service response

time and unscheduled downtime on your equipment. Secure,
internet-based, 24/7 remote monitoring enables both
Predictive Maintenance as well as rapid alerts to STERIS when
there is an equipment alarm. Also included are priority technical
support, online parts ordering, equipment performance
dashboards and scheduling service at eservice.steris.com.
UTILITIES CONSERVATION FEATURES

Resistive Thermal Detectors (RTD) are installed for precise
sterilizer temperature control and conservation of utilities. The
dual element chamber drain line RTD senses and controls
temperature variations within the sterilizer chamber. A jacket
RTD provides temperature control within the jacket space.
These RTD signals, converted into electrical impulses, provide
accurate control inputs and readouts throughout entire cycle.
Options Screen
series of vacuum/pressure pulses to condition the load prior to

sterilization.
Dry Times for Prevacuum and SFPP (see below) are based
upon maximum load as follows:
Electronic water saving control includes an RTD to minimize

the amount of water used in condensing the exhausted
chamber steam and condensate.
26 x 61 x 49" (660 x 1550 x 1245 mm) sterilizer 15 wrapped

instrument trays (25 lb [11 kg]).
An automatic utilities start-up/shutdown function enables

the Customer to conserve utilities. Shutdown may be
programmed to activate at the end of any designated cycle or
time of day. When activated, the control system automatically
shuts off all utility valves, conserving steam and water usage.
Sterilizer utilities can be restarted either by programmed time
or manual operation. A different shutdown and restart time can
be programmed for each day.
26 x 61 x 72" (660 x 1550 x 1850 mm) sterilizer 25 wrapped

instrument trays (25 lb [11 kg]).
Actual required dry times may vary depending on load.
Prevacuum Configuration Sterilizers are factory
programmed with the following cycles: 270F (132C)
Prevacuum, Gravity, SFPP, Liquid, 275F (135C) Prevacuum
and Test Cycles. Prevacuum cycles feature vacuum pulses
followed by pressure pulses for porous load cycles. See cycle
Two-stage vacuum pump is supplied on all units and draws

the chamber to specified vacuum levels, reducing cycle time
by shortening conditioning and exhaust times. Since a water
ejector is not used, water consumption is reduced.
Default Prevac Cycles

PROCESSING CYCLES
All processing cycles factory-programmed into the sterilizer
control have been validated to AAMI/ANSI ST-8.
IMPORTANT: Applicable cycles have been validated to satisfy
the requirements outlined below. If cycle parameters (sterilize
time, dry time, temperature) other than those listed are required,
it is the responsibility of the healthcare facility to consult and
follow the device manufacturers written instructions.

Prevacuum cycles are intended for efficient, high-volume

processing of heat- and moisture-stable materials, such as
fabrics and wrapped hard goods. This process incorporates a
2
270F (132C) SFPP Cycle: For sterilizing a single fabric

pack.
270F (132C) Prevacuum Cycle: For sterilizing a single

fabric pack.
Dry time: 5 minutes
Dry time: 5 minutes








TESTING CYCLES
Steam Flush Pressure Pulse (SFPP) configuration sterilizers

are factory programmed with the following cycles: SFPP,
Prevacuum, Gravity, Liquid and Test Cycles. See cycle
DART Warm-up Cycle: This cycle is used to warm chamber

to operating temperature prior to performing a DART (BowieDick) Test cycle (or other operating cycles).
DART (Bowie-Dick) Test Cycle: This cycle is used for
conducting Bowie-Dick tests. Recommended load is a
properly prepared Bowie-Dick test pack. Preprogrammed
cycle parameters cannot be adjusted by the user.
Default SFPP Cycles

270F (132C) SFPP Cycle: For efficient, high-volume
processing of double wrapped instrument trays and fabric
packs. This process incorporates a series of steam flushes
and pressure pulses at pressures above atmospheric levels
to condition load prior to sterilization.
Sterilize temperature: 270 (132C)

Sterilize time: 3 minutes and 30 seconds
Dry time: 1 minute
Vacuum Leak Test: This cycle is used for testing the

vacuum integrity of the sterilizers piping. Sterilizer chamber
must be empty while running this test cycle. All timing is
preprogrammed and cannot be adjusted.

275F (135C) SFPP Cycle: For sterilizing double-wrapped
instrument trays.
Time display and printout units 24-hour or AM/PM.
CONTROL SYSTEM
Audible signals, end-of-cycle signals and alarm signals

have three adjustable volume levels available through the
control and display panel.
Design Features
The control system monitors and controls all sterilizer
operations and functions. The control system is factoryprogrammed with standard sterilizing cycles. Each cycle is
adjustable to meet specific processing requirements.
Sterilization times and temperatures for standard cycles cannot
be adjusted below default minimum values. All operatoraccessible control functions can be changed using the touch
screen control.
Temperature display and printout units Fahrenheit (F) or

Celsius (C). Temperature is set, displayed, controlled and
printed to the nearest 0.1. Recalibration is not required
when changing temperature units.
Pressure/vacuum display and printout units psig/InHg or
bar. Recalibration is not required when changing pressure
units.
IMPORTANT: If cycle parameters (sterilize time, dry time,

temperature) other than those listed are required, it is the
responsibility of the healthcare facility to consult and follow the
device manufacturers written instructions.
SAFETY FEATURES
Emergency stop button located on the front panel, below the
sterilizer control touch pad. When pressed, immediately shuts
off all outputs on the sterilizer. A key is used to reset the switch.
Cycle values and operating features may be adjusted and

verified prior to cycle operation. Cycle parameters are retained
in control memory for repeated use.
Control lockout switch equipped on chamber door(s), senses

when door seal is energized and tight against the door. Control
prevents cycle from starting until the limit switch signal is
received. If control loses appropriate signal during cycle, alarm
activates, cycle aborts and chamber safely vents with a
controlled exhaust.
Once cycle is started, cycles and cycle values cannot be

changed until cycle is complete. If chamber temperature drops
below set point during the exposure phase, the timer is set to
stop and automatically reset once normal operating
temperature is reached to help assure proper exposure time
for the load.
Chamber float switch activates alarm, aborts cycle and safely

vents chamber with a controlled exhaust if excessive
condensate is detected in the vessel chamber.
Critical control system components are housed within a sealed

compartment to protect the components from moisture and
heat generated during the sterilization process.
Pressure relief valve limits the amount of pressure buildup so

that the rated pressure in the vessel is not exceeded.
Operator interface control panel, consisting of a touch

screen, is located on the operating (i.e., load or non-sterile)
end of the sterilizer.
Power door safety switches, located on leading edge of the

door, cause pneumatic door movement to stop if door
encounters an obstruction during movement.
The operator interface consists of an emergency stop button,

door control buttons and a touch-sensitive, color display.
The display allows for control communications, graphics and
excellent visibility in most environments. The display panel, in
conjunction with the control, is used as the monitor for the
operator. All sterilizer functions, including cycle initiation and
cycle configuration, are operated by pressing the touchsensitive areas on the display. Display indicates appropriate
control buttons, operator prompts and status messages
necessary to assist in sterilizer operation. All displayed
messages are complete phrases or internationally
recognizable graphic icons with no codes to be crossreferenced. Display also indicates any abnormal conditions
that may exist either in or out of a cycle. Control buffer memory
retains up to ten previously-run cycles for later access.
Stainless-steel door cover panel insulates the operator from

the chamber door and end frame, reducing accidental contact
with a hot metal surface.
CONSTRUCTION
Shell Assembly
The chamber pressure vessel is a fully jacketed-type that meets
ASME and PED pressure vessel codes. The pressure vessel
inner shell (chamber) and outer shell (jacket) are designed to
withstand operating pressures from full vacuum to 45 psig (3.1
bar). The chamber is constructed of AISI 316L stainless steel.
The chamber interior is glass-beaded to a fine finish.
24-Character ink-on-paper printer, located below touch

screen, provides an easy-to-read printed record of all pertinent
cycle data on 2.25" (57 mm) wide paper. Data is automatically
printed at the beginning and end of each cycle and at transition
points during the cycle.Three paper tape rolls and two printer
ribbons are furnished with each unit.
The 304 stainless-steel jacket is insulated with1- 1/4" (32mm)

of rigid fiberglass insulation with aluminum foil on its outer face.
Insulation is fully enclosed by rigid aluminum sheathing.
Non-operating end (NOE) control panel, on double-door

sterilizers only, includes a touch sensitive screen similar to the
operating end screen. Preprogrammed cycles can be started
from the NOE control panel. Display concurrently shows the
same information as the operating end screen display. Other
controls located at the non-operating end include door control
pushbuttons, jacket and chamber gauges and an emergencystop button.
Chamber Door(s)
The steam-supply openings, inside the chamber, are shielded

by a full-length baffle to evenly distribute the steam as it enters
the chamber.
The door is constructed of AISI 316L stainless steel and
insulated with mineral wool to reduce heat transfer to the
stainless-steel door cover.
The door is equipped with a one-piece, silicone sealing
gasket. The gasket is activated by steam pressure and
retracted by pulling a vacuum.
A proximity switch is used by the control to determine if the
door is closed. An additional seal pressure switch prevents
inadvertent cycle initiation if door is not sealed.
Cycle configuration is performed by accessing the Change

Values menu through the operating end touch screen.
In addition to adjustment of cycle values, the following
operating parameters can also be changed through the
Machine Setup menu:
The door assembly is equipped with a door-lock cylinder that

ensures the door cannot be opened as long as the seal is intact,
ACCESSORIES
energized and more than 2 psig (0.14 bar) pressure is in the

chamber.
Chamber Drain System
Material Handling Accessories include stainless-steel

loading cars with adjustable shelves.
Drain system is designed to prevent pollutants from entering

into the water-supply system and sterilizer.
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
The automatic condensing system, consisting of a heat

exchanger, converts chamber steam to condensate and
disposes condensate to waste. Cooling water flow is regulated
by the waste line RTD to minimize water usage and maintain
water temperature below 140F (60C). Water supply shutoff
valve is located in the recessed area of the unit.
A global network of skilled service specialists can provide

periodic inspections and adjustments to help assure low-cost
peak performance. STERIS representatives can provide
information regarding annual maintenance agreements.
NOTES
Vacuum System
1. Customer is responsible for backflow protection, if required.
Two-stage vacuum pump reduces chamber pressure during

prevacuum and post-drying phases. Air is drawn from the
chamber through the vacuum system. Following the dry phase,
chamber vacuum is relieved to atmospheric pressure by
admitting air through a bacteria-retentive filter.
2. Pipe sizes shown indicate terminal outlets only. Building

service lines, provided by others, must supply the specified
pressures and flow rates.
3. Disconnect switches (with OFF position lockout only;
switches not supplied by STERIS) should be installed in
electric supply lines near the equipment.
Steam Source
Sterilizers are piped, valved and trapped to receive buildingsupplied steam delivered at 50 to 80 psig (3.4 to 5.5 bar)
dynamic. Standard steam piping is constructed of copper and
brass and includes a shutoff valve, strainer and a pressure
regulator. A stainless steel version of the plumbing stand is
also available.
4. Access to the recessing area from the control end of the

sterilizer is recommended.
5. Clearances shown are minimal for installing and servicing
the equipment.
6. Loading equipment clearance required:
Piping
For 49" (1245 mm) chamber, one 47" (1194 mm) loading
car used,
77" (1956 mm) clearance required.
All piping is located on a modular plumbing rack (stand).
MOUNTING ARRANGEMENT
For 72" (1850 mm) chamber, one 28" (711 mm) and one
41" (1041 mm) loading car used, 71" (1803 mm)
clearance required.
Sterilizer is arranged for mounting in a pit so that the floor of

the chamber is at the same level as the floor of the adjacent
work area. This allows a loading cart to be easily moved into
and out of the sterilizer. Mount through one partition wall (single
door units) or two partition walls (double door units), as
specified. Flexible gaskets ensure tight fit of sterilizer panels
to wall partition(s) as required. Major panels are stainless steel.
Lifting lugs facilitate transporting and positioning sterilizer.
Sterilizer is height-adjustable for leveling.
7. Floor drain should be provided at location specified on

Equipment Drawing.
CUSTOMER IS RESPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE WITH
APPLICABLE LOCAL AND NATIONAL CODES AND
REGULATIONS.
Recommended 12" x 12" (305 x 305 mm)

Floor sink with 6" (152 mm) Sump Depth.
Including a Reusable Plastic Splash Dome
Strainer and 3" (76 mm) Drain Pipe
Connection (Provided and Installed by
Others)
Recommended 2" x 2" x 3/16"

(50 x 50 x 5 mm) Stainlesssteel Angle Around Perimeter
of Pit (Provided and Installed
by Others)
SLOPE
SLOPE
Floor Sink Detail
ENGINEERING DATA / UTILITY REQUIREMENTS

Drain:
Electric
Control and Vacuum Pump:
House Steam:
2" ODT drain terminal (Floor drain capacity must handle peak water consumption).
208-240 Volt, 3-phase, 50/60 Hz, 12 Amps/phase. 16A circuit breaker recommended, or
480 Volt, 3-phase, 50/60 Hz, 6 Amps/phase. 8A circuit breaker recommended, or
Outside North America: 400 Volt, 3-phase, 50Hz, 8A circuit breaker recommended.
Size: 3/4" NPT
Pressure: 50 to 80 psig (3.4 to 5.5 bar), dynamic, condensate free, and 97% to 100% vapor quality.
Consumption (270F [132C] Cycle):

49" (1245 mm)

72" (1850 mm)

Feed Water:
Size: 3/4" NPT,

Pressure: 20 to 50 psig (1.4 to 3.4 bar), dynamic. Temperature: 59F (15C), maximum.
Consumption:
26 x 61 x 49" (660 x 1550 x 1245 mm)
Peak: 18.5 gpm (70 lpm) / Average: 223 gal/cycle (844 l/cycle).
26 x 61 x 72" (660 x 1550 x 1830 mm)
Peak: 18.4 gpm (69.7 lpm) / Average: 318 gal/cycle (1,204 l/cycle).
Compressed Air (CA):

Sterilizer Operating Weight:
Telecommunications Requirements for

ProConnect Response Center
1/4" NPT 80 - 100 psig (5.5 to 8.3 bar psig), oil free, dehumidified, 3 cfm (5.1 cmh).
26 x 61 x 49" (660 x 1550 x 1245 mm) 6920 lb (3139 kg)
26 x 61 x 72" (660 x 1550 x 1850 mm) 8812 lb (3997 kg)
An active wired or wireless TCP/IP network, 10/100BaseT Ethernet connection at each piece of connected
equipment, Internet access and an IP address on the facility network.
For connection via a separate PC: 5 GB of available hard drive space to run the service agent. Can be installed on:
Dedicated PC running Windows XP with 2.8GHz processor, 512MB of RAM
Virtual Machine
Server
Local STERIS login at the PC with a username of STERIS and the password should be ProConnect (STERIS
Customer Number).
Ethernet cable to connect each piece of STERIS equipment and the dedicated PC to the facility network.
Refer to the Following Equipment Drawings for Installation Details

62941-091
General Notes Applicable to Sterilizer Equipment Drawings
129391-136
26 x 61 x 49 Evolution Pit Mounted Floorloader Steam Sterilizer Single L. H. Sliding

Door Recessed One Wall Steam Heat
129391-137
26 x 61 x 49 Evolution Pit Mounted Floorloader Steam Sterilizer Double L. H. Sliding

Door Recessed Two Walls Steam Heat
129391-138
26 x 61 x 72 Evolution Pit Mounted Floorloader Steam Sterilizer Single L. H. Sliding

Door Recessed One Wall Steam Heat
129391-139
26 x 61 x 72 Evolution Pit Mounted Floorloader Steam Sterilizer Double L. H. Sliding

Door Recessed Two Walls Steam Heat
15"
(381 mm)
Loading Cart
Clearance
C
PIT
A
15"
(381 mm)
4-1/8" (106 mm)

25-7/8"
(656 mm)
39-1/2"
(1002 mm)
24-1/2"
(621 mm)
82-1/8"
(2086 mm)
89-1/2"
(2266 mm)
109-1/8"
(2772 mm)
38-1/4"
(970 mm)
84-5/8"
(2151 mm)
n
o
ti
31-5/8"
(803 mm)
a
l
l
a
t
s
PLAN VIEW
See Floor
Sink Detail
o
F
n
I
r
Pit Floor
Surface*
ot
B
Service Clearance
PIT
12" (305 mm)
Wall Thickness
4" to 8""
(102-203 mm)
This wall is finished after
sterilizer installation
Operating
End
96", 1/4"
(2438 mm, 6 mm)
Finished
Wall Opening
82-3/4", 1/4"
(2102 mm, 6 mm)
Finished
Floor
11-3/4"
(298 mm)
SIDE VIEW
Table 1. 26 x 61" (660 x 1550 mm) Single Door Sterilizer Pit and Service Clearance Dimensions
Dimension
49" Single Door
72" Single Door
65-7/8" (1672 mm)
89-1/2" (2272 mm)
76-5/8" (1946mm)
100-1/4" (2546)
77" (1956 mm)
71" (1803 mm)
Loading Cart Clearance

B
(Typical for both Ends)
PIT
A
15"
(381 mm)
Service Clearance
4-1/8" (106 mm)

25-7/8"
(656 mm)
39-1/2"
(1002 mm)
24-1/2"
(621 mm)
See Floor Sink
Detail
82-1/8"
(2086 mm)
89-1/2"
(2266 mm)
109-1/8"
(2772 mm)
84-5/8"
(2151 mm)
38-1/4"
(970 mm)
31-5/8"
(803 mm)
a
l
l
a
t
s
Pit Floor
Surface*
t
o
This wall is finished after

sterilizer installation
n
I
r
o
F
57-1/2", +1/4" / -0
(1460 mm, +6 / -0)
n
o
ti
PLAN VIEW
PIT
12" (305 mm)
Wall Thickness
4" to 8""
(102-203 mm)
Operating
End
Non-Operating
End
96" 1/4"
(2438 mm 6 mm)
Finished
Wall Opening
SIDE VIEW
82-3/4" 1/4"
(2102 mm 6 mm)
Finished
Floor
Pit Depth:
11-3/4"
(298 mm)
Table 2. 26 x 61" (660 x 1550 mm) Double Door Sterilizer Pit Dimensions
Dimension
49" Double Door
72" Double Door
65-7/8" (1672 mm)
89-1/2" (2272 mm)
77" (1956 mm)
71" (1803 mm)
For Further Information, contact:

STERIS Corporation
5960 Heisley Road
440-354-2600 800-548-4873
www.steris.com
SD922 2010, STERIS Corporation. All rights reserved. (07/01/10)
This document is intended for the exclusive use of STERIS Customers, including
architects or designers. Reproduction in whole or in part by any party other than
a Customer is prohibited.

Equipment Mounting Info - Data Sheets

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Equipment Mounting Info - Data Sheets

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

ATTACHMENT 2

EQUIPMENT DATA SHEETS

Appendix 2E Equipment and Furniture

ALL OR'S SHOULD BE CONSIDERED AS FULLY INTEGRATED WITH

(Ref. Chart on Last Page)

Many health care facilities order Chromophare Surgical Lights for

Flat Panel, Only

Single Light with Flat

Double Light with Flat

Light Mounting Plate Detail

3/4 Co nd uit to AC Ma ins

BERCHTOLD Corporation 1950 Hanahan Road Charleston, SC 29406

Contractors Summary for CHROMOPHARE Multiple Surgical Light

TYPTop & Bottom

60" (1.5m) Maximum

Structura l Concrete Sla b

Conduit Plate Installation

Contractors Summary for CHROMOPHARE Multiple Surgical Light

Contractors Summary for CHROMOPHARE Multiple Surgical Light

One 120VAC, 50/60 Hz power

4 x 4 Junction box required for each

All conduit is to be a minimum of 3/4

Front of box flush with the wall

Conduits are to be deburred, cleaned,

Minimum 3-wire, 14 AWG, 600V

Top of box 53 above finished floor

Each lamp draws 2 Amps

1 conduit (with finish grommets at

Contractor is to provide cable protection

Run through flexible conduit

Wires exit the ceiling at the

Conduit stub-outs, junction boxes, and

2 X 4 Optional box for Camera

*Wallbox Dimensions are in millimeters

Soffit Size (dia.)

ALL OR'S SHOULD BE CONSIDERED AS FULLY

TELETOM Pre-Installation Guide

TELETOM Pre-Installation Guide

TELETOM Pre-Installation Guide

TELETOM Pre-Installation Guide

TELETOM Pre-Installation Guide

Cautions Used in this Manual

TELETOM Pre-Installation Guide

400/600 Series Anesthesia Boom

TELETOM Pre-Installation Guide

All TELETOM Equipment Management Systems are ETL certified to UL 60601.

Single mount TELETOM (see page 2-4)

Single mount TELETOM models with integral CHROMOPHARE Surgical Light or

Tandem mount TELETOM (see page 2-12)

Owners configuration drawings

Medical gas valve bridges (optionalsee page 4-3)

TELEVAC motor (optionalsee page 5-3)

TELETOM Pre-Installation Guide

TELETOM Pre-Installation Guide

TELETOM Pre-Installation Guide

TELETOM Equipment Management System Components

TELETOM Pre-Installation Guide

TELETOM Pre-Installation Guide

SECTION 2PRE-INSTALLATION STRUCTURAL REQUIREMENTS

3. Rigid component connections.

TELETOM Pre-Installation Guide

4. Welded component connections.

Hydraulic Ram Method: